JP6645748B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to pachinko machines (commonly referred to as "Pachinko machine") or a reel-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachi-slot machine") gaming machine and the like.

  Conventionally, so as to stop displaying the symbols in a manner that depends on the display device varies the display to lottery result a pattern to performs whether lottery and jackpot based on the game ball is finished in starting opening, lottery When the result is a big hit, a gaming machine is known in which a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on a display device to generate a big hit gaming state. In this jackpot game state, a large winning prize mouth as a winning prize which is normally closed is opened, and a large number of prize balls can be acquired in a short time by successively winning game balls in the large winning prize opening. .

  In addition, as a conventional gaming machine, an upper plate for storing a game medium for driving into the gaming region below a gaming region in a front view, and a gaming medium disposed below the upper plate and overflowing from the upper plate. Is generally provided with a lower plate in which is stored (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-28390 A

  However, conventional gaming machines have low appeal to players.

  In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having a high appeal to a player.

The present invention
A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed,
A body frame on which the game board is mounted,
A door frame provided to be openable and closable on the main body frame,
A bulging portion provided on the door frame, bulging forward below the game area in a front view, and forming a predetermined internal space;
An upper plate provided on the upper surface side of the bulging portion and storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area,
An operation device housed in the internal space and operable by a player;
A bottom plate having a bottom wall portion having a predetermined shape and a standing wall portion having a predetermined height, provided on the door frame, and a lower plate through which game media can flow in from a predetermined supply port;
The lower plate is provided in a space provided in the bulging portion and arranged in a horizontal direction with the internal space,
The lower plate main body has a first lower plate portion formed with an area facing the front of the gaming machine, and a second lower plate portion provided integrally with the first lower plate portion and formed with a region not facing the front of the gaming machine. And 2 lower plates,
Cover means for covering the upper side of the second lower dish upon which is constituted by a separate member separable and the lower dish body, the lower as integrated with said lower pan body regardless closing state of the door frame Assemble to the dish body ,
The cover means includes a boundary wall serving as a boundary between the space above the bottom wall portion and the internal space in the second lower plate portion,
The boundary wall prevents the game medium from flowing out of the second lower plate portion to the outside of the lower plate other than the first lower plate portion, and the game medium flows from the second lower plate portion to the internal space. To prevent intrusion,
A closing portion for closing the rear of the internal space is provided in the door frame,
Furthermore, on the opposite side of the side where the lower plate is provided with the internal space as a boundary, a handle portion for emitting game media is provided,
The bulging portion is provided so as to protrude forward of the gaming machine from a frontmost portion of the handle portion.
A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed;
A body frame on which the game board is mounted,
A door frame provided to be openable and closable on the main body frame,
A bulging portion provided on the door frame, bulging forward below the game area in a front view, and forming a predetermined internal space;
An upper plate provided on the upper surface side of the bulging portion and storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area,
An effect device that is housed in the internal space and has a predetermined effect,
A bottom plate having a bottom wall portion having a predetermined shape and a standing wall portion having a predetermined height, provided on the door frame, and a lower plate through which game media can flow in from a predetermined supply port;
The lower plate is provided in a space provided in the bulging portion and arranged in a horizontal direction with the internal space,
The lower plate main body has a first lower plate portion formed with an area facing the front of the gaming machine, and a second lower plate portion provided integrally with the first lower plate portion and formed with a region not facing the front of the gaming machine. And 2 lower plates,
Cover means for covering the upper side of the second lower dish upon which is constituted by a separate member separable and the lower dish body, the lower as integrated with said lower pan body regardless closing state of the door frame Assemble to the dish body ,
The cover means includes a boundary wall serving as a boundary between the space above the bottom wall portion and the internal space in the second lower plate portion,
The boundary wall prevents the game medium from flowing out of the second lower plate portion to the outside of the lower plate other than the first lower plate portion, and the game medium flows from the second lower plate portion to the internal space. To prevent intrusion,
A closing portion for closing the rear of the internal space is provided on the door frame,
Furthermore, on the opposite side of the side where the lower plate is provided with the internal space as a boundary, a handle portion for emitting game media is provided,
The bulging portion may be provided so as to protrude forward of Yu technique machine than the foremost part of the handle portion.

Thus, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a high appealing power .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which opened the door frame from the main frame and opened the main frame from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state which removed the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the upper hinge member is attached to the main body side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit from the back. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit taken apart from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit seen from behind with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 4A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 4B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame from the right front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the left front. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the lower left rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and looked from behind. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of a portion of the lower plate in a state where the lower plate cover is removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a different ball guiding portion than (a). FIG. 4C is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which a different ball guiding portion is further provided. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing a state where the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is an explanatory view in which (c) is a schematic perspective view of the lower plate of (b). (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extended. FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG.48 (b). 48A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 48B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation unit disassembled for every main member from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit and looked from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the rear. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the effect operation unit and looked from behind. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the production operation unit in FIG. (A) is a view in which the effect operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away to hide a part where the operation button is to be hidden by a first button decoration portion, a button frame, or the like. It is an explanatory view showing, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a part which is going to be hidden by a first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a production operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit viewed from a direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (A) is a front view of the second effect operation unit different from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the back. It is the explanation drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 65 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 64 (b) taken along line HH. (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line in FIG.64 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd effect operation unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extended, with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub-screen of the screen unit. It is the explanatory view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button extended in the state turned to the front. 74A is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74B. (A) is to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, and the like in a view when the main screen is directed forward and the second operation operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which exists, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) is to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, or the like in a view of the operation button with the sub-screen facing forward, viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which exists, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame left side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78 (a). (A) is a front view of a door frame right side unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a door frame right side unit viewed from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 82 (a). 82A is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 82A, and FIG. 82B is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 82A. (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back. It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked from behind. FIG. 89 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 87. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from the disassembly before. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the dispensing apparatus from back and disassembled. (A) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the payout device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball path unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit in the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower full tank path unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the lower full tank path unit from behind and disassembled. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel opaque. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the gaming board in the state of FIG. 114 as viewed from the front right. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the gaming board in the state of FIG. 114 as viewed from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 114 taken along the line RR. FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 114 taken along the line SS. It is the front view which cut | disconnected the front unit in the game board at the approximate center of the front-back direction in a game area. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of the game panel transparent. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the starting port unit, the side unit, the side slope, and the attacker unit in the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which cut | disconnected the attacker unit in a front unit in the substantially center of the front-back direction in a game area, and showed it from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the center role in the front unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the center role as viewed from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and looked at after. (A) is a front view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit, and (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view cut along line TT in (a) and enlarged. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper movable rendering unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper movable rendering unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable production knit mainly for every structural unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper movable effect unit for every main structural unit, and was seen from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit viewed from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back upper first decorative body unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper first decorative body unit and looked from behind. (A) is an explanatory view showing a drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and (b) is a drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the open position from the front. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper second decoration body unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper second decoration body unit and looked from behind. (A) is an explanatory view showing a drive system when the back upper second decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and (b) is a drive system when the back upper second decorative body unit is in the open position from the front. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit viewed from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper third decoration body unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back upper third decoration body unit and looked from behind. (A) is an explanatory view showing from the front the drive system when the back upper third decorative body unit is in the closed position, and (b) is the drive system when the back upper third decorative body unit is in the open position from the front. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the back upper rotating base unit in the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back upper rotating base unit as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back upper rotation base unit from disassembly. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back upper rotation base unit from disassembly. It is explanatory drawing which shows the gear structure in a back upper rotation base unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view showing the state of the operating lever in the back upper rotating base unit in the operating position from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the state of the operating lever in the non-operating position from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back raising / lowering unit in the back upper movable effecting unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back lifting / lowering unit from the back. FIG. 4A is an exploded perspective view of the back elevation unit as disassembled into a movable unit and a fixed unit, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 4B is an exploded perspective view of the back elevation unit into a movable unit and a fixed unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the swash plate seen from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the movable unit of the back elevating unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the movable unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the fixed side unit of the back raising / lowering unit and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fixed side unit of the back raising / lowering unit and was seen from behind. (A) is an explanatory view showing from the front the drive system when the movable unit of the back elevating unit is in the ascending position, and (b) is the driving system when the movable unit of the back elevating unit is in the lowered position. It is explanatory drawing shown from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when the movable side unit of a back raising / lowering unit is a raise position in a back upper movable effecting unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system for raising / lowering when the movable side unit of a back raising / lowering unit in a back upper movable effecting unit is a descent position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of an operation lever in an operation position, when a movable side unit is a down position and a back upper rotation base unit is a horizontal position in a back upper movable effect unit. It is an explanatory view showing a state where an operation lever is in a non-operation position when a movable side unit is a down position and a back upper rotation base unit is a horizontal position in a back upper movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back upper rotation base unit when a movable side unit is a lowered position and a back upper rotation base unit is a horizontal position in a back upper movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back-upside rotation base unit when a movable side unit in a back-upside movable effect unit rotates 45 degrees clockwise from a horizontal position at a lower position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive system of a back upper rotary base unit when a movable side unit is a down position and a back upper rotary base unit is a vertical position in a back upper movable effect unit. It is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation lever is in the non-operation position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotating base unit is in the vertical position in the back upper movable effect unit. It is an explanatory view showing a state where an operation lever regulates rotation at an operation position when a movable side unit is a down position and an upper back rotation base unit is a vertical position in a back upper movable effect unit. When the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotating base unit is in the vertical position in the back upper movable effecting unit, the operation lever is in the operation position in the back upper first decorative body unit, the upper back second decorative body unit, and the upper back second decorative body unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which acts on three decoration body units. (A) is a front view of the underside movable production unit of the back unit, (b) is a back view of the underside movable production unit, and (c) is the underside movable decorative unit in the underside movable production unit. It is a rear view shown in the state where it raised. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back middle left decorative body and the back middle right decorative body of the back middle movable production unit in the back unit to the appearance position on the center side. After moving the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the back left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit in the back unit to the appearance position near the center, with each first decorative surface facing forward It is a front view of the game board shown. FIG. 173 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable rendering unit and the back right movable rendering unit are rotated from the state of FIG. 171 so that the respective second decorative surfaces face forward. . FIG. 172 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable rendering unit and the back right movable rendering unit are rotated from the state of FIG. 171 so that the respective third decorative surfaces face forward. . The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the first upper decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable of the second upper decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit After setting the decorative lens and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit in the closed position, respectively, the back upper first decorative body unit and the back upper second decoration It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which moved the body unit and the back upper rotation base unit to the lowering position, keeping the state of the horizontal position so that the back upper third decoration body unit may be arranged horizontally. From the state of FIG. 174, the back upper rotating base unit is rotated 45 degrees in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the upper back first decorative body unit, the upper back second decorative body unit, and the upper back third decorative body unit are inclined. It is a front view of the game board shown in a lined state. From the state shown in FIG. 175, the back upper rotating base unit is further rotated 45 degrees in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, so that the back upper first decorative body unit, the upper back second decorative body unit, and the lower upper third body are in the vertical position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the decoration body unit in the state which was lined up vertically. From the state of FIG. 176, the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative body unit, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit, and With the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit in the open position, respectively, the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens, respectively. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which made it visually recognizable. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the lower back movable decorative body unit of the lower back movable effect unit in the back unit was moved to the first ascending position. FIG. 178 is a front view of the game board in a state where the lower back movable decorative body unit is further raised from the state of FIG. 178 and moved to a second raised position. As another embodiment of the game board, an explanatory diagram showing an example in which an LED for making a light emitting decoration of the center lens on the back of the back of the back unit is provided on the movable production unit on the back of the back unit. It is. In the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board, the back upper rotating base unit is in a vertical position, and the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the first upper decorative body unit, The second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the upper second decorative body unit, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the upper third decorative body unit in the open position, respectively. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which a first fixed decorative lens, a second fixed decorative lens, and a third fixed decorative lens are respectively visible. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 189 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 182. It is the schematic of various detection signals input / output to the connection terminal board of rental devices, such as a game ball, which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 189 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 182. It is a block diagram showing the outline of peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and sound control unit. (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure of a main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, and (b) is an interrupt process periodically executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used in a lottery process for a big hit, and (B) is a symbol determination table used in a lottery process for a big hit type. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design change processing performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big winning opening opening and closing process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd reception opening / closing process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. Is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. Is a flow chart showing the procedure for 16ms routine process which is executed by the peripheral control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the closed state of a 2nd receiving port, (B) is a figure which shows the open state of a 2nd receiving port. (A) is an execution table in the 15R big hit gaming state A, and (B) is an execution table in the 15R big hit gaming state B. (A) is a timing chart of the first to third rounds executed in accordance with the execution table in the 15R big hit game state A, and (B) is 1 to 3 executed in accordance with the execution table in the 15R big hit game state B. It is a timing chart of the round. It is a specific example of an effect at the time of execution of the 15R big hit game state A and the 15R big hit game state B in the effect display device. It is the front view which cut the front unit in the game board of a second embodiment at the approximate center in the front-back direction in the game area. It is a symbol determination table used for the lottery process for the type of big hit of the second embodiment. It is an execution table at the time of 15R big hit game state A-C used as a 2nd embodiment. (A) is a timing chart of the first to fifteenth opening performed according to the execution table in the 15R big hit game state A of the second embodiment, and (B) is a 15R big hit game state B of the second embodiment. 16 is a timing chart of the first to fifteenth release performed according to the execution table at the time. It is a timing chart of the 1st-15th opening performed according to the execution table at the time of the 15R big hit game state C of the second embodiment. It is a specific effect example at the time of execution of 15R big hit game states A to C in the effect display device of the second embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extend left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 is connected to lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30. The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are openably and closably mounted by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular shape having a vertically extending outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating front and rear, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. And a dish unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the front face, and a player attached to the center of the dish unit 320 according to a game state that changes when a game ball is driven into the game area 5a. An effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 530. And a door frame top unit 570 mounted above the door frame right side unit 550 and above the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main frame base 600, which is partially insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5. The upper hinge member 60 and the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 are rotatably attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, respectively, and the upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are rotatable. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, the reinforcing frame 660 mounted on the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the main body frame base 600 And a ball launching device 680 for driving game balls into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the outer frame 2 and the body frame mounted on the right side of the body frame base 600 in a front view. 4, And a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and an inverted L-shape which is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view and pays out game balls to the player side. Payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and a game ball in the ball tank 802 which is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left in a front view. A left and right tank rail 803 for guiding, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 in front view for guiding game balls from the tank rail 803 in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820 Game balls that are detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 at the lower side and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 The payout device 830 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, and the game balls that are attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and that are paid out by the payout device 830. An upper full tank path unit 850 that guides and discharges game balls from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e in accordance with the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320; A normal guide path 861 and a full guide path that guide the game balls discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guide the game balls from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861 The game ball released from the tongue discharge port 850 e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full tank receiving port 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. Speaker unit 920 having a power supply board 921, a power supply board box 930 that is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and houses a power supply board therein, An interface control board box 940 accommodating an interface control board therein, and a payout control board 951 mounted on the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. And a dispensing control board box 950. .

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is driven, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and places the game ball fired from the ball firing device 680 on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guides the player, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a. I have.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321, the game balls are rotated by the ball firing device 680 with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the interest of the player can be increased by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the players can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembly. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated from each other and extends left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. , And a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that extend to the right. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the left and right lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Also, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same. Have been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion side of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably mounted.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 having both ends attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position closer to the left from the left and right center, A right sliding member 82 in the form of a flat plate attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, or the like), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. , Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, or the like). The upper frame member 10 has an engagement notch 11 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 11, an upper left and right fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached. In addition, the upper frame member 10 includes, on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view, a mounting step portion 12 that is recessed from the general surface. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, or the like) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths are different. Is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch 21, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of a lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and a lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D of the connecting member 85 described below are attached.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 has a front end notch portion 22 that is recessed rearward from the front surface at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same size as the front-rear width of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal member such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetric shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are depressed inward on the lateral side outside in the left-right direction from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction and near the rear end. It has recesses 31 and 41 and projections 32 and 42 which bulge out from the side surface opposite to the recesses 31 and 41 and have an internal cavity. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. In the protruding portions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on the surface. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility such as a game hall or transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by fingers and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is opened. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape large enough to allow a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51, A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a front wall bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go rearward as it goes toward.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, which will be described later, when assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state where it is assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  The upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined such that the front end side is lower. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting a right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via a left sliding member 81 and a right sliding member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-shaped decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a lattice shape, thereby increasing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown, the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 has an upper fixing portion 61 having a rectangular shape and a quadrangular outer shape, and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A front extending portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the right and left center of the front extending portion 62 from the right end of the front extending portion 62 to the front, and vertically penetrating, and an upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A horizontal fixing portion 64 having a flat plate shape extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end portion extending from the left end to the front end of the front extension portion 62 to a portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). I have. The front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. The horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state where the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the concave portion 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 allows the main frame 4 to cooperate with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band-shaped lock body 66 a extending right and left with a predetermined width on the left and right, and an operation unit protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then extending diagonally left forward, and a mounting hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is mounted at a position behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. In a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion of the hanging portion 65 of the 60 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  The distal end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a, in which a main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 described later can be accommodated.

  By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper main frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown, the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands up horizontally from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. An upright flat rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a vertically penetrating horizontal portion 71 allowing only one game ball to pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71 is provided. Are fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 in front of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main frame lower hinge hole (not shown) of the main frame 4 at the main frame 4. In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  In a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 74 coincide with the left discharge holes 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and it is possible to discharge from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game balls from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connection member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connection member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connection member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. 86, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided to be separated from each other in the front and rear directions. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of contacting the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and are fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. The lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front sides of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is screwed into the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. By this, it is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is lower than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. The upper and lower fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to inner side surfaces on the front side of the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Furthermore, the lower left and right fixing members 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end surfaces of the lower frame member 20, respectively. You.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main frame is detached from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member was attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation of the lock member on the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the distal end of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a U-shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame side of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 according to the present embodiment includes the front end of the lock body 66a in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. Of the lock body 66a (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65). In the normal shaft support state (not shown), the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in a diagonal direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal pivoting state, since the hinge pin 622 on the body frame that supports the heavy body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin on the body frame is There is almost no load on the front end face of the lock body 66a from 622. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end face of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operation part 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly. I have. In the figure, the center of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is pulled out along the inclination of the U-shaped bearing groove 63 and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F, a component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the front end face of the lock body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame and the front end face of the arc shape; And the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the one side inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (the mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment for rotating the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging part 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame moves the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is subjected to the normal pin support state or the action force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. This prevents the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and prevents the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from dropping out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move rightward, the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the hanging portion 65 and Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  In addition, even if the shape of the front end face of the lock body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the above-described component force F1 or the front end of the lock member 66 is directed outward of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) of the lock member 66 at a position where a rotational moment for rotating the lock member 66 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a is opposed to the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock body 66a, which has closed the bearing groove 63, retreats and the bearing groove 63 is opened, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest part (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is urged by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves rightward, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. Thus, the upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame is accommodated in a space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the upper hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked).

  When removing the upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. Thus, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball bite prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a ball security for preventing a game ball from being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame 2 lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1. The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to a left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (the pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear. In addition, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when an invalid tool that has contacted the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the return portion 55 causes the tip of the invalid tool to be bent. Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, in the case where the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game sphere is placed on the outer frame side while the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 are not ejected rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 May be trapped between On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which game balls can pass and a left discharge hole 52. , And the right discharge hole 53, the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is caught between them.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and the outer frame 2 is not closed. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like, the door frame 3 is attached to a square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front and a lower right front corner of the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 300, a plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320 A door frame left side unit 530 mounted on the front left of the door frame 100; a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320; Door frame top mounted on the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 It is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later. And a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and mounted on upper and lower ends on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 when viewed from the front, and mounted rotatably on the body frame 4 with hinges. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, a security cover 200 covering a lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the gap, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launching device 680, and a ball attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110 And a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been fired by the firing device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and discharges the ball to the lower plate 322.

  As will be described later in detail, the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 allows the player to rotate the rotatable handle 302 to rotate the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 in accordance with the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with different strength.

  The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later in detail, but is attached to a portion below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface swells forward, The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 or the foul cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball pull-out button 327 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and within the range of the cash or the prepaid card remaining in the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card deducted from the game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and a cash input to the ball lending machine Ball return display section 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards and the like, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 capable of accepting a player's operation at the time of effect presentation, and a lower plate. Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and allows the player to perform a pressing operation and presents an effect image to the player. Is what you can do. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by a player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display an effect image. And a display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through-hole 111 on the upper side of the plate unit 320, as will be described in detail later. It decorates the left outside of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of light emitting decoration.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, as will be described in detail later. The right outside of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 projects farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a front end. And a right unit decorative lens member 561. The door frame right side unit 550 can make the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550, above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570 has a pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, a top decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front, and left and right sides of the top decoration member 576, which will be described in detail later. A decorative top left decorative lens member 579 and a decorative top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can make the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 emit light.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) such that the left side of the front view closes the front surface of the body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a plate unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is mounted on the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating forward and backward as shown in FIGS. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and upper and lower ends on the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130, which project forward from the door frame base 110 to form the body frame 4 A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640; A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 mounted rotatably on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front lower right corner of the front of the door frame base 110 in front view, and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a tubular handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111; a security cover 200 that covers a lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190; and an open / close cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a one-shot button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , An upper speaker 573, and the like, and a door body relay board for relaying connection between the body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through-hole 111 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. In the through hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Accordingly, the entire door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape by the through-holes 111 penetrating front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 whose left end is inclined slightly forward from the right end, a handle mounting seat surface 112 and a through hole 111. Between the front and rear sides of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210, the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached. The cylinder lock 211 is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the ball.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth from the center in the left-right direction of the door frame base 110 and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passage opening 116 and the through-hole passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 face forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through-hole 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in a front view. A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through hole 111, and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and both right and left sides of the door frame base 110. And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along an upper side of a rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcing member attached to a lower side of the through-hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side in front view of the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The locking device includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and that locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to a right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a cutout portion 132a that penetrates back and forth at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, The parts enhance the strength and rigidity, and also prevent unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flathead screwdrivers from entering from outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is provided on the door frame base 110 and has a pair of projecting pieces 141a vertically separated from each other. The door frame hinge hinge bracket 141 has a pair of protrusions, and the door frame hinge hinge bracket 141 has a pair of protrusions. And a pair of projecting pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142 which penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. And a disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the two and a door frame hinge pin 142 interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. And a lock spring 144 that urges the upper hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and has a shape that is open forward when viewed from the side. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece for connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is mounted on a rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protruding above the upper protruding piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion projecting below the lower projecting piece 141a bent horizontally. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower projecting piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The flange member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted. The lock spring 144 has an upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and a lower end in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141 a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward through the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and a horizontally bent portion at a lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is a lower projecting portion. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a.

  The upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side is provided with a door frame when the operator holds a horizontally bent portion at the lower end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be lowered below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 can insert or pull out the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620. Can be. By inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the door frame 3 as viewed from the front is obtained. The hinge can be rotatably supported on the body frame 4.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is configured such that a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 which is supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extending piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. And a column-shaped door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extension piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat mounting piece (not shown) that extends upward from the rear end of the flat extending piece 151a that extends horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Are formed in a substantially L-shape. In the hinge bracket 151 below the door frame, a mounting piece (not shown) is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  The hinge pin 152 below the door frame has a lower end formed in a truncated cone shape that tapers downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is disposed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the front left side of the through-hole 111. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in front view to a height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. Decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame, and lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extending up and down from the lower position of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to almost the same height as the lower end of the passage 117 for the upper plate. And a substrate 162.

  The upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 162 on the left side of the door frame of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a on the front surface, respectively, which can emit light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind a door frame left side unit 530 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for removably mounting the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disc-shaped base 171 rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes from the base 171 in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, so that the protruding portion 172 is located outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. In this state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the projection 172 projects downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the projection 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 to restrict the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

  Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protruding portion 172. . Thus, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the state is stabilized in a state where the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position where it protrudes downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the protruding portion 172. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated such that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171 so that the protrusion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the cylindrical portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182, and a plurality of annular flange portions 182 protruding into the tubular portion 181 and extending over the entire length of the tubular portion 181 in the axial direction and arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 ( In the present embodiment, three) are provided. .

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the other two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state where the three protrusions 183 and the three grooves 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a state where the handle unit 300 is similarly tilted so that the axis of 181 extends rightward and forward.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-like glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 118, and the inside of the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. 191 attached to two transparent glass plates 192. The two glass plates 192 are respectively attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 and are separated from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending flatly outward from a position below the upper left and right corners in front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from behind the door frame base 110. Then, the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. Is attached to the door frame base 110 by making contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure. Thus, the glass unit 190 is detachable from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 has a flat main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201, and is spaced apart in the left and right directions. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. The upper end of the main body 201 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002, the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 described later. The pachinko machine 1 is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

  Note that the rear protruding piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the gaming board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state where it is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, game balls passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (game balls fired by the ball firing device 680) do not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200, and the game ball 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball being driven into the game.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts on the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and projects from the lower side of the main body 201 to the rear. The removed rear protruding piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state where the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to penetrate into the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening / closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 that has a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extends forward and backward, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates the key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting the key lock 710 to the key cylinder 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (the reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, it can be either clockwise or counterclockwise in front view. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches 212a that are notched. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape projecting forward in plan view. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate parts 213c extending in a plate shape in a direction away from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate parts 213b. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 from the rear at a position substantially at the center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. As for a pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the left mounting plate portion 213c in the front view is mounted on the right end of the middle reinforcing plate 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the right mounting plate portion 213c of the reinforcing unit 130 in the front view. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thus, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate part 213a and the pair of side plate parts 213b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are housed in a box-shaped cylinder mounting part 113 which is inserted through the front side of the door frame base 110 and protrudes rearward. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feed unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the rear with the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launching device 680 one by one, and converts the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 into the upper plate balls. The lower tray can be pulled out by operating the pull button 327.

  In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110, and penetrate in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b opening below the entrance 251a, and having a box-shaped front cover 251 and a box having a front end opened and a rear end closed. A rear cover 252 having a hit ball supply port 252a for supplying game balls entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launching device 680, and the rear cover 252 and the front cover. The partition 253 is rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and a partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b behind the front cover 251. And the game balls on the partition 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252, and are vertically moved between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. The ball feeding member 254 rotatably supported around the extended axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feeding member 254 are provided.

  In the ball feeding unit 250, as shown in the drawing, a ball feeding member 254 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 251a in a front view, and a ball punching member 253 is provided on the left side of the ball feeding member 254. The ball feeding solenoids 255 are respectively arranged on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feed unit 250 has an arc-shaped slit 251c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball-pulling member 253 on the left side of the ball outlet 251b in a front view. The operation rod 253c of the ball-pulling member 253 described later extends forward. The front cover 251 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is upstream of the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball empty guide path 323f of the plate unit base 323. It is formed so as to close a portion opened rearward on the end side from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 253 has a partition part 253a below the entrance 251a, between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, and an upper surface of which becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 254, and a ball of the partition part 253a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and bends in a V-shape from near the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b, and the lower end turns around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotatable rod 253b movably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 253c protruding forward from the upper end of the rotating rod 253b, and a lower side than the operating rod 253c from the side of the rotating rod 253b. A weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 253a. The operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 253c is in contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a that is operated by pressing the upper bowl removing button 327 of the bowl unit 320 through the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feeding member 254 includes a blocking portion 254a having a fan shape in a plan view centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction and facing the entrance 251a and the partition portion 253a of the ball removing member 253, and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a. And a ball holding portion 254b which is depressed in an arc shape toward the rotation axis and a rod-shaped rod portion 254c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 254 rotates around the rotation axis when the rod 254c disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation axis is moved left and right by driving the ball feeding solenoid 255.

  The ball feeding member 254 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and a ball holding portion 254b in a direction in which the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hit ball supply port 252a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position facing the side. When the ball feeding member 254 is at the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680, and the game ball enters the partition 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the movement to the ball holding unit 254b (hit ball supply port 252a) side is blocked by the blocking unit 254a, and the ball stays on the partition unit 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the rod 254c side closes the hit ball supply port 252a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 250 is moved forward and backward by the ball feeding operating rod 256 whose tip swings vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 255 and the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 256 which swings vertically. And a ball feed crank 257 for rotating the ball feeding member 254 about an axis extending in the vertical direction while rotating about an axis extending in the direction. The ball-feeding crank 257 is configured to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball-feeding operation rod 256 and extend in the left-right direction. A shaft portion 257b disposed on the opposite side and rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and extending upward from the shaft portion 257b to feed the ball; And a transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the member 254.

  The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed operation rod 256 that swings by driving the ball feed solenoid 255 that moves up and down by the ball feed operation rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257 to cause the ball feed member 254 to move. Can be rotated. When the ball-feeding solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball-feeding operation rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 255 and its tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball-feeding member 254 is in the supply position. It is in the state located at. When the ball-feeding solenoid 255 is driven, the ball-feeding operation rod 256 is sucked by the lower end of the ball-feeding solenoid 255 so that the tip is positioned upward, and the ball-feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 254 receives one game ball, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 is released (OFF state). Can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled by a firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 682.

  In addition, the ball-pulling member 253 rotatably supported in the ball-feeding unit 250 receives a moment to rotate in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the weight portion 253d, but projects forward. When the actuated rod 253c contacts the upper end of the actuating transmission portion 327a that is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dishing button 327 of the dishing unit 320, the rotation thereof is regulated. Is partitioned between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  Then, when the player pushes down the upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320, the upper plate ball removing slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, and the operation transmitting portion 327a moves downward. As a result, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operation rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partitioning portion 253a is released. Is done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 327b formed with the operation transmitting portion 327a with which the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 abuts is urged upward by the upper countersunk ball removing spring 327c, the upper countersliding slider 327c is moved upward. Even if the game ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the upper plate ball removing spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removing member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition 253a.

  The ball feeding unit 250 has a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252. A fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feed unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

  The anti-fraud member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape when viewed from the front extends left and right, and is separated vertically from the right side by a predetermined distance from the right side to the upper side in the vertical direction at the center, and A lower piece 262 and an inclined portion 263 formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 are provided. . The upper piece 261 of the anti-fraud member 260 is bent so that the right end in front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 260. The lower piece 262 extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. Thus, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that spreads rightward.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment concave portion 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 260, a fraudulent game ball with a string attached is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 680 from the upper plate 321 via the ball feed unit 250, and is attached to the fraudulent game ball. When a fraudulent act of operating a string to move an illegal game ball into and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, an improper game ball fired (hit by the ball) by the ball launching device 680 causes the illegal play. After the string attached to the game ball is inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, the V-shape formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 becomes narrower. It is possible to cut by a part, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball attached with a string.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 37 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 37 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown, the foul cover unit 270 is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and has a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 with an open front side, and a flat lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 271. 272. Fail cover unit 270 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner in front view, and penetrates the normal guide path 861 of lower full tank path unit 860 of main body frame 4 and upper plate ball supply port 323a of plate unit 320. A full tank receiving port 274 which is open rearward at the lower right side of the passage 273 and the through ball path 273 in a front view and which can communicate with the full guiding path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And

  Further, foul cover unit 270 is opened upward on the right side in front view of full tank receiving port 274 and does not reach game area 5a despite being fired by ball firing device 680 of main body frame 4. Ball receiving port 275 for receiving a game ball (a foul ball), and a game ball received in the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 which opens forward near the lower right corner in front view. And a ball discharge port 276 communicating with the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full ball reception port 274 and the foul ball reception port 275 and the ball discharge port 276 by the unit main body 271 and the cover member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A large-sized storage passage 277, a plate-shaped movable piece 278 that forms a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277, and has a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, A full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting rotation of the 278 in a direction away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 for urging the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  When the inside of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 becomes full of game balls and the game balls are not released from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, a certain number of the foul cover units 270 are stored in the storage passage 277. Game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 277 against the urging force of the spring 280 due to the weight of the game ball. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. Accordingly, it can be determined that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, and when the full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the further payout of the game balls is stopped, and That fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, and can be prompted to cancel the full state of the lower plate 322.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and below the through ball passage 273, and is a guideway opening / closing door of a lower full tank path unit 860 in the below-described payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4. 863 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 281 to which the operating projection 863e can contact (see FIG. 112). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863 e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact. When the operation protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 rotates, and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be opened.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. FIG. 40 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by a player so that a game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is.

  The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

  The handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 at the rear side of the handle 302, and a handle 302 attached to the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301 to the outer periphery. A shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306, the handle base 301 and the inner A handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

  Further, the handle unit 300 has one end attached to the handle base 301 and the other end attached to the handle 302 so as to return the handle 302 to an initial rotational position (a rotational end in a counterclockwise direction in front view). One end is attached to the inner base 304 and the other end is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307 a of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated clockwise in front view through the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 urged in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side is outward from the left side in the front view of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 301. The handle is protruding and the base end is behind the inner base 304. A single button 311 attached to the base 301 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward and backward, and a single button operation sensor 312 attached to the handle base 301 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 311. I have.

  The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 has a cylindrical base portion 301a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end portion 301b projecting radially from the front end of the base portion 301a, and a concave portion from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 301a. And three grooves 301c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. The three grooves 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 in the handle mounting member 180. Therefore, the base portion 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three ridges 183, and the ridges 183 are respectively formed in the three groove portions 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d that protrude outward away from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in an arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, and the other end of the handle return spring 308 is locked. And a locking projection 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a is formed such that a side surface in a clockwise direction in a front view of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 bulges outward, and the first protrusion 302a is located on the opposite side. Side is concave (gouge) so as to curve inward. The second protrusion 302b is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 302a in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and It protrudes slightly lower. The second protrusion 302b has a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the most protruding portion bulging outward, and the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first projection 302a.

  The third protrusion 302c is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees clockwise, and It protrudes at about half the height. The side surface of the third protrusion 302c is substantially linearly inclined on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is more gradually inclined than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 302d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c by a clockwise rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 302d has a side surface on both sides inclined substantially linearly, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The handle cover 303 has three mounting bosses 303a that are rounded at the center of the front surface and bulged forward, and protrude rearward. The three mounting bosses 303a penetrate the slit 302e of the handle 302 from the front, and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 301. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to a handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via a handle attachment member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined such that the right end side is located behind the left end side in plan view and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 300 that is attached via the outside also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). To be fixed to the door frame 3. Thus, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor. When the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the ball firing device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is hit into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are plated with a conductive material. When the player comes into contact with the handle 302 or the like, the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact. When the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled so that a game ball can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in any way without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball may be hit. I cannot do it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 in a different manner from the original and playing the game, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In addition, when the player presses the single-shot button 311 while the player rotates the handle 302, the single-button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single-shot button 311 and the firing unit of the payout control board 951 (shown in FIG. ), The rotation drive of the firing solenoid 682 is stopped. Thereby, without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped, and the pressing operation of the single button 311 is released by releasing the pressing operation of the single button 311. The game ball can be driven into the game area 5a again with the strength.

  Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and rotates the handle 302 most clockwise in a front view. When the game ball is hit most strongly in the game area 5a (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 302d is positioned at the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated. By changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 at the “right-handed” position in a comfortable state, It is possible to reduce a feeling of fatigue of the player and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-3. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41A is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front left. FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. The plate unit 320 is attached to a portion below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400, which will be described later, is attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320.

  The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 or the foul cover unit 270. And a lower plate 322 that can be stored.

  The plate unit 320 has a plate-shaped plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a plate unit base 323 mounted on the upper front of the plate unit base 323. An upper plate main body 324 forming the upper plate 321 and a lower plate main body 325 attached to the lower left portion of the front of the plate unit base 323 from the left and right centers and swelling greatly to form the lower plate 322. And a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325.

  The dish unit 320 has an upper dish ball removing button 327 attached to the upper dish 321 on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 so as to be able to be pressed from the upper right side and a front view of the upper dish ball removing button 327. A ball lending button 328 mounted on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 mounted on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side in front view of the ball lending button 328, and a ball lending button 328 A ball return display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the return button 329, and a plate front upper decorative portion 326b in front of the plate 321 and in front of the plate unit cover 326. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, and protrude forward from the front of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322. And has and a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate main body 324, and the left side bulges forward more than the left and right center in front view, and is formed in a container shape opened upward. Have been. In the upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324), a portion that is about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges forward most. The upper plate 321 has a front end receding rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and has a guide passage portion 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. I have. The upper plate 321 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 321a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a in front view is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the upper plate ball removal button 327). ) (See FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface thereof is positioned at a position lower than the upper plate supply port 323 a of the plate unit base 323 to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323 d. Are inclined so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of. Thereby, the game balls discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321 and the received game balls can be stored in the upper plate from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball feed port 323d.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface of the guide passage portion 321a whose depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower decreases downward. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 projects from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the later-described effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is mounted. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

  The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding member 321b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and is contacted (rolled) by the game ball to form the game ball. The charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate 322 is disposed below the upper plate 321 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to a lower plate ball hole 322a which penetrates vertically through the bottom wall portion 325a so that game balls can be discharged, and a plate unit cover 326. And a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the provided effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner is concave in an arc shape toward the rear.

  The lower plate 322 includes a lower plate main body 325 that is open at the upper and rear sides, a lower plate cover portion 326 k that covers the lower plate main body 325 from the left end side, and a lower plate main body 325. And a lower plate cover 340 that covers a portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The cover 326 faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a trapezoidal shape in which the outer peripheral shape in plan view is a quadrangular shape extending left and right, and the front side of the quadrilateral is the base and the upper side shorter than the base is disposed on the front side. , And the left and right sides of the trapezoid that extend obliquely are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in a plan view.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate main body 325 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower plate main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall portion 325a excluding a rear end side, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. And a lower saucer hole 322a penetrating up and down in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is a rectangle that extends to the left and right, and the front side of the rectangle has a bottom side, and an upper side shorter than the bottom side is arranged on the front side, and the left and right sides that are obliquely extended are curved so as to be recessed rearward. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid and a trapezoid. (The upper surface of) the bottom wall portion 325a is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower countersunk hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height of 2 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball. The lower plate hole 322a is formed at a position closer to the right than the center in the left-right direction of the lower plate body 325 (bottom wall 325a). In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portions at the front right corner in the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b correspond to the escape portion 322b.

  The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover approximately the right half above the lower plate main body 325. As shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 44, the lower plate cover 340 includes a cover standing wall portion 340a that rises upward from an upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, and a substantially lower end from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. And a ceiling part 340b extending horizontally. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 from a part on the front side to a rear end on the right side. When the lower plate cover 340 is assembled to the plate unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the plate unit base 323. Further, the front end (left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Further, the left end of the ceiling 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover 326k of the plate unit cover 326. In the lower dish cover 340, a curved surface portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and a portion that extends obliquely between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. I have.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (production operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end in front view of a portion extending short to the left and right on the front end side, and more than half of the production operation unit 400 in front view. Is located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right half goes around the effect operation unit 400. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes a lower plate first area A1 (a cross hatched area in FIG. 45) located behind a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326 described later, and a lower plate. The lower plate second region A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located on the right side of the opening 326d (behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). Region). In other words, the lower plate 322 has at least half of a storage area (equivalent to a storage area in a plan view, a combined area of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2) in which game balls can be stored, It is located behind the rendering operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the area indicated by the dotted line is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the plate unit cover 326.

  In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall is opened to the right of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction in front view. More specifically, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the lower plate 322 is connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326 (to the right outside the lower plate opening 326d), and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. The lower plate is disposed in the lower second region A2 on the rear side. Thus, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower counter ball supply port 323c is not visible from the player side through the lower tray opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to go down from the lower plate opening 326d of the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (plate unit cover 326) bulging forward toward the rear of the rendering operation unit 400, The storage volume of the game balls is formed larger than the range seen from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the lower plate second region A2 is larger than the lower plate first region A1. Thereby, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (the player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

  As shown in FIG. 41A, the lower plate 322 is such that the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second area A2) has the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326 as shown in FIG. ), A lower plate cover 340 covers an upper side of a portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertip from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

  The lower plate 322 has a lower plate hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower plate supply port 323c in the lower plate second area A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower plate ball hole 322a. The lower plate ball removing hole 322 a of the lower plate 322 is closed by a cover member 334 that is opened and closed by operating a pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333. In the lower plate 322, in a normal state, the lower plate ball hole 322a is closed by the cover member 334, so that game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322. When the lid member 334 is opened by pressing the lower bowl button 333, the game balls in the lower bowl 322 can be discharged from the lower bowl hole 322a below the bowl unit 320.

  The lower plate hole 322 a of the lower plate 322 is disposed in front of (directly in front of) the lower plate supply port 323 c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower plate 322. Therefore, in a state where it is assembled to the door frame 3, the lower plate hole 322 a is located on the right side of the lower plate opening 326 d of the plate unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the rendering operation unit 400. It is invisible from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 has an outer peripheral shape formed by combining a trapezoid whose front side is narrowed on the front side of a square extending left and right, and a bottom plate having a lower plate hole 322a. It is inclined to become lower toward. Therefore, in the state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower bowl ejection hole 322a is open, the game ball supplied from the lower bowl supply port 323c into the lower bowl 322 is placed directly in front of the lower bowl supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward through the opened lower dish hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower bowl ejection hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower bowl supply port 323c, when the lower bowl extraction hole 322a is open, the lower bowl supply hole 322a is open. The game balls supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 do not directly flow to the region on the left side of the lower plate hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and are discharged from the lower plate hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower bowl input hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower bowl supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower bowl 322 from near the right end of the lower bowl supply port 323c. The ball comes into contact with a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. Since the right standing wall of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate supply port 323c receives the game ball. When it comes into contact with the inclined portion, the light is reflected in the direction of the lower hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower hole 322a without going to the left side of the lower hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

  As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate hole 322a, the lower plate hole 322a is formed. Is open, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c do not enter the area on the left side of the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a of the lower dish 322, but immediately from the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, when the lower bowl extracting hole 322a is kept open, the game balls flowing on the lower bowl 322 cannot be seen from the player side, and the ball is paid out from the upper bowl 321 or the payout device 830. An illusion that a game ball or the like is directly discharged to a dollar box can be made to be an illusion. And effect images, etc.) to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game balls supplied to the inside of the lower plate 322 bounce and jump, the game balls can be prevented from entering the mounting space 326j from the lower plate 322, and the game balls in the lower plate 322 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from contacting the rear side. Therefore, the game balls supplied to the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are prevented from contacting or pressing the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). This can prevent the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from being damaged by the game ball.

  Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate 322 is released from the lower plate supply hole 323c when the lower plate hole 322a is open. It is possible to cause the played game balls to directly enter the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and discharge the balls downward (dollar box), so that the game balls are less likely to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate body 325. Can be. Also, since the bottom wall 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game balls released into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c come into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and break them. It can be difficult.

  In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 that closes the lower countersunk hole 322a may be linked to the upper countersunk button 327. As a result, when the upper plate ball removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower plate ball removing hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 are further removed. The paper is discharged from the hole 322a to the dollar box below. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong illusion to the player that the game balls of the upper plate 321 are directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-described operational effects can be further exhibited. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the balls may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are shown as being separate from each other, but the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Also, an example in which the cover standing wall 340a of the lower plate cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main plate standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is shown. The cover standing wall portion 340a may rise. Also, an example is shown in which the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. You may make it extend substantially horizontally from an upper end.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the example in which the relief portion 322b for avoiding the contact of the lower plate 322 with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is provided, but the relief portion 322b is not provided. The lower plate 322 may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the like) has a uniform planar shape without a through hole. It may be one having a hole formed. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall 325a, the main body standing wall 325b, the cover standing wall 340a, the ceiling 340b, and the like of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which a game ball cannot pass. It may be formed into a net or a net. Note that a light-emitting body such as an LED may be disposed in the plate unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j), and the inside of the lower plate 322 may be illuminated (light-emitting decoration) through a fence-like or mesh-like gap of the lower plate 322. .

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) formed separately. However, the four members may be integrated in an appropriate combination to form the lower plate 322. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate unit cover 326 are integrated. An integrated one, a lower plate cover 340 and a plate unit base 323 integrated, a lower plate main body 325 and a plate unit base 323 integrated, a plate unit base 323 and a plate unit cover 326; Are integrated, the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guiding section of lower plate]
An embodiment in which the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is provided with a ball guiding portion 322c for guiding game balls from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. . FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and FIG. 46 (b) is a description schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a different ball guiding portion than that of FIG. FIG. 8C is an explanatory view schematically showing an example provided with a further different ball guiding section. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  In the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46A, the diameter of the lower plate hole 322a is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 between the lower plate supply hole 323c and the lower hole 322a. It has a pair of ball guiding portions 322c that are arranged left and right at a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322c is formed in a rail shape (ridge) extending forward and backward while protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Further, the lower plate 322 is inclined such that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 322a. Therefore, the game ball supplied from the lower bowl supply port 323c into the lower bowl 322 is guided to the lower bowl extracting hole 322a by the pair of ball guiding parts 322c without going over the ball guiding part 322c, It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  The lower plate 322 and the lower plate ball supply port 323c are provided at the lower right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate second area A2) in the same manner as described above. The holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the lower dish cover 340. It is invisible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower dish 322 of the present example is provided with the pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c in a state where the lower dish extraction hole 322a is open. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate hole 322a without entering the lower plate 322 into the region on the left side of the lower plate hole 322a. Since the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, the illusion that the upper plate 321 and the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, so that the player can concentrate on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image) to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be.

  In the example of FIG. 46 (a), the ball guiding portion 322c has a rail shape, but the ball guiding portion 322c is not limited to this. What is necessary is just to be able to be guided to the countersunk hole 322a.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (b), the game ball discharged diagonally forward right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c passes through the right wall of the lower plate hole 322a in the lower plate 322. The ball is formed in such a shape as to reflect in the direction of the lower bowl extraction hole 322a, and is provided with a buffer 322d at a position where the game ball contacts. This buffer 322d is formed of rubber, foam, or the like.

  In the same manner as described above, the lower plate 322 of this example is also provided with a lower plate hole 322a in front of the lower plate supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate hole 322a. It is inclined to become. Therefore. The game balls released straight forward from the lower bowl supply port 323c are directly discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower bowl extracting hole 322a. On the other hand, the game ball discharged to the right front from the lower bowl feeding port 323c is reflected by the buffer 322d in the direction of the lower bowl extracting hole 322a, and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower bowl extracting hole 322a. Is done. At this time, since the game ball comes into contact with the buffer 322d and is reflected, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Further, in this example, the lower plate 322 is also in the same manner as described above. It is disposed behind the covering wall such as the unit mounting portion 326a and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and is not visible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present example includes the buffer portion 322d on the wall that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c, The buffer portion 322d allows the sound to be reflected in the direction of the lower bowl drain hole 322a without sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Therefore, when the game balls and the like dispensed from the upper plate 321 and the dispensing device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls from the lower plate 322 is not heard, so that the ball is directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image) to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be done.

  Next, an example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46C is a portion of the lower surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower plate 322 opposite to the lower plate supply port 323c with the lower plate hole 322a interposed therebetween. And a return portion 322e that reflects the game ball, which protrudes upward from the lower ball drain hole 322a and jumps over the lower ball drain hole 322a, toward the lower ball drain hole 322a. The return portion 322e may be made of the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322, or may be made of a cushioning material such as rubber or foam, which alleviates a collision sound at the time of reflection. Further, the return portion 322e may not constitute the side wall of the lower plate 322 or may constitute a part of the side wall of the lower plate 322 (the main body standing wall portion 325b).

  In this lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323c, a lower plate ball hole 322a, and a return portion 322e are linearly arranged in order from the rear to the front, and the lower plate 326 is a lower plate. Behind the opening wall 326d on the right side (behind the cover wall such as the effect operation unit 400, which is the lower plate second area A2, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). It is arranged and cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if a game ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball hole 322a, the return portion 322e forms the lower ball hole 322a side. And can be discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower countersunk hole 322a. Therefore, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described ball guiding section 322c and the buffer section 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate which can be divided, and FIG. 47 (b) schematically shows a state where the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) by a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at a dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2. In FIG. 47, the area indicated by the dotted hatching indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

  First, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47A constitutes a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, and has a lower plate ball hole 322a. It has a main body 325A and a first extension 325B attached to the right side of the main body 325A and constituting the remaining area of the lower second plate area A2. The first additional portion 325B is further provided with the remaining space of the mounting space 326j in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is accommodated (the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A). Back space). As shown, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. In addition, the first extension portion 325B has a relief portion 322b at the right front corner for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A.

  Next, in the examples of FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c), the rear end of the rendering operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and is thus less than the example of FIG. 47 (a). The space behind the effect operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is large. The lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) includes a lower plate first region A1 and a part of the lower plate second region A2, and a main body 325A having a lower plate ball hole 322a. A second extension 325C, which is attached to the right side of the portion 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2, is larger than the first extension 325B. As shown in the drawing, the second extension 325C has a constant width in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end, and has a larger storage area for game balls than the first extension 325B. The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension 325C (see FIG. 47 (c)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C to the main body 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (communicated), and the storage area of the game balls is provided. Expands. The boundary between the main body 325A and the first extension 325B or the second extension 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C of the lower plate main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (between the mounting space 326j) between the effect operation unit 400 and the rear surface of the second effect operation unit 400A. (Space).

  As described above, in the above example, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be dividable, and at least one of the divided members is replaceable. The storage area can be made larger or smaller as needed. Further, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be dividable, it projects to the rear (in the mounting space 326j) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. An extension portion (first extension portion 325B or second extension portion 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second area A2 behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A). It may be arranged on the boundary between the first plate area A1 and the second lower dish area A2, or may be arranged in the first lower dish area A1.

  In the above-described embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball hole 322a in the main body 325A. However, the first additional portion 325B and the second additional portion 325C are not provided. A lower countersunk hole 322a may be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are mounted on the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325. You may make it attach a flat-plate-shaped closing member which does not have a storage area.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described. However, the lower plate cover 340 can be divided similarly to the lower plate main body 325, and the first additional portion 325B and the second additional portion The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 323 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 to FIG. The plate unit base 323 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111, and extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear portion is open). (Shallow box shape).

  The dish unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in a front view and extends rearward in a cylindrical shape, and penetrates forward and backward below the upper dish ball supply port 323a. A speaker slit 323b formed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating forward and backward at a lower portion closer to the left from the left and right center in front view and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; An upper dish ball feed port 323d penetrating back and forth at the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in front view and extending vertically and having an upper portion located at the right end of the upper dish body 324.

  Further, the dish unit base 323 includes a ball feed guide path 323e for guiding game balls sent to the rear side of the dish unit base 323 through the upper dish ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250; After hanging down from the lower side of the feed guide path 323e, it extends in a substantially L-shape so as to become lower toward the right side of the cylindrical shape of the lower dish ball supply port 323c when viewed from the front, and from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. A ball guiding path 323f that guides the released game balls to the lower dish ball supply port 323c, a lower end of the ball feeding guiding path 323e and a lower end of the ball feeding guiding path 323e and an upper end of the ball drawing guiding path 323f. And an operation transmitting portion 327a which is in contact with the operation rod 253c of the ball feed unit 250 and is operated by the upper countersunk button 327 projects backward so as to face rearward. And it includes an opening 323 g, a. The downstream end of the ball guide path 323f is open in a cylindrical portion of the lower counter ball supply port 323c.

  Further, the plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view, and has a handle insertion opening 323h through which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. And a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 has a front end opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 321 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a cylindrical rear end has an upper plate passage port for the door frame base 110. 117 penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. Thereby, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

  When the lower tray ball supply port 323c is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the lower tray 322, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the lower tray passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. And is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, game balls flowing in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower dish ball supply port 323c is disposed behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside the lower dish opening 326d) in the dish unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower dish cover 340, and the like. When viewed from the front, the door frame 3 is invisible from the player through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit cover 326 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325. The plate unit cover 326 has a center in the left-right direction that swells forward, and has a large opening forward in the center in the left-right direction. An upper plate front decorative portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 and a lower plate front decorative portion 326c formed below each of the left and right upper plate front decorative portions 326b. I have.

  The effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed so that the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the total width of the plate unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the up-down direction is substantially the same as the height of the plate unit 320 in the up-down direction. It is formed at the height. The effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined such that the front end moves rearward as it goes upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The front plate upper decorative portion 326b has a front surface that moves rearward from the center in the left-right direction to both left and right sides of the plate unit cover 326, and ends at the center in the left-right direction and both left and right sides of the plate unit cover 326. An intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape slightly bulging forward with respect to a plane connecting the ends of the first and second portions. Further, the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined such that the lower end moves upward from the left-right center to the left-right end of the plate unit cover 326, and the left-right center of the plate unit cover 326 ( It is formed so that the up-down direction is narrowed from the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a side) to both left and right sides. In the plate unit cover 326, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 are attached to the upper front plate decoration portion 326b on the left side in front view.

  The front lower portion 326c of the dish unit 326c moves rearward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and right ends of the dish unit cover 326, and the left and right ends of the center of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface so as to be depressed rearward with respect to a plane connecting the ends of the first and second portions.

  A lower plate opening 326d penetrating front and rear is formed in the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, the lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the lower front surface of the lower plate opening 326d. A lower speaker opening 326e made of punched metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening 326d in the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side when viewed from the front. The lower speaker opening 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the plate unit base 323 when assembled to the plate unit 320.

  A handle insertion opening 326f, which penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in front view and through which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, is provided in the lower right front dish counterpart 326c in front view. A cylinder insertion opening 326g, which penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion opening 326f near the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the right side in front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323. It covers the upper right side. The top plate portion 326h is provided with a top ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending return display portion 330.

  The plate unit cover 326 includes a flat bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the plate lower decorative portion 326c to the front surface of the plate unit base 323. The bottom of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape such that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed upward from below, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to that portion. In the bottom plate portion 326i, a hole vertically penetrating is formed at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball hole 322a of the lower plate 322.

  The plate unit cover 326 has a mounting space 326j that opens forward at the portion of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a and into which the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). Further, the plate unit cover 326 extends rearward from the left and upper sides of the lower plate opening 326d in a flat plate shape, and includes a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 44). . The lower plate cover portion 326k is configured such that the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 contacts the left end, and the left end of the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 contacts the right end. I have.

[3-3e. Button for removing the upper plate ball]
The upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper plate 321 when viewed from the front. It can be pulled out. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate removing button 327 is not illustrated in detail. Is mounted so as to be rotatable about an axis extending therethrough. The upper ball removing button 327 has an upper end of a vertically extending ball removing lever in contact with the lower surface of the front end thereof. The ball-pull lever is mounted slidably in the up-down direction by a ball-pull base attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 below the plate-pull button 327.

  The ball-pulling lever, whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the ball-pulling button 327, comes into contact with the upper part of the ball-pulling slider 327b, which is slidable up and down by the plate unit base 323, from above. ing. The upper counter ball removing slider 327b includes an operation transmitting portion 327a projecting rearward from the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmitting portion 327a is moved from the opening 323g in the plate unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face and contacts the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250 from below. The slider 327b is urged upward by a spring 327c, and the biasing force of the spring 327c causes the slider 327b and the lever to remove the ball. The upper bowl removing button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Accordingly, when the upper counter-ball-pulling button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper counter-ball-pulling-out spring 327c, the operation transmitting portion 327a of the upper counter-ball-pulling slider 327b moves downward and the operation transmitting portion 327a Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 which is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, so that they are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls in the upper plate 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and discharged to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. (Supply).

  Note that, when the upper bowl removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower bowl removing hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with it. As a result, when the upper plate ball removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower plate ball removing hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 are further removed. The paper is discharged from the hole 322a to the dollar box below. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong illusion to the player that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is difficult for the player to feel the trouble of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by focusing the player on the game (such as a game ball hitting operation and effect image). Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the balls may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball lending button, return button, and ball lending return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display section 330 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. As illustrated, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display unit 330 are inside a circular decoration on the right side of the top plate ball removal button 327 on the top plate 326h of the plate unit cover 326 when viewed from the front. Mounted on

  The ball lending button 328 is used to push a cash or prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and press the ball lending machine to play a predetermined number of game balls. It is lent (paid out) to the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed while the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or the prepaid card is returned after deducting the lending game ball.

  Although illustration is omitted, a three-digit seven-segment LED is arranged below the transparent surface of the ball lending display unit 330, and the number of cash or prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine, or An error code when the ball rental machine breaks down is displayed.

[3-3 g. Direction selection left button and Direction selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. As shown, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate unit cover 326 near the right end near the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the upper front plate decoration portion 326b on the left side in front view. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed leftward. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed rightward to the effect selection left button 331.

  The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided to the player on the game board side effect display device 1600 or the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in front view. When an effect image prompting selection is displayed, a pressing operation can be accepted, and the desired option is selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time. .

[3-3h. Lower plate ball removal button]
The lower plate removing button 333 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 to FIG. The lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the lower front surface of the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view below the lower plate opening 326d in the plate unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322. By pressing the lower bowl removing button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower bowl removing hole 322a of the lower bowl 322 can be rotated. The lower plate hole 322a is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320.

  The lower plate removing button 333 is slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower plate removing base 335 (see FIG. 42 (b)) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 below the lower plate main body 325. Mounted on The lower bowl removing button 333 is disposed on the left side of the lower bowl removing hole 322a of the lower bowl 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The base plate 335 of the plate unit cover 326 is provided on the base plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 so as to be accommodated in a portion formed below the lower plate 322 in a stepped shape so as to be recessed upward from below. It is attached to the part 326i. An outlet 335a, which has the same size as the lower ball drain hole 322a and penetrates vertically, is formed at a position directly below the lower hole 322a. . Although not shown in detail, the cover member 334 is disposed between the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate ball removing base 335. As a result, when the lid member 334 closing the lower plate hole 322a is opened, the outlet 335a of the lower plate base 335 is also opened, and the lower hole 322a and the outlet 335a are opened. Are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the cover member 334 is attached to the lower bowl removing base 335 so as to be rotatable about a position to the left of the lower bowl removing button 333 in plan view. The lower ball removing button 333 is connected to a portion between a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower ball removing hole 322 a and a portion rotatably mounted by the lower ball removing base 335. Thereby, when the lower countersunk ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates around an axis extending vertically, and the lower countersunk ball extraction hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the holding device for holding the lower plate ball release button 333 when the lower plate ball release button 333 is pressed backward and moved, and a lower plate ball release button And a lower countersunk ball release spring that urges 333 forward. In a state in which the lower ball pull-out button 333 is protruded forward and the lower ball pull-out hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower ball pull-out button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 rotates. As a result, the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the lower tray ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device, so that the lower tray ball removal button 333 remains moved rearward. In this state, even if the button 333 is released, the button 333 does not move forward, and the hole 322a for opening the ball 322 is kept open. The game balls in 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320 through the lower plate hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  Then, in a state where the lower countersunk ball removing button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower countersunk ball extracting hole 322a is open, when the lower countersunk ball extracting button 333 is pressed backward, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, when the button 333 is released, the button 333 is moved forward by the urging force of the spring, and returns to the protruding state, and the cover 334 is turned. Then, the lower countersunk hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. Thus, game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  Note that, apart from the pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball discharging hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is also movable by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 327. The lower bowl removing hole 322a may be opened. Thus, when the player wants to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box arranged below the plate unit 320, only by operating the upper plate ball removal button 327, the dollar box can be moved through the lower plate 322. And the trouble associated with emptying the ball can be simplified. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the balls may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 51 is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 53B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape, a center side excluding an outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by a player, and an effect operation unit of a plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. A base unit 430 mounted on the rear side of the unit 415 and having the operation buttons 410 and the decorative board unit 420 mounted on the front surface, and mounted on the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation buttons 410 A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from behind. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller in diameter than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and is formed transparent at a center side excluding an outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) such that the outer periphery is circular and the center swells forward, and a front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that do not allow light to pass through.

  The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. In addition, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends a predetermined length toward the center (inside) in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a row extending within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction extending on the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed in a circular arc cross section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decoration part 411a. And a plurality of (six) second button decorations 411b provided.

  As illustrated, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group of left and right sides is a group of upper and lower sides. It extends longer toward the center than it does.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and is formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decorations 411b are formed so as to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward such that the front surface is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect of refracting light at the portions of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b due to the W-shaped or arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly seen.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and has a plurality of (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from a front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer circumference of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detecting pieces 413d projecting rearward in a strip shape and arranged in the circumferential direction, and a predetermined length along the outer periphery, penetrating the flange portion 413b back and forth outside the main body portion 413a. A base opening 413e extending in the circumferential direction and having a plurality of (six) formed in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical shape extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end side is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange 413b. The four guide bosses 413c are respectively disposed at positions corresponding to the four corners of the main body 413a in the upper, lower, left, and right directions. These four guide bosses 413c are slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

  Six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, three each, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and a part of the inner extension 413f are recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inside extension 413f has an inside diameter at the front end narrowed inward substantially matching the inside diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape), is formed transparent, and is a door frame side effect display device 460 arranged on the rear side. Can be visually recognized from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and an operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Urged forward. The operation button 410 is further prevented from moving forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 when the front side of the outer peripheral edge abuts on the frame unit 415. , The rear end moves backward until the rear end contacts the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. By the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440, the operation button 410 is operated.

  Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 of the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled. The part 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

  Further, the operation button 410 has a front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion that can be seen rearward is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 inside the operation buttons of the base unit 430.

  When the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (the main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative board unit 420 and is higher than the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It becomes a state protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the decoration button 422 outside the operation button left and the decoration board 423 outside the operation button right of the decoration board unit 420, respectively, emits light from the button. It is possible to prevent the base unit 413 from leaking from the outside to the inside, and to operate the operation button left interior decoration board 433, the operation button right interior decoration board 434, the operation button upper interior decoration board 435, and the operation button lower interior of the base unit 430. Light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative board 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430 It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being illuminated and decorated other than the part targeted for luminous decoration, and to perform luminous decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 from the front side so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape conforming to the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320, and frame main bodies 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. I have.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates forward and backward, and has a central opening 416a that penetrates forward and backward on both left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a, and a notch 416c cut at a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is provided. The center opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter of the operation button 410 on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. Thereby, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can be brought into contact with the rear side of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

  The six outer peripheral openings 416b are respectively provided on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are each closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-back direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut out. In a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylindrical portion 416d includes the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420, respectively. And partitions between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Further, the frame main body 416 includes a pair of mounting portions 416e extending outward at upper portions on both right and left sides of the outer periphery, and mounted to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416 e and the cutout portion 416 c are attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320.

  The frame main body 416 has a metal covering substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a therebetween. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416, three from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface with no irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The outer shape of the frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape so as to be fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame main body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. In the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a are provided in the rear surface side in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in a state where the rendering operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration board 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted on the frame top lens 418 can emit light. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the effect operation unit, as viewed from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. The vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 which are respectively attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421. , A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 has an inner peripheral side slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer peripheral side larger than the outer diameter of the flange part 413b of the button base 413. Further, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted radially outside the inner circumference of the board base 421 than the plurality of first LEDs 422a. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The decoration board 423 outside the operation button right extends in an arc along the front surface of the board base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and an inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are white.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to a rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  In the state where the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. In the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located behind the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. In addition, in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Accordingly, the decoration board unit 420 causes only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. At the same time, the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b allows only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 to emit light.

  In addition, the decoration substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire production operation unit 400.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the staging operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view showing the base unit of the effect operation unit in a disassembled state as viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the staging operation unit viewed from behind. The base unit 430 of the staging operation unit 400 has the operation buttons 410 attached so as to be able to move forward and backward, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415.

  The base unit 430 has four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and extending vertically in the center and penetrating in a substantially rectangular shape, and blind holes opened forward outside the through holes 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, a light-transmissive operation button decoration member 432 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431 so as to cover the through hole 431a, and extending short and longitudinally in a tubular manner; The operation button left inner decoration board 433 and the operation button right inner decoration board 434 and the operation button inner decoration board 434 attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431 a in the front of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432, respectively. At the rear, the operation attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431. A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  The base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into four holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. The three pressing detection sensors 440 respectively attached to the 439 and detecting the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect operation unit relay board 441 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 431, and the effect operation unit relay board 441. And a relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and has a substantially rectangular through hole 431a extending vertically. The through-hole 431a has a size that fits inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is formed in a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the four corners of the operation button 410 outside the through hole 431a. The holding hole 431b has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss 413c, and the guide boss 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b extends from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. The upper right holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410). Is formed at a position rotated by about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b, respectively. .

  The unit base 431 has a light-shielding wall portion 431c which protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from a portion on the upper front surface between a portion where the inner decorative board 435 on the operation button is mounted and a portion where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is mounted. It has. With this light shielding wall portion 431c, the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated only by the frame top lens decorative substrate 437.

  The decoration member 432 inside the operation button is formed in a curved surface shape such that a substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a extending short in the front-rear direction and a front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c extending vertically through the front plate portion 432b, a flange portion 432d extending outward from a rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. And a plurality of mounting bosses 432e that protrude rearward from the unit base 431 and are mounted on the unit base 431.

  The outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the in-operation button decoration member 432 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In the decoration member 432 for operation buttons, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed as smooth surfaces without irregularities.

  The in-operation button decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is concave in an arc shape, extends in the front-rear direction, and has a plurality of first button in-button decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , Formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulging in an arc shape, extending in an octagonal shape with the center of the front plate portion 432b as the center, and concentric with the center of the front plate portion 432b as the center. 432g (see FIG. 63). The second in-button decorative portion 432g is formed to have a portion extending in parallel with the four inner peripheries of the opening 432c.

  The operation button interior decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The interior of the operation button decorating member 432 is made invisible behind clearly by the lens effect of the first button decorating portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button decorating portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. By emitting light, the decoration member 432 in the operation button can be made to emit light. By making the decoration member 432 inside the operation button emit light, the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be made light emission decoration.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration board 437, and the LEDs can emit light, so that the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can emit light.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 are full color LEDs, respectively. It has been. The front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 are white. .

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 from the front. The operation button spring 438 has a rear end in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431 b and a front end protruding rearward from the main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 in a state where the operation button spring 438 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400. It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation buttons 410 forward.

  The three press detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. More specifically, on the front surface of the unit base 431, three pressing detection sensors 440 are provided, one at the lower left of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other at the lower right of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other at the lower left. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b through sensor holders 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

  The production operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, to the left of the through hole 431a in rear view (right side in front view). The effect operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, a decoration board 436 under the operation button, a frame top lens decoration board 437, a pressure detection sensor 440, and a door frame side effect display device 460 for relaying the connection with the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. Things.

  The relay board cover 442 extends leftward in a front view from the lower end of a portion that covers the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441, and includes a leg 442a attached to a lower rear part of the unit base 431. When assembled to the door frame 3, the leg 442 a of the relay board cover 442 has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally, and a leg 442 a between the leg 442 a and the bottom plate 326 i that forms the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. To form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Thus, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed down or hit, the frame unit 415 is not moved until the lower surface of the leg 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the attachment portion 416e and the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted below, and the effect unit mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attaching portion of the plate unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the 326a and the like, thereby preventing their breakage.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432 c of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430. The display screen can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front surface and the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a mounting bracket 462 in the shape of a bottomed rectangular tube. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The outer circumference of the mounting bracket 462 is formed in the same shape as the outer circumference of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is mounted such that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape is in contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  In a state where the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 passes through the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is provided. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the in-operation button decoration member 432, and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 on the liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effects of the production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the rendering operation unit in FIG. 51. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, in which a part of the operation button is cut away and the first button decoration portion of the operation button, a button frame or the like attempts to hide the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part which it is going to hide with the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of an effect operation unit. FIG. 63A is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 63B is an explanatory diagram of the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The rendering operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can show a rendering image to a player according to a game state that is changed by a game ball being driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and operate the player. By operating the button 410, the player can participate in the effect presented to the player and entertain it.

  The effect operation unit 400 has an overall height substantially equal to the height of the portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110. The effect operation unit 400 is formed so that the entire width is slightly larger than 大 き く of the entire width of the door frame 3. The rendering operation unit 400 is disposed below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the state in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Installed as Thereby, the rendering operation unit 400 is configured such that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line, It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is disposed above the plate unit 320 (production operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the gaming area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projection viewed from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the user can visually recognize the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 in a good state.

  The effect operation unit 400 has four guide bosses 413 c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the base unit 430, respectively, and is urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to move by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The rear surface of the frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a.

  In the effect operation unit 400, in a normal state, the center side (the center axis CL side) of the operation button 410 near the inner periphery of the button frame 412 projects forward from the center opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. I have. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) of the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412. , Protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the button lens 411 with respect to the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the staging operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the center axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted, and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  Since the operation button 410 has an extremely large outer diameter as compared with the effect operation button provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. Likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in a conventional pachinko machine are mounted so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. Since the center axis CL is inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above similarly to the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by a white arrow in FIG. A part of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed.

  By the way, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the pressed portion is flat surface When pressing a part deviated from the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the part (the button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a position distant from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt and moving the operation button 410 straight backward. Can be. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly moved backward without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 can be pressed. It is possible to entertain the effect of the operation sufficiently.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424 since the vibration is generated by the vibration motor 424 because the vibration is generated at the portion farthest from the mounted portion, since the vibration is generated by the vibration operation motor 424 because the vibration is generated. In addition, the entire effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to a player who is touching the effect operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively easily perform the pressing operation (the position indicated by the white arrow in FIG. 61), the player who is pressing the operation button 410 can be operated. Strong vibration can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the frame is not moved until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by the downward bending of the attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the rendering portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the plate unit cover 326 are attached. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Accordingly, even when the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player with the effect of pressing the operation button 410, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it hard to be damaged. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411 even when strongly hit, so that the button lens 411 is hardly damaged.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, in the effect operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button are composed of transparent members. The decoration by the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the first button decoration part 432f, the second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side is the front side (the player side). ). In addition, since light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in plate thickness in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the rear side is difficult to visually recognize through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the unevenness decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. Thereby, it is possible to make it hard to see the rear part at the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (rearward in the direction of the center axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall part of the decoration member 432 in the operation button Although the gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button decoration member 432 is located from the front side (player side) from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. This makes it possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the in-operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to arrange the in-operation button decoration member 432 within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, thereby improving the appearance of the operation button 410.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the first button decoration portion 411 a and the second button decoration portion 411 b of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 and the button frame 412 form the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative board unit 420, and the like, which are further outside and on the rear side (rear side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the cross-hatched area surrounded by a dashed line is not seen from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the inside operation button decoration member 432 are hidden and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation buttons 410 and, consequently, the overall effect operation unit 400.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411 a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the center axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second in-button decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the in-operation button decoration member 432 disposed inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape with the center axis CL as the center. As shown in FIG. 63, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the uneven line of the second button internal decorative portion 432g intersect with each other, as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-back direction (the direction in which the center axis CL extends), the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other. With the second button decoration portion 432g, the player can see a deep and three-dimensional geometric pattern to the player, and can enjoy the decoration including the operation button 410.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-back direction, when the position of the eyes of the player moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a is obtained. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g is changed, the player can see the moving decoration and entertain the player.

  As described above, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since the player can show the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest strongly and have a high appeal.

  The effect operation unit 400 includes an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, an operation button right inner decoration board An upper inner decorative substrate 435 and an operation button lower inner decorative substrate 436 are arranged, and by illuminating a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof, the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. In other words, the operation buttons 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation buttons 410 are arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is provided behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is provided. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are arranged, and by illuminating the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated. Can be. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 is provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board. 423 second LEDs 423b are disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated by emitting light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422 b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the second LED 423 b of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416 d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated. .

  In the effect operation unit 400, a frame top lens decorative board 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative board 437. By making the LED emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission. From the lower side of the unit base 431 of the unit base 431 of the unit unit 431 where the frame top lens decorative board 437 is attached, a flat light-shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward to near the lower rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED on the top lens decoration board 437 does not leak to the operation buttons 410 and the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

[3-4 g. Overall Configuration of Second Embodiment of Production Operation Unit]
Next, a second effect operation unit 400A as a second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. FIG. 64A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and FIG. 64B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the center axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along line GG in FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. FIG. 69A is a cross-sectional view taken along a line II in FIG. 64B, and FIG. 69B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. The second effect operation unit 400A, like the effect operation unit 400, allows the player to perform a pressing operation and can present an effect image to the player. In the following, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as in the effect operation unit 400 are denoted by the same reference numerals and described.

  The second production operation unit 400A has an operation button 410 whose outer shape is circular and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparent, and which can be pressed by the player, and an effect of a plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame unit 415 having a frame shape attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, a decoration substrate unit 420 arranged rearward of the operation button 410 and capable of decorating the outer periphery of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light emission. A second base unit 450 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 attached to the front surface, and a second base unit 450 that can be visually recognized from the player through the operation button 410. The second effect table on the door frame side that is attached to and can display effect images And apparatus 460A, a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side, and a.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A is configured such that the second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in a front view are arranged. And a relay board cover 516 attached to the right side of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in front view so as to cover the same. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A when viewed from the front.

  The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a press detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration board 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, And relaying the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A has an outer shape formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and is formed transparent at the center excluding the outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side swells forward, and an outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 are provided. The configuration is substantially the same as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

  A specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 have a pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and a guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the portion 413c is different.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one vertex at the center of the button lens 411 at a position in contact with the inner periphery of the button frame 412. The button lens 411 in a truss-like pattern and a truss-like pattern in which a plurality of triangles directed toward one another and a triangle with one vertex directed to the opposite side of the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction in a plurality of rows. , A right-angled triangular pattern composed of a bottom extending toward the center of the button lens 411 from both ends of the bottom, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the bottom. From the hypotenuse of the right triangle pattern, the side extending longer than the right triangle pattern from the center of the bottom of the truss pattern triangle to the center of the button lens 411, and the tip of the side And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of each triangle-shaped pattern, in which is formed.

  That is, the first button decoration unit 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. Although not shown, each triangle forming the first button decoration portion 411a has a polyhedral shape with its respective surfaces facing different directions. Thereby, while the front side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, the back side is formed in a polyhedral shape in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so that the first button decoration portion 411a is formed. In the part, the thickness of the button lens 411 is complicatedly changed, and light passing through this part is irregularly refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c of the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and is held inside the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Are slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached to the guide boss portion 413c so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 from the front side so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed in a shape conforming to the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, is given the same reference numeral, and a detailed description is omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71, and the like. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. And the second effect operation unit 400A.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 which are respectively attached to the left and right front surfaces of the substrate base 421. , A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower portion of the front surface of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, is given the same reference numeral, and a detailed description is omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the operation button 410 mounted so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side is mounted, and is mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is something that can be done.

  The second base unit 450 has a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and projects rearward from the front surface of the unit base 451 into four cylindrical guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. And four button shafts 452 each having a cylindrical shape inserted slidably therefrom, and an operation button spring through which each of the four button shafts 452 is inserted to urge the rear end of the guide boss 413c of the operation button 410 forward. (Not shown), and three pressing detection sensors 454 attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detecting three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, respectively.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b projecting hemispherically rearward from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a, and a vertical direction with respect to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through hole 451c that extends vertically when viewed from the front and back through the cover portion 451b, four holding holes 451d that are recessed rearward from the front surface of the main body portion 451a, and a main body portion 451a. An upper bearing portion 451e recessed in a semicircle (U-shape) from the front to the rear at the upper portion of the upper portion, and a semicircular shape coaxial with the upper bearing portion 451e from the front to the rear at the lower portion of the main body 451a. A (U-shaped) lower bearing portion 451f and a left and right side of an upper bearing portion 451e on the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a, and the rotation of the screen unit 470. And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner periphery and an outer periphery having substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without contact when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A rotatably mounted by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f rotates. I have. The through-hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side to pass from behind.

  The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at four upper, lower, left, and right corners of the front surface of the main body 451a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. These holding holes 451d have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, so that the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. A button shaft 452 is mounted in the four holding holes 451d coaxially with the central axis. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body 451a. When the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d is inserted into the cylindrical guide boss 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is attached via the guide boss 413c so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. Can be.

  The upper left holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. The upper right holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). Is formed at a position rotated by about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, of the four holding holes 451d, two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the two upper holding holes 451d. .

  Further, operation button springs (not shown) are inserted into the four holding holes 451d, respectively. When the front ends of these operation button springs abut against the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c, the operation button springs are inserted through the guide boss portion 413c. 410 is urged forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape that is open at the front and extends rearward. In the upper bearing 451e and the lower bearing 451f, the centers of the portions extending in a semicircular arc are located coaxially. The upper bearing part 451e and the lower bearing part 451f are provided with the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A inserted from the front, and the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side can be rotatably supported.

  As for a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451, the front surfaces of the respective front portions pass through the central axes of the semicircular portions of the upper bearing portion 451e whose U-shaped recessed portions are recessed rearward. And are separated from each other in the circumferential direction at a predetermined angle about the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g restrict the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by being brought into contact with the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. I have. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to a 90-degree angle range by the pair of rotation restriction parts 451g.

  Although not shown, a magnet is buried in each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, and is magnetically attached to the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b, so as to contact the rotation restricting portions 451g. The stopper 475b is hard to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, in the screen unit 470, the first position in which the main screen 471 is directed forward or the second position in which the sub-screen 472 is directed forward in the screen unit 470 by the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the positions, and the screen unit 470 is prevented from rotating by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 or the like, and the door frame side is controlled. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three pressing detection sensors 454 are mounted on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. More specifically, on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, three pressing detection sensors 454 are provided, one at the lower left of the upper left holding hole 451d, and the other at the lower right of the upper right holding hole 451d. Are attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side is attached to the second base unit 450, and can display an effect image to a player through a transparent portion of the operation button 410. The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side includes a screen unit 470 attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f, and a second base unit. An upper bearing member 480 mounted on the upper front of the unit 450 and rotatably mounting the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and mounted on the lower front of the second base unit 450 And a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably mounts the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  In addition, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side includes a rotation drive unit 490 mounted on the upper portion of the second base unit 450 by rotating the screen unit 470 and a cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 which is arranged and capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, and a rear surface of the unit base 451 which is mounted with the projector 500 and covers the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. A box-shaped projector mounting member 505 having an open front and a mounting gear member 475 of a screen unit 470 on the left side of the rotary drive unit 490 in the upper part of the second base unit 450 when viewed from the front. Upper cover 506 and the upper And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470 is attached to the bar 506 (rotational position), and a.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The screen unit 470 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 about an axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500, The effect image can be displayed (projected and displayed) so as to be visible to the player.

  The screen unit 470 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape and has a milky white translucent main screen 471, a disk-shaped part having one end in the axial direction of the main screen 471 as a part of the outer periphery, and a central part having an axis. A sub-screen 472 which is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction outward and has a translucent milky white color, and projects in a columnar shape outwardly in the direction perpendicular to the axis from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the operating gear member 475 which is attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and has gear teeth 475 a formed over substantially half of the outer periphery, and penetrates the sub-screen 472. A sub-screen decorative member 476 (see FIGS. 74 and 75) formed in a relief shape simulating a transparent and predetermined character (skull); A sub-screen decorative board 477 (see FIG. 75 and the like) mounted on the back side of the 472 and having a plurality of LEDs 477 a mounted on a surface facing the sub-screen 472, and a side opposite to the sub-screen 472 of the main screen 471. And a semicircular peripheral decoration member 478 that extends shortly from the end of the main screen 471 toward the central axis of the main screen 471.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 has an axial length approximately 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are bordered by the peripheral decoration portion 472 a and the peripheral decoration member 478 of the sub-screen 472.

  The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74B). . The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and has a peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are provided in a plurality of rows in the circumferential direction, and closes the inside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a. And a curved general screen portion 472b. The entire peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape such that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472b bulges in a direction away from the main screen 471 into a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471. A through-hole is formed in the screen general portion 472b of the sub-screen 472, and a sub-screen decorative member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are inserted into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 from the front, respectively, and are rotatably mounted.

  The operation gear member 475 meshes with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotation drive unit 490 and is formed with a gear tooth 475a formed over a substantially half circumference, and protrudes outward from one of circumferential ends of the gear tooth 475a. A stopper 475b, and a detection piece 475c that protrudes outward in a flat plate shape from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear teeth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 is located in the concave portion 481a of the upper bearing member 480 that is concave in an arc around the axis of the upper shaft member 473 when assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is regulated by contacting the pair of rotation regulating parts 451g of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the concave portion 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It has become.

  The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position in which the main screen 471 is directed forward and a second position in which the sub-screen 472 is directed forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen general portion 472b of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decoration member 476 is formed in a relief shape simulating a skull by a transparent member, and the thickness of the sub-screen decoration member 476 is complicatedly changed. It is difficult. Although not shown in detail, the letter “PUSH” is formed in the relief simulating the skull of the sub-screen decorative member 476.

  The sub-screen decorative board 477 is attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472 so as to form a gap between the sub-screen 472 and a plurality of LEDs 477a on the front side (the side facing the sub-screen 472). Has been implemented. The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than the sub-screen decoration member 476 and has a white surface. By making the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emit light, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be made to emit light. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative board 477 can make the skull “eyes” and the letters “PUSH” emit light and light by making the LED 477a emit light.

  The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is disposed relatively close to the sub-screen 472, and has no member for diffusing light between itself and the sub-screen 472. , The player can recognize the point light source of the LED 477a. Further, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can block light from the projector 500. Therefore, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 can be projected on the sub-screen 472 by the projector 500.

  The peripheral decoration member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and similarly to the peripheral decoration portion 472a, a plurality of square pyramidal irregularities are provided in the circumferential direction of the arc. .

  As described above, the screen unit 470 includes two different screens, such as the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472. The main screen 471 is intended to display an effect image that is projected from the projector 500 over the entire surface of the semi-cylindrical shape, and is attracted to the player by the projection from the projector 500. On the other hand, the sub-screen 472 has a narrow range in which the effect image from the projector 500 forms the periphery of the center sub-screen decoration member 476 due to the presence of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 at the back center (the main screen 471 is narrower). (The range), the purpose is to display an effect image that gorgeously colors the periphery of the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the operation of pressing the operation button 410 on the player by the light-emitting decoration of the sub-screen decoration member 476 using the LED 477a. The purpose is to encourage.

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 close the front sides of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, which are opened forward. It is attached to the front of 451a. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are in a state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451, respectively. By attaching to the front surface of the unit base 451, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

  The upper bearing member 480 includes a bearing member 481 mounted on the upper part of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing part 451e whose front side is open, and a bearing member. And a frame top lens decorative substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of the 481. The bearing member 481 has a concave portion 481a that is concave in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is the deepest. The concave portion 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the concave portion 481a. The concave portion 481a that is concave in the arc shape allows the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 to satisfactorily rotate between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  The frame top lens decorative board 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state where it is assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. ing. Accordingly, the frame top lens 418 can be made to emit light by making the LED of the frame top lens decorative board 482 emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. By attaching the lower bearing member 485 to the front surface of the unit base 451 in a state where the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the lower shaft member 474 is provided. Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotation drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 that is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow inside, and a switching drive motor 492 that is mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and has a rotation shaft protruding into the unit case 491. A spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first gear meshed with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A transmission gear (not shown) is meshed with the first transmission gear and is meshable with the gear teeth 475 a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. And a second transmission gear 495 having a spur gear shape.

  The second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475 a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state where the rotation drive unit 490 is assembled to the second effect operation unit 400 </ b> A. The rotation drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 around the axis extending back and forth through the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. Can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The projector 500 is arranged in a hemispherical cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector mounting member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cubic projector body 501 attached to the projector attachment member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward from the projector body 501 in a columnar shape and irradiates the effect image forward from the front end.

  In the projector 500, the rear part of the projector main body 501 is mounted on the projector mounting member 505, and the lens part 502 and the projector main body 501 are disposed in the cover part 451b through the through-hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. Mounted as

  The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. This projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal type projector and has an automatic focusing function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with an open front. The projector 500 is mounted inside the projector mounting member 505, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector mounting member 505 can be mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 to cover the cover 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in a state where the projector 500 is inclined so as to match the inclination of the operation button 410. . A plurality of slits 505a penetrating back and forth are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

  A second effect operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side of the projector mounting member 505 in a front view.

[3-4g-5f. Top cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to cover above the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensors 507 are for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and are mounted on the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state where they are separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached at positions separated by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and the operation gears in the screen unit 470 are provided. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 include a detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 faces forward and a detection piece 475c when the sub-screen 472 faces forward. The detection piece 475c at the time can be detected respectively. The rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475c by the two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 70 and FIG. The buffer unit 510 is attached to a lower surface of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, and reduces a shock when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above, and a plate unit cover in the plate unit 320. 326 is transmitted to the bottom plate 326i.

  The buffer unit 510 is in contact with an elastically deformable flat plate-shaped buffer member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and is in contact with the lower surface of the buffer member 511. And a buffer base 512 attached to the lower surface of the projector attachment member 505 so as to be relatively accessible.

  The buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a in contact with the lower surface of the shock-absorbing member 511, and leg pieces protruding downward from both left and right sides of the main body portion 512a in front view and extending in the front-rear direction. 512b. The leg portion 512b of the buffer base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The buffer unit 510 is configured such that when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit down, the projector mounting member 505 mounted on the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 of the buffer unit 510. To move down. The shock is absorbed by the compression of the buffer member 511. When the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 abuts on the upper surface of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512. Since a gap is formed between the left and right leg pieces 512b of the main body 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326, the projector mounting member abutting on the upper surface of the main body 512a. When the 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a bends, and the shock can be absorbed by the bending of the main body portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a bent downward contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the attachment unit 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment unit of the plate unit cover 326 can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the 326a and the like, and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4g-7. Operation and effect of the second production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74A is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the center axis | shaft of the operation button extended with the screen facing forward. FIG. 75A is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 75B is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74B. FIG. 76 (a) is a view in which the second production operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, and the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is going to do, (b) shows the part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd effect operation unit of the state of (a). FIG. FIG. 77 (a) shows the second production operation unit hidden by a first button decoration portion, a button frame, and the like of the operation button in a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from a direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is going to do, (b) shows the part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of the 2nd effect operation unit of the state of (a). FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button operation in accordance with a game state that is changed by a game ball being driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is possible to entertain the player by displaying an effect image in the 410 and to allow the player to operate the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

  The second effect operation unit 400A is formed so that the overall height is substantially the same as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is formed so that the entire width is slightly larger than １ ／ of the entire width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is disposed below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit 320, between the lower end of the leg portion 512b of the buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. , A gap is formed. That is, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part of the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed to become. As a result, the second effect operation unit 400A changes the center axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) into a vertical line. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees so as to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the plate unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 can reach its front view (projection viewed from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). , And the operation button 410 and the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 slide on the four cylindrical guide bosses 413c of the operation buttons 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400 </ b> A causes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be moved by the urging force of the operation button spring. Of the frame main body 416 in the vicinity of the central opening 416a.

  In the normal state, the second effect operation unit 400A is configured such that the center side (the center axis CL side) of the operation button 410 near the inner periphery of the button frame 412 is forward from the center opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) of the operation button 410, a portion protruding forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412. , Protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) of the button lens 411 with respect to the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the center axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  Since the operation button 410 has an extremely large outer diameter as compared with the effect operation button provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. Likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in a conventional pachinko machine are mounted so that the central axis thereof extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment are operated. Since the button 410 is attached with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above similarly to a conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 separates from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part is pressed (see FIG. 61).

  By the way, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the pressed portion is flat surface When pressing a part deviated from the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the part (the button lens 411) pressed by the player is pressed forward. When the operation button 410 is pressed at a position distant from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and moving the operation button 410 straight backward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly moved backward without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 can be pressed. It is possible to entertain the effect of the operation sufficiently.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A is configured such that the vibration effect motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended as described above. Since only the upper portion is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, when the vibration 424a rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at a portion farthest from the attached portion. Since this occurs, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the second effect operation unit 400A. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below a position where the player can relatively easily press the operation button (near the upper portion of the operation button 410), a strong vibration is applied to the player pressing the operation button 410. Can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 are provided. The buffer unit 510 is disposed between the upper surface of the portion 326i. The cushioning unit 510 includes a cushioning member 511 that can be elastically deformed, and forms a gap between the main body portion 512a with which the cushioning member 511 contacts the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the shock is multi-staged by the elastic deformation (compression) of the buffer member 511 or the bending of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512. It can be absorbed, and it can be prevented that an unreasonable force acts on the attachment part 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment part 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the second effect operation unit 400A is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or struck with a strong force, for example, when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is presented to the player, the operation is performed. Since the button 410, the second production operation unit 400A, and the like are not damaged, the interruption of the game due to the damage can be avoided, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed. An increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed.

  Since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, the button lens 411 is compared with a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are increased, and even if the player is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 is hardly damaged.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are formed of transparent members, the first button decoration unit formed on the back side thereof. The decoration by unevenness such as 411a and the second button decoration 411b can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, since light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in plate thickness in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the rear side is difficult to visually recognize through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to the center side, the plurality of first button decoration portions 411a are provided. It is possible to make the rear of the button lens 411 hard to see behind at the outer peripheral portion of the portion inside the button lens 411 by the decoration of unevenness combining the triangles. Behind the part where the first button decoration part 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the center axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the main body part 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the second effect display device on the door frame side The gap between the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 is located from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration part 411a located in front of the gap. Can be made difficult to see. Thereby, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the player who has seen the operation button 410 can In addition to preventing discomfort, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side can be arranged in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A includes a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like, which are on the rear side (rear side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, and the like, from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in the state of the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and the right side of the peripheral decorative member 478. The outside portion (the cross hatched portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 76) is not seen from the player side.

  On the other hand, in the state of the second position in which the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, a portion outside the annular peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (a cross hatched portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 76). ) Is not visible from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are hardly seen. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation buttons 410, and thus the entire second effect operation unit 400A, can be improved.

  When the main screen 471 is in the first position facing forward, the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, the button frame 412, and the like of the button lens 411 cause the general screen portion of the sub-screen 472 to move. The 472b and the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are hard to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the sub-screen 472, the fact that the main screen 471 is rotatable, and the like. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub-screen 472, the operation By performing a motion that exceeds the player's expectation within the button 410, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in a state where the sub-screen 472 faces the front, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (the sub-screen decoration member 476) is rotatable, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (the screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. It can entertain players.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A is a button lens 411 that allows the user to visually recognize the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side disposed behind the operation button 410, and is located on the center side from the inner periphery of the button frame 412. Within the range of a predetermined width, a first button decoration portion 411a in the form of a polyhedron in which a plurality of triangular surfaces are combined is provided, and the second effect display on the door frame side disposed inside and behind the operation button 410. The device 460A is provided with a peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square pyramids are arranged and a peripheral decorative member 478. Thereby, the decoration (first button decoration part 411a) formed of a triangle disposed on the front side and the decoration (peripheral decoration part 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) formed of a square disposed on the rear side overlap so as to intersect. As a result, a complicated geometric pattern can be shown to the player, and the appearance can be improved to suppress a decrease in interest of the player.

  Further, as described above, the first button decoration portion 411a mainly composed of a triangle and the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478 mainly composed of a square are separated in the front-rear direction. When the position moves, the degree of overlapping changes, so that the overlapping geometrical pattern changes, so that the player can see the decoration with movement and the decoration with a three-dimensional feeling with depth. Can be shown to entertain the player.

  Further, in the second effect display device 460 </ b> A on the door frame side disposed inside and behind the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by the drive of the switching drive motor 492 to turn the main screen 471 forward or to move the sub screen 472 can be turned forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in a state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a and the peripheral edge decorative member 478 are vertically separated from each other and vertically extended. The decoration made up of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row forms a geometric pattern decoration that vertically traverses the decoration made up of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Can be shown to players. On the other hand, in a state where the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration portion 472a is in a state of extending in a ring shape, and is a decoration composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a ring. However, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern decoration that overlaps the decoration made up of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed, so that the change in the decoration attracts the player's interest to the operation button 410 or the decoration of the decoration. The change can suggest the arrival of a chance or the like to the player, and can entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a screen having different switchable screens (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the display unit includes the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470, it is possible to display an effect image completely different from the effect image display by the liquid crystal display device, and to have a strong impact on the player. Can be entertained. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a disk-shaped sub-screen 472 having a relief-shaped sub-screen decoration member 476 at the center. It is provided at a rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis in the circumferential direction.

  Then, in the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, in a state where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the semi-cylindrical central axis is positioned to extend in the left-right direction, When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangular (rectangular) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is emitted forward from the projector 500 disposed behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75 (a)), and the translucent milky white Through the main screen 471, the effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized. Since the main screen 471 has a smooth semi-cylindrical surface, the effect image has a display screen curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. Thus, while the display screen of a general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. Can be recognized, and the player can be surprised, and the player can be noticed on the main screen 471, and the effect image projected and displayed on the main screen 471 can be enjoyed. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the state of the second position in which the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the center axis of the disk is substantially coincident with the center axis of the operation button 410, and when viewed from the front, the circular operation button 410 It can be seen that the sub-screen decorative member 476 imitating a skull is located at the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when an effect image is emitted forward from projector 500 disposed rearward, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of sub-screen 472. By the way, since a flat and opaque sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 is applied to the portion of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. Is shielded, and the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central portion of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emits light, the light can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the sub-screen 472, and the sub-screen provided at the center of the sub-screen 472 is provided. The screen decoration member 476 can be illuminated. Further, by causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made less visible. The entire side can be brightly decorated with light.

  The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side causes the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative board 477 to emit light with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, and displays an effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When illuminated, the effect image is displayed on the portion of the sub-screen 472 where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is not projected, that is, on the portion outside the sub-screen decorative member 476 made of a skull-like decoration, and the effect image is displayed. Is decorated by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the luminous decoration of the fixed sub-screen decoration member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and a decorative effect completely different from the luminous decoration of the decorative member in the conventional pachinko machine is provided. The sub-screen 472 can be shown to the player, giving a strong impact to the player, and the player can pay attention to the sub-screen 472. Further, in this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with higher brightness) than the brightness of the effected image inside the effected image. Can be displayed, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and to display an effect image that makes the player more enjoyable.

  In the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, the screen facing forward is rotated in an appropriate direction while the effect image is radiated forward from the projector 500, and is changed from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472. When the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are rotating, a part of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 located in the projection range of the projector 500 when the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are rotating. Then, the effect image is projected and displayed. That is, the effect image is displayed so as to straddle the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472. Therefore, when the main screen 471 is slowly changed to the sub-screen 472, a mysterious visual effect in which the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a and the sub-screen decoration member 476 are rotationally moved on the effect image projected from the projector 500. It can be shown to the player and entertained the player.

  As described above, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Accordingly, the player can see the decoration with a movement and a three-dimensional effect, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power can be provided.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate light such as an effect image to the front of the sub-screen decorative board 477 on which the LED 477a is mounted on the front and the front in the rear of the operation button 410 (inside of the button frame 412). A second effect display device 460A on the door frame side having the projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated by the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side.

  Also, the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 of the decoration substrate unit 420, behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a of the operation button 410 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are arranged, and by illuminating the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily illuminated.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated by emitting light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422 b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the second LED 423 b of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416 d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily illuminated. .

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415. By causing the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482 to emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be satisfactorily emitted and decorated.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged inside and behind the operation button 410. The effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub-screen 472, and an effect that the shape of the display screen changes (switches), which is impossible with the conventional pachinko machine, can be presented to the player. , Can give the player a strong impact and entertain.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 78A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 78B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 78 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left part of the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and to the left of the through hole 111 in a front view, and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a light-transmitting member disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and an upper left unit mounted on the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a tubular frame shape, and extending vertically. The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member to the lower front of the left unit decorative lens member. The left unit lower decorative base 535 protruding forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 534, and covering the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535. It includes a transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating front and back on the front surface. As shown, the plurality of openings 531a include a circular hole and a vertically extending rectangular hole. The left unit base 531 is configured such that the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surfaces of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are connected to the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed such that when assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially at the center in the vertical direction. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a in front view corresponding to the circular opening portion 531a in the left unit base 531 and a rectangular shape in front view corresponding to the rectangular opening portion 531a. A lens unit 532b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161 a and 162 a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532 a and the square lens portion 532 b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a front surface and a rear surface formed into a smooth convex lens shape. By the circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed on the rear side can be radiated forward in a dot shape. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

  The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffusion reflection portion 532c that is conically recessed rearward at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 532c at the front surface. The input lens portion 532e bulging rearward in the shape of a curved surface at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e generally increases outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflector 532f that is inclined to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves which are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the groove portion is concavely arcuate backward, and the crest portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. The front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed such that grooves and ridges are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction at radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction.

  The front reflecting portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the input lens portion 532e. These grooves are recessed in a V-shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and a mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward, and is formed in a saw-like shape. The front reflector 532f is formed such that the groove and the ridge move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflector 532f is formed such that grooves and ridges are alternately located in the circumferential direction with respect to radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction. The radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  In the state where the square lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the square lens unit 532b, light emitted from the LEDs 161a and 162a forward is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel forward in parallel, and the input light Almost all can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending forward and backward (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. ), And travels from the center to the outside along the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c travels outward from the center (in a direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected inside the square lens portion 532b from the center side to the outside substantially in parallel with the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection portion 532f, the light is reflected by the front reflection portion 532f. Reflects to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c increases, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction decreases as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 81). Thus, the light reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 532b is sequentially forwardly directed by the front reflection portion 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

  Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflector 532f passes through the front diffuser lens 532d and is emitted forward from the square lens 532b. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b The light can be emitted substantially uniformly from the front surface of the front side (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member).

  The square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing the plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflecting portion 532f, and then forming a plurality of concentric arc grooves on the dividing line. Is shifted in the radial direction so that concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light emitted from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b forward has a shade of concentric striped pattern. Light can be prevented from being emitted, and more uniform light and shade can be emitted forward. Thus, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  The unillustrated left unit decorative lens member is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located at a position in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532, and is located at the front of the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. And a multifaceted decorative part formed at the site. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape having a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends short before and after. The multi-face decoration part has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons formed in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-face decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-face decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. The left decorative lens member has a multi-sided decorative portion that is forwardly moved from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left diffuser lens member 532 by light emitted from the circular lens portion 532a of the left diffuser lens member 532 forward. The light applied to the light-emitting device causes a light-emitting decoration.

  The left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed in a square shape extending in the front-rear direction, with a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is inclined such that a portion constituting a lower surface in the outer periphery projects downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The upper decoration base 534 on the left unit is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side moves from the substantially center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear as it moves upward. The lower unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decoration cover 536 is bent so that the middle part in the up-down direction is depressed rearward, and the lower part is bent rearward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 534; A U-shaped part whose upper part is bent rearward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 is connected to a lower end of the upper U-shaped part and an upper end of the lower U-shaped part. And a linear portion.

  The left and right ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The decorative member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82A is a front view of a door frame right side unit in a door frame, FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 85 is a sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 82 (a). FIG. 86 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 82 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached above the plate unit 320 to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and to the right of the through hole 111 in a front view, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The right side decorative board 552 attached to the door frame and the right side decorative board 552 are attached to the front of the right unit base 551 on the left side of the center in front view and extend in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. Transparent flat right unit left diffusion lens member 553, right unit left diffusion member 554 attached to the left side of right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and right unit left decoration member Transparent flat right unit left camera attached to right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554 Includes a over 555, the.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side in front view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, on the right side of the front view center on the front surface of the right unit base 551, and on the right unit left diffusion lens. A transparent plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. A right unit right decorative member 557 in the form of a sheet, and a transparent flat right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. I have.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction with the front and right sides open. A box-shaped, opaque right unit left light blocking member 559, and a right unit left light blocking lens member 556, which is attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light blocking member 559. And a right unit right light blocking member 560 having a flat plate shape.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decoration lens member 561, the right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561, and the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to a front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door frame relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570 are not shown. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape having a long front-rear extension and a short front-rear extension in the shape of a rectangular tube. Have been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 includes a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center on the front side in the left-right direction, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center on the front side in the left-right direction, and a center mounted on the front side in the left-right direction. And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is for light emitting decoration of the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. In addition, the right LED 552b is for causing the right unit right decorative member 557 to emit and decorate via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for making the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 has both front and rear surfaces formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 includes a flat main body 553a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall 553b projecting from the rear side of the main body 553a to the right in a front view in a short flat shape. A notch 553c, which is cut out in a square shape from the right end side of the rear wall portion 553b to the left from the front and formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body 553a in the front view A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed so as to be able to house the 554, an input lens portion 553e that projects rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a, and a plurality of input lenses 553e are provided in the vertical direction. And a plurality of side reflectors 553f vertically arranged such that the input lens portion 553e is located at the center in the up-down direction.

  The main body 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. As shown in FIG. 86, the main body 553a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move rightward in front view as moving forward from the rear end side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a projects more forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. When assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The accommodation recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, it is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rear surface of a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending rectangle projects rearward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. And a site. These input lens units 553e are located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where the input lens unit 553e is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thus, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 553a.

  The side reflection part 553f is provided with two or more (six) in the up-down direction. Each side reflecting portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, a surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to a surface of the main body portion 553a, and a surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is a main body portion. 553a extends perpendicular to the plane, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the side-surface reflecting portion 553f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves is directed toward the center when cut in a radial direction with the input lens portion 553e as a center. , Are formed in a sawtooth shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction at radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is configured such that light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 forwards into the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens unit 553e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is concavely curved forward, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by the curved surface so as to spread, so that each input lens portion 553e in the main body portion 553a. Will be diffused radially forward with the center as the center.

  The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves rightward as viewed from the front as it goes forward. The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens 553e hits a flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left side of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left side of the main body 553a, and is reflected toward the side reflection section 553f on the inner side of the left side. Becomes

  Then, the light that has entered the main body 553a forward from the input lens portion 553e is reflected to the left as viewed from the front by hitting the saw-shaped side reflector 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, but the right unit left light shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body portion 553a has a white color. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflector 553f in the main body 553a and the light radiated to the right from the side reflector 553f to the left of the right unit left light blocking member 559 are left. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the main body portion 553a is radiated to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be illuminated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflection portion 553f, after the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that light emitted from the left side of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shading. And more uniform light and shade can be radiated to the left. Thus, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodating recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side where the housing concave portion 553d is formed) of the main body 553a in a front view. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 553f and lines extending radially can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit left decorative member 554 can be seen. Can be decorated by the side reflector 553f.

  The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo that is presented to the player on the game board 5 in accordance with the concept of the effect is transparent. Is applied. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat main body 556a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall protruding from the rear side of the main body 556a to the left in a front view in a short flat shape. Part 556b, a notch 556c formed in a rectangular shape to the right from the left end side of the rear wall 556b in a front view and formed at predetermined intervals in a vertical direction, and a right side in a right front view of the main body 556a A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed so as to be able to house the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e that projects rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a plurality of vertically arranged input lens portions 556e, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. On the left side, a plurality of side reflectors 556f are provided in the vertical direction such that each input lens unit 556e is located at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. And the outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same as that of the main unit 553a. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the main body 556a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move leftward in front view from the rear end side toward the front. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall portion 556b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 form a square opening penetrating forward and backward. Is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily illuminated and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The accommodation recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and its outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Accordingly, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be spherically curved from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending rectangle projects rearward and from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. And a site. The input lens portions 556e are located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state where the input lens portions 556e are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thus, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 556a.

  The side reflection part 556f is provided with two or more (six) in the up-down direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves which are divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, a surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to a surface of the main body portion 556e, and a surface farther from the input lens portion 556e is a main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the plane of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in a radial direction with the input lens portion 556e as a center. , Are formed in a sawtooth shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction at radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is configured such that the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main unit 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens unit 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens unit 556e is concavely curved forward, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by the curved surface so as to spread, so that each input lens unit 556e in the main body 556a. Will be diffused radially forward with the center as the center.

  The main body 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the entire body moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits a flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, and is reflected on the inner surface of the right surface toward the side reflection portion 556f. Becomes

  The light that has entered the main body 556a forward from the input lens portion 556e is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-shaped side reflector 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body 556a. It will be irradiated. In addition, although light is also radiated outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a has a white color. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is emitted to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right side of the main body section 556a, the light reflected rightward by the side face reflection section 556f in the main body section 556a and the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 which is radiated leftward from the side face reflection section 556f. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the main body 556a is radiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be illuminated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction at the dividing line to form a concentric arc groove. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body 556a is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shading. Thus, uniform light with more and less light and shade can be irradiated to the right. Accordingly, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodating recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be substantially uniformly illuminated.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed) of the main body 556a in front view. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 556f and lines extending radially can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent part is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflection part 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent part, and the transparent part of the right unit right decorative member 557 can be seen. Can be decorated by the side reflection portion 556f.

  The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker's logo of the pachinko machine 1 and a logo that is presented to the player on the game board 5 in accordance with the concept of production is transparent. Is applied. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right decorative member 557 and the right cover 558 of the right unit are formed substantially symmetrically with the right decorative member 554 and the left cover 555 of the right unit. The decorations applied to the right decorative member 554 and the right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light-blocking member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape in side view as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides opened. The right unit left light blocking member 559 includes a flat main body 559a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall 559b protruding shortly to the right from the rear side of the main body 559a in a front view, and a rear wall 559b. A plurality of cutouts 559c are formed in a rectangular shape from the right end side of the wall portion 559b to the left as viewed from the front and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A plurality of flat reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The body portion 559a of the right unit left light blocking member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upward as the front side is forward. The right diffusion lens member 553 and the right diffusion lens member 556 have substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right diffusion lens member 553 and the right diffusion lens member 556.

  The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right side from the substantially center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of the rear wall portion 559b is in contact with the left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560.

  The plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the up-down direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552. These notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d that are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are vertically separated from each other. The reinforcing portions 559d of each set are respectively formed at positions behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

  The right unit right light blocking member 560 has a shape in side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the vertically extending rectangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light blocking member 560 closes the right opening that is opened to the right of the right unit left light blocking member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state where the right unit right light blocking member 560 is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . Through the space formed between the main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light radiated forward from the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decoration board 552 to the right unit decoration. The light is emitted to the rear side of the lens member 561.

  Further, the right light shielding member 559 and the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit are formed of an opaque member, and are radiated forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 correspond to the corresponding left LED 552a, right LED 552b, and Light emission decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind the respective divided spaces because the internal space is vertically divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 prevents light from interfering with each other between the spaces. , Can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to vertically divide the area into a plurality of (four) areas and to make each of them independently emit light.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and having a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape having a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. The multi-sided decorative portion 561b has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-face decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the three parts from the top, the multi-face decoration parts 561b are arranged one on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged at the center in the vertical direction, and the three parts from the top, the multi-face decoration is provided on the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 disposed at the rear.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape conforming to the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to cover both left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 projects slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a light-impermeable member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes larger than the door frame left side unit 530 in a plate shape, and protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. I have. The door frame right side unit 550 independently includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. To make a luminous decoration.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility in a game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is connected to the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side. An effect such as a partition can be exerted between them. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to a player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 that the player is playing in a private room, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around. Can be.

  In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, even in a game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island facilities may be installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even in a lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are arranged. Accordingly, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the right and left sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are illuminated and decorated, even if they are not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, The pachinko machine 1 can be notified of the presence of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

  Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides. By causing the member 561 and the like to emit light in a unique manner, the staff in the game hall can be immediately notified of the occurrence of the malfunction and can be recognized, and the malfunction can be promptly dealt with. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved at an early stage, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the player being frustrated.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87C is a view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 90 is a sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is mounted above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extend right and left, and the center in the left and right direction projects forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating front and rear at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape having a rear open end, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a. A plurality of (three on each side) slits that extend and penetrate in the front-back direction, respectively, and are vertically separated A unit body 574 having 574b and attached to the front sides of a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572, and a unit body 574 arranged at the front side of a pair of upper speakers 573 so as to close a pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of perforated metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 and has a translucent top decoration member 576, and is attached to the rear side of the top decoration member 576. A door frame top decoration board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a plurality of slits 574b which are mounted on the front surface of the unit body 574 respectively and are closed, and both right and left ends of the top middle decoration member 576. A plurality of (three left and right) light guide members 578 in the form of a transparent flat plate extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit body 574 over the opening 574a, and the top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 574. Top left decorative lens members 579 and 579 respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578 The top right decorative lens member 580 and the front left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front side, and the opening 574a from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top center left decorative member 581 and a top center right decorative member 582 extending to the vicinity of the center side end portion of each of them.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is mounted inside each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 574, and LEDs are respectively mounted on portions of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. Door frame top left decorative board 583 and door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574 b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the unit body 574 on the rear side in the left and right direction. A pair of board bases 585 respectively attached to the parts, and a door which is attached to the front surface of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 574. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, door frame top middle left decorative board 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 574 and the central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 574 to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 574. And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 574.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a square shape in front view extending left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 is attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 is assembled in the door frame top unit 570, and each of the front surfaces is obliquely mounted such that the side near the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570 moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 is a full-range cone-type speaker that can output sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 574 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front such that the lower portions near the left and right ends of a quadrangular shape extending left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed such that the shape of the unit body 574 as viewed from the front is formed by cutting out a rectangle extending left and right with a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower side. The unit body 574 has a rectangular shape extending in the left and right directions and a half of the full width (length in the left and right direction) about the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the square as the base. The shape is formed by combining a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a square that protrudes short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid being a long side. Therefore, the unit main body 574 has a line connecting the left and right ends of the unit main body 574 with the left and right ends of the unit main body 574 on both sides of the front protruding portion at the center in the left and right direction on the front surface. It is located behind (recessed).

  In the unit main body 574, openings 574a penetrating back and forth are formed in portions of the front surface from the left and right ends to positions outside the portions protruding forward, respectively. The unit main body 574 has a plurality of slits extending obliquely to a portion of the front surface that protrudes forward in a trapezoidal shape, extending left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front and rear direction. 574b are formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend right and left from near the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that extends obliquely forward to near the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574, each being vertically separated by three.

  Further, the unit body 574 includes an upper opening 574c which is notched squarely from the rear end toward the front at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d which is notched forward from the rear end to the left and right in the lower surface. , Is provided. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit main body 574 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 574 is formed of an opaque member.

  The middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top middle decorative member 576 has a pentagonal shape in which the shape in a front view is bent so that the center in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape that combines a right-angled triangle connecting the tip of the set side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The in-top decoration member 576 is inclined such that the pentagonal portion on the front surface moves rearward as it goes downward. The top middle decoration member 576 is entirely formed in a three-dimensional shape, and has translucency.

  The door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 is inclined behind the top middle decorative member 576 in such a manner that the front surface is inclined to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the inside decoration substrate 577 of the door frame, and the top decoration member 576 can be illuminated by emitting light from the LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front protruding portion on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight left and right from the end to the center from the end toward the center. 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the center end portion of the straight portion 578a toward the center. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the up-down direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the up-down direction at the circular arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant at the straight portion 578a, and is formed such that the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b decreases toward the center. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 574 from the front. I have.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and having a saw-like concavo-convex shape, a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b and having a plurality of concavities and convexities, It has.

  In a state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends face the LEDs 583 a and 584 a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. While traveling inward toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of the top front decorative lens member 580 in front of the straight portion 578a is illuminated.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Accordingly, a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be illuminated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 is formed by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the whole of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently house the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, irregularities of a quadrangular frustum protruding forward are arranged on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the middle top decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit main body 574. In other words, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side from the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 574. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a for independently accommodating the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a quadrangular frustum protruding forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the middle top decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top frame decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 574 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top center left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center is closer to the top right. The decorative lens member 580 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is mounted inside the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574 e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583 a is mounted facing right. In the door frame top left decorative board 583, LEDs 583a are mounted at positions facing the left end faces of three light guide members 578 mounted on the front surface on the left side of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 90). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. By the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative board 583, the portion located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit main body 574 in the top left decorative lens member 579 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminous decoration.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end faces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 90). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. By the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative board 584, a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 574 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminous decoration.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574 where a plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 has a substantially square side wall having sides extending vertically and forward and backward, a rectangular rear wall extending frontward in the left-right direction at right angles from a rear side of the side wall, and a front end of an upper side of the side wall. An upper wall of a substantially right triangle that connects the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the middle of the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and an outline that connects the lower side of the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall on the opposite side to the upper wall And a lower wall of a right-angled triangle, and is formed in a triangular prism-shaped box shape having an open space between upper and lower oblique sides. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 574 such that an open portion is closed by the unit main body 574. To this board base 585, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or a door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached so that the opened portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 such that a box-shaped open portion is closed from the front in a board base 585 attached to the rear left side of the left and right centers of the unit main body 574. Can be The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front face of the board base 585, so that the front face moves to the left and right so as to move forward toward the center in the left and right direction of the unit body 574. It will be in an inclined state. Thus, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b are formed on the left side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction. And the state becomes substantially parallel.

  A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. Thus, the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is in a state where the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state assembled in the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to cause a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open part from the front in a board base 585 attached to the right rear side of the left and right center of the unit main body 574. Can be The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front face of the board base 585, so that the front face moves to the front side toward the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574, so as to move to the left and right. It will be in an inclined state. Thus, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 are formed. And the state becomes substantially parallel.

  A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state where the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state assembled in the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light at a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 is attached to the rear of the front surface of the unit main body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and the unit main body 574. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a light-impermeable member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 arranged in line with the three slits 574b in the unit main body 574. Partitioning. With this light blocking member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration It is possible to satisfactorily emit and decorate the decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 independently of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 gouge backward. Therefore, it is possible to give an illusion to the player that only the top middle decoration member 576 protrudes forward, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 579 which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed on both left and right ends of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punched metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Since the speaker cover 575 is provided between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically separated from the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, the speaker cover 575 faces forward. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good condition, and a high quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decoration. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be satisfactorily illuminated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire front surface of the upper portion of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through-hole 111 penetrating the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 in the front and rear direction is made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the player (front) as widely as possible through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponding to the game board 5 having a large game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 is a rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward below the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the part lower than the upper plate 321) on both left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 (the front surface of the lower plate front decorative portion 326c) is recessed so as to go backwards (the plate unit). The right and left front ends of the rendering operation unit 400 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400 are formed in a concavely curved shape such that the front surfaces on both left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are located rearward. ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the effect operation unit 400 is highlighted to the player. Thus, the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly noticed.

  The door frame 3 inclines the effect operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the plate unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. When the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is turned to the head (face) of the player, and the player drops his / her gaze to activate the staging operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation buttons 410 can be seen almost in front, so that the large and round operation buttons 410 can be intensely visually recognized, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation buttons 410 can be increased. In addition, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward and round, when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand is moved by a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the operation button 410 can be “rapidly pressed” relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward and is round, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, as well as left or right. , Or from the front, and the operation using the operation buttons 410 can be more enjoyed by the operation buttons 410 with good operability.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has the effect operation unit 400 attached by the plate unit 320 in a suspended state, and has a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at a lower portion of the effect operation unit 400. When the vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the hand of the player touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the operation button is surprised by the player. The effect using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The lower plate 322 below the lower palate becomes less noticeable, which makes it easier for a player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that the pachinko machine is clearly different, and appeals to the player's interest. The pachinko machine 1 having high power can be obtained.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the lower part of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326 d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently ensured. Further, since the rear of the lower plate 322 is wrapped around the rear side of the staging operation unit 400, when the player puts his / her left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his left hand on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. In contrast, the fact that the volume of the lower plate 322 is large can be recognized by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c through which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and a lower plate for removing the game balls of the lower plate 322 to a dollar box below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly forward and backward, and is disposed on the right outside of the lower plate opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400) when viewed from the front. In other words, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are connected to the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326 (right outside of the lower tray opening 326d), and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. Since it is arranged on the rear side, the lower counter ball supply port 323c and the lower counter ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (sling machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower dish hole 322a disposed below (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish 322, the lower dish hole 322a is opened. Then, the game balls released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the dollar box through the lower plate 322 is also reduced. I can't see it. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to the player that the game balls on the upper plate 321 or the game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 830 with the upper plate 321 being full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Since it is possible, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation of hitting the game ball and the effect image), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  In the lower frame 322, the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate hole 322a at a position on the front left side of the lower plate supply port 323c, and the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate hole 322a. Since the raised wall is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball hole 322a, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are directly transferred to the lower dish ball. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. Thus, in a state in which the lower bowl extracting hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower bowl 322 from the lower bowl supplying port 323c is located on the left side of the lower bowl extracting hole 322a in the lower bowl 322. The lower plate 322 can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball hole 322a without entering the (lower plate first area A1), so that the game balls flowing through the lower plate 322 are not shown to the player. The game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not obstructed by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be favorably output to the front, and the sound from the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Also, when the player puts his hand on or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can make the player feel tactilely the vibration caused by the heavy bass from the speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker opening 326e. It is possible to entertain the people and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 which is a plate-like and largely protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island facility in a game hall, the door is opened. Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the present pachinko machine 1 can play in the private room. It is possible to give an illusion that the player is playing, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without having to worry about other players around.

  Further, since the door frame 3 can decorate the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, a gaming hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side. The pachinko machine 1 can notify the presence of the pachinko machine 1 even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 or from a distance such as from the side along the island facilities, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes, in the door frame top unit 570 above the through-hole 111, a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left and right front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576, The shape of the door frame top unit 570 at the top middle decorative member is smaller than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the left and right front ends of the top middle decorative member 576. 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape such that the front surfaces on both left and right sides are located rearward. This allows only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to appear to protrude significantly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be emphasized and emphasized to the player. The interior decoration member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers which are separated to the left and right are provided above a door frame in a conventional pachinko machine, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of perforated metal at both left and right ends in a door frame top unit 570 attached above the through hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extend from the left and right sides of the center top middle decorative member 576 to both left and right sides through the front of the speaker cover 575, and The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 is not conspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, so that the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that the player is present, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal to the player can be provided, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can provide the player with high-quality stereo sound. it can.

  As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, on the lower side and the upper side from the through-hole 111, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed. , Each of which protrudes greatly forward in the center in the left-right direction, so that the player can see the decoration with a sense of unity above and below the virtual line passing through the center in the left-right direction, and with sophisticated decoration The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

  In addition, the door frame 3 projects the front middle decoration member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically at the center in the left-right direction, so that the top middle decoration member 576 is formed. And when the effect operation unit 400 is illuminated and decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically in the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. As shown, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to an island facility of a game hall on the upper and lower sides of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and that can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. The upper hinge member 60 and the lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 are attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view so as to be rotatable, respectively. The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are rotatably mounted, respectively, and the reinforcing frame 660 mounted to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in a front view are provided. .

  The body frame 4 is attached to a lower part of the front surface of the body frame base 600 and is used to launch a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; And a locking unit 700 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out game balls to the cage player side, a board unit 900 attached to a lower rear portion of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view shape extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game A game board placement portion 602 which forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and a left and right end of the lower end of the game board 5 which protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement portion 602. And a game board regulating unit 603 for regulating backward movement.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 includes a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting the ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side in front view of the game board mounting portion 602, and a right side of the launching device mounting portion 604 in front view. A cylinder insertion opening 605 that penetrates back and forth and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a front and rear lower left side from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front, and the door of the board unit 900 A connection opening 606 that allows the frame relay board 911 to face forward, and a circular opening that penetrates back and forth at the lower left side in front view of the game board placement section 602 and allows the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 to face forward. And a speaker opening 607.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 in a front view, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is rotatable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided for attachment. Further, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed near the upper and lower ends at the left end of the rear surface when viewed from the front, and is an upper hinge mounting for mounting the main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. A portion 609 and a lower hinge attachment portion 610 are provided.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is rotatably mounted at an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be able to open and close, and at a position slightly below and to the left of the center of the game board placement unit 602 in the front-right direction. And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 601.

[4-2. Upper hinge member on body frame side and lower hinge member on body frame side]
The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 and the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the body frame base 600.

  The main frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L-shape, and a columnar protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The upper hinge member 622 pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge main body 621 penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side in the front view of the upper hinge pin 622 to pivotally support the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side. Hinge hole 623 for a door frame for use. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 has a portion of the upper hinge body 621 bent downward, which is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame base 600.

  The main frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L-shape. A lower hinge hole (not shown) for the outer frame that is pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and a horizontally extending flat plate that is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641. Hinge second main body 643 in which the rear part of the plate-like plate material is bent upward in an L-shape, and a lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame 3 that penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a door frame hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting the door frame, and extending upward from the left end behind the door frame hinge hole 644 in a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643, and the door frame 3 A restricting piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of .

  The lower hinge second main body 643 has a horizontally-extended portion with a predetermined interval above the horizontally-extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641, and a portion bent upward has a lower hinge first portion. The body 641 is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward. In the main frame side lower hinge member 640, a portion bent upward of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 is attached to the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcement frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross section in a plan view with a right side opened, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. In addition, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. A pair of left positioning members 661 are mounted vertically separated from each other.

  The reinforcing frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600, and also into the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Illegal insertion of a tool can be prevented.

[4-4. Ball launching device]
The ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93, and 94. The ball firing device 680 is a device for driving game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball firing device 680, the hitting strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the flat launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the rear surface of the launching base 681 on the right side when viewed from the front. A launch solenoid 682 made of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a hitting hammer 683 having a base end attached to the rotation axis of the firing solenoid 682, and extending obliquely upward and left from near the tip of the hitting hammer 683. And a launch rail 684 on which a game ball can be rolled.

  In this ball launching device 680, game balls are supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the firing rail 684, and the game balls are supplied to the upper right end of the firing rail 684. When the handle 302 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting hammer 683. The game ball hit by the ball hammer 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 684, and is hit into the game area 5a.

  If the hit ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the hit of the game ball or the like, the distance between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). , Falls into the foul ball receiving port 275 of the foul cover unit 270 below, and is discharged to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the body frame base 600 of the body frame 4 and can lock between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 attached to the right side of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 700 protruding forward from the unit base 701 and locking with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of being locked to the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower portion of the unit base 701 in a cylindrical shape, A protrusion protrudes from the front end in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmitting member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3. A key cylinder 710 for unlocking either the hook 702 for the frame or the hook 703 for the outer frame.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the payout unit viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 99 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in FIG. FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the movable ball removing piece in the payout device, and FIG. 105 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the movable ball removing piece. It is.

  FIG. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 106 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full ball path unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. is there. Further, FIG. 108 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit as exploded from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full ball path unit as exploded from the rear. Further, FIG. 111 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank route unit, and FIG. 111 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. . FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of gaming balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIG. 95 and FIG. 96, the payout unit 800 of this embodiment is attached to the reverse L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801. A ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape extending left and right and opened upward and attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 in the left direction when viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two front and rear rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) that is swingably suspended from above.

  The payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front. A payout device 830 which is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board 951 accommodated in a payout control board box 950. And Game balls are distributed in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the payout devices 830 pay out game balls one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward, and plays the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. Guide path 861 that guides the game balls forward to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end, and guides the game balls discharged from the full tank discharge port 850 e forward to the front frame of the door frame 3 from the front end. The full guide path 862 that guides to the full tank receiving port 274, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 are connected to the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side opened, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side opened, and a front case 822. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and that separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822 from each other. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 mounted thereon, and a pair of movable piece members front 825 and rear piece which are rotatably mounted by the shaft member 824 and are disposed in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. 826, and a ball-out detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational positions of the pair of movable piece members 825 and 826. To have.

  The front case 821 has a ball guiding entrance 821a which is open at the upper part of the right side thereof so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guiding exit which is open at a position closer to the right side than the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. 821b, and a guiding path 821c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 821a and the ball guiding outlet 821b and through which game balls can flow. The guide passage 821c extends from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end thereof at an obliquely lower angle with respect to the horizontal at a small angle, and at the center of the height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introducer 821d. The detection unit 821e includes a detection unit 821e that extends straight down to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 821f that extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 821e to the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 has a cutout portion 821g on the right wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c when viewed from the front.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guiding entrance 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side thereof so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a ball guidance exit that opens at a position closer to the right side than the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. 822b, and a guiding path 822c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 822a and the ball guiding outlet 822b and through which game balls can flow. The guiding passage 822c extends obliquely from the ball guiding entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end so as to be lower at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and the center of the height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introducing portion 822d. The detection unit 822e includes a detection unit 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f that extends from the detection unit 822e in the width of the left and right sides of the rear case 822 in a meandering manner. In addition, the rear case 822 includes a cutout portion 822g on the right wall of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c when viewed from the front.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. I have.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a vertically movable flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and through which a shaft member 824 is inserted, and a movable piece 825a. An extension 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a. The extension 825c and the movable piece 825a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through hole penetrating forward and backward; A detection piece 825f which extends outward from the right end and which can be detected by the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position close to the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 passes through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attachment portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the cutout portion 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a projects into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is The state is brought into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c (detection unit 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts on the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is prevented from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 821c (leftward in front view). In addition, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in a direction (to the right in a front view) in which the lower end of the movable piece 825a approaches the wall of the guide path 821c, the left surface of the movable piece 825a Coincide with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f at the front of the movable piece member 825 is in a state of not detecting with respect to the ball out detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball-out detection sensor 827 does not detect.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a vertically movable plate-like movable piece 826a, a shaft hole 826b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a, and through which a shaft member 824 is inserted, and a movable piece 826a. An extension 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other, and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight mounting portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and has a through hole penetrating forward and backward, and A detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end and that can be detected by the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and a flat extension that extends outward from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attachment portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the cutout portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a projects into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c (detection unit 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts on the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is prevented from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in a direction (to the right in front view) so that the lower end of the movable piece 826a approaches the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a Coincide with the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f behind the movable piece member 826 is in a state of not detecting with respect to the ball cutout detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball-out detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls being arranged in a row in front and rear by a tank rail 803, and a plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. 822 allows the user to be guided back and forth in two rows to the lower payout device 830 (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and can flow well. Can be.

  Also, when the game balls flow through the guide paths 821c and 822c of the ball guiding unit 820, the game balls come into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a at the front 825 of the movable piece member and at the rear 826 of the movable piece member, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The movable member front 825 and the movable member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f at the front of the movable piece member 825 and at the rear of the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball cutout detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that a game ball is present in the guide paths 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 820 pays out the game balls, the game balls in the guide paths 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game balls flow in the guidance passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game balls flowing in the introduction portions 821d and 822d increases, and the game balls flowing in the introduction portions 821d and 822d are movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It rebounds to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game ball, the vibration causes the movable pieces 825a and 826a to be caught or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide paths 821c and 822c. Scratched dust and dirt can be removed, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight and the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing through the respective guiding passages 821c and 822c by using separate movable piece members 825 and 826, respectively. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member rear 826 is detected by one ball cutout detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide paths 821c and 822c, the movable piece member front. The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece 825 or the rear of the movable piece 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guide paths 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the ball out detection sensor 827. You. Therefore, since the running out of the game ball can be detected at an early stage, the game ball can be quickly replenished, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, by screwing metal screws as weights into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the front movable member 825 and the rear movable member 826, the weight of the front movable member 825, the movable member rear 826, and the weight of the weight. Accordingly, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction in which they project into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably mounted outside the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. No dust or dust adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even when the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. By doing so, it is possible to rotate satisfactorily, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment includes the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the front and rear movable pieces 825 and 826 whose lower ends protrude into the guide paths 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow by their own weight. By attaching weights made of metal screws to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface in contact with the game ball, the weight of the movable piece can be determined by the weight of the weight of the weight before the movable piece member 825 and after the movable piece member 826. The lower ends of 825a and 826a can be easily turned (projected) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably mounted outside the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. No dust or dust adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even when the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls. Thus, the movable pieces 825a and 826a (the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes, and the front of the movable piece member 825 and the rear of the movable piece member 826 frequently rotate, the weight remains. The front 825 and the rear 826 of the movable member can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the front 825 of the movable member and the rear 826 of the movable member (weight attachment portions 825e, 826e). . Further, the weight can be easily attached to the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, thereby simplifying the trouble of attaching the weight. Thus, the cost of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, since the guide portions 821d and 822d are provided upstream of the portions where the movable pieces 825a and 826a protrude in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding game balls toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided. Since the game balls flow through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game balls contact the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, by vibrating the movable pieces 825a and 826a, it is possible to remove dust, dirt, and the like that have been caught or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front part 825 and the rear part 826 of the movable part can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be favorably rotated, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem due to erroneous detection or the like. Even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide balls 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that promptness can be obtained. Can be replenished with game balls, and by reducing the time during which the game is interrupted as short as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The payout device 830 has a box shape with an open rear side, a payout opening 831a that is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass, and a game ball that opens near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. Payout exit 831b, a ball extraction outlet 831c that is open near the right end of the bottom surface in front view so that game balls can pass therethrough, and a payout passage 831d that connects the payout entrance 831a and the payout exit 831b and through which game balls can flow. And a front box 831 that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball extraction outlet 831c and has a ball extraction passage 831e through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A payout opening 832a, which has a box shape with an open front side, and is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface so that game balls can pass therethrough. The dispensing outlet 832b is opened to be able to pass, the ball extracting outlet 832c is opened near the right end of the bottom surface in front view so that the game ball can pass, and the dispensing inlet 832a communicates with the dispensing outlet 832b so that the game ball is distributed. It includes a possible payout passage 832d, and a rear box 832 that has a ball free passage 832e that branches off from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 832c, and through which game balls can flow.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and is a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open, and is attached to the inside of the front box 831 so that the rotating shaft passes through the front box 831. The dispensing motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, a driving gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 834, meshes with the driving gear 835, and can be rotated by the front box 831 and the front cover 833. , A driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 penetrating rotatably, and a front end attached to the front cover 833 and A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 838 penetrating the shaft member 838, which is rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832. A dispensing blade 839 that is disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the discharging blade 839. And

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and has a flat partition plate 841 for separating the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832; And a rear box 832, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, payout passages 831d and 832d, and a ball emptying passage. 831e and 832e are diverged from each other and are rotatably mounted by a front box 831 and a rear box 832, and can be used to close the ball passages 831e and 832e. A ball release lever 844 slidably mounted vertically slidably on the upper right side of the box 832 to make the ball release movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout entrance 831a to the ball ejection outlet 831c, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. Bends to extend vertically to the left, near the center of the total height, to the left to extend substantially horizontally, and then extends vertically downward about 1/3 from the left end to the left and right width of the front box 831 again It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located just above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. The dispensing blade 839 is disposed at a portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball emptying passage 831e is a form in which a portion extending obliquely downward and to the right from the payout entrance 831a in the payout passage 831d is further extended. It diverges to the height near the center.

  In addition, the front box 831 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout exit 831b in the payout passage 831d, and protruding rearward as it goes downward, and is formed at an upper portion on the right side in front view. And a lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball ejection outlet 832c, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. Bends to extend vertically to the left, near the center of the total height, to extend almost horizontally to the left, and then extends vertically downward about 1/3 from the left end to the left and right width of the rear box 832 again. Thus, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the rear box 832, and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 832b. The dispensing blade 839 is disposed at a portion of the dispensing passage 832d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball emptying passage 832e is a form in which the portion extending obliquely downward and to the right from the payout entrance 832a in the payout passage 832d is further extended from the height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the total height of the rear box 832. It diverges to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d, and is formed at an upper portion of a guide shelf 832f protruding forward as it goes downward, and on the right side in front view. And a lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball pullout lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The pay-out passages 831d, 832d and the ball empty passages 831e, 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blades 839 are arranged. Further, between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached. In other words, the game balls flowing through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls flowing through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are separated from the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought near the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angle of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction from a spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detecting pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c projecting rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and having irregularities formed on a peripheral surface at a rear end thereof and connectable to the dispensing blade 839 are provided. .

  The dispensing blade 839 extends cylindrically forward and backward, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals in a circumferential direction from a front end of the base cylinder 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted. A plurality (three) of front blades 839b and a plurality of front blades 839b projecting from the rear end of the base cylinder portion 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be alternated. 3) A rear blade 839c and a connected portion that projects cylindrically forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a and has irregularities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 at the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  The front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the dispensing blade 839 are provided three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c is rotated relative to the front blade 839b so as to be staggered. It extends outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc depressed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  Also, the three front blades 839b and the rear blade 839c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 of the outer periphery of the base cylinder portion 839a about the axis thereof is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. The diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder 839a up to the part closest to the axis of the base cylinder 839a in the arcuate region (sphere housing 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is four times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 to 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball by the arc portion (ball accommodation portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be promptly accommodated between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c) (the ball accommodating portion 839e).

  In the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, with the dispensing device 830 assembled, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out respectively. In addition, the discharge blade 839 is disposed at a position below the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 in the discharge passages 831d and 832d, and is bent in a crank shape. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 839 is located immediately below a portion that extends vertically downward from near the center of the entire height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Then, in the portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d that are bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is set to 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most concave portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  Accordingly, when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 comes into contact with the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c, the payout device 830 passes through the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d. , And is not discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839, can pass through the crank-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d, 832d, and can pass through the payout outlets 831b, 832b. Released downward.

  Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to be about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer diameter of the game ball is set to 1 by the ball accommodating portion 839e. Since a depth of / 7 to ４ is accommodated, the time required for accommodating game balls can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated quickly, the game balls can be stored in the ball storage portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the related art, and the time required for paying out game balls can be reduced.

  The ball-moving movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape up and down and back and forth, and has a body portion 843a whose lower portion is bent to form a letter shape when viewed from the front, and a tubular shape that extends back and forth at the upper end of the body portion 843a. A shaft tube portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer side surface of the main body portion 843a bent, and a main body portion 843a. And a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 105) formed of a through hole penetrating back and forth at a lower portion bent in a V-shape.

  When the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball removing movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower part of the main body 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is rotatable at a position extending obliquely to the lower right in front view from the payout entrances 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side in front view slightly higher than the portion bent downward. Mounted on

  The payout device 830 of the present embodiment has a state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward in a normal state, and the lower part of the ball-pulling lever 844 is brought into contact with the projecting portion 843c of the ball-pulling movable piece 843 from the right in front view. In contact. This restricts the ball-moving movable piece 843 from rotating counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 105 (a)).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a of the ball-moving movable piece 843 that is bent in a rectangular shape, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is obliquely lower left in front view. Extending to The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located near a portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball emptying passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball removing movable pieces 843 (the main body portion 843a) close the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a partial wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. are doing.

  The ball-moving movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball-moving movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the shaft cylinder portion 843b. Although a force for rotating the anti-clockwise rotation in a front view is exerted by this, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction is regulated by the ball release lever 844, so that the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball pulling lever 844 separates from the protrusion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise in front view. Restrictions on movement are lifted. Accordingly, the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located immediately below the shaft cylinder portion 843b. Note that the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the right side surface of the lower part of the main body 843a contacts the left surfaces of the members forming the right sides of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 105 (b)). As a result, the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e to be discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball-moving movable piece 843 is provided with the weight mounting portion 843d, a weight made of a metal screw is screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d to mount the ball-moving lever 844 upward. Then, when the regulation of the counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball-moving movable piece 843 projects into the ball-drawing passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball-moving movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be easily rotated in the direction (counterclockwise in front view).

  In a normal state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball-pulling passages 831e and 832e, game balls entering from the payout ports 831a and 832a are transferred to the main body 843a of the ball-pulling movable piece 843. Since the contact is made with the game ball, the ball-moving movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact with the game ball. Therefore, dust, dust, and the like that are caught or intruded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball-moving movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate due to biting, dust, or the like.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d formed as a through hole, the weight can be moved even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The ball-moving movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without being detached from the (weight attachment portion 843d). Further, the weight can be easily attached to the ball-moving movable piece 843 only by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d. Can be reduced.

  If the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removing movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843, or the rotating shaft rusts, and the ball removing movable piece 843 rusts. The movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game balls entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the movable ball removing piece 843, the ball removing passage 831e is formed by the movable ball removing piece 843. , 832e are closed, and when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 843. The ball removing movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removing lever 844 is operated to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, the ball removing movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball can be reliably removed. In addition, workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Top full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to a position below the payout device 830 in the payout unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851 whose rear side is open, and is mounted on the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and its front side is open. The dispenser includes a box-shaped upper full cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward.

  In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving opening 850a that is open upward to allow a game ball to pass therethrough at a position on the left side from the left and right center in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the left and right center in the front view on the upper surface. Is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper ball storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which game balls flow, a normal discharge port 850d that opens downward at a lower portion of the upper ball storage passage 850c directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a, and an upper ball storage A full tank discharge port 850e that opens downward at a position other than the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d, and a full tank discharge port 850e. And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  In addition, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball emptying path 850g that guides game balls entering from the upper ball emptying entrance 850b downward, and an upper part that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball emptying path 850g. And a ball ejection outlet 850h. In the upper full tank path unit 850, a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball ejection outlet 850h are sequentially opened from the left side in a front view and downward. The upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover attaching portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

  When the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830 and the upper ball emptying inlet 850b. Are located immediately below the ball ejection outlets 831c and 832c of the dispensing device 830. In addition, when the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball emptying outlet 850h are connected to the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit 860. 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball-free guide path 865, each of which opens directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 113).

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving opening 850a is opened directly below the upper payout ball receiving opening 850a. From the normal discharge port 850d.

  When the inside of the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot be stored, and when the inside of the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is in a closed state. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition piece 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the partition piece 850f and become full. It will be discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860.

  In this manner, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically transfers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 in accordance with the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 322.

[4-6d. Bottom full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the upper full tank path unit 850. The lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward, and guides the game ball from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 by the normal guide path 861. And a full tank guide path 862 for guiding the game balls released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and guiding the game balls from the front end to the full tank receiver 274 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 by changing the guideway open / close door 863 to And a closing spring 864 that urges the front end opening in a direction to close the opening.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the upper ball emptying outlet 850h of the upper full tank path unit 850 to the front, and from the center right end in the front-rear direction on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. And a lower ball-free guideway 865 for discharging air to the sphere.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860, a normal taxiway 861, a full tank taxiway 862, and a lower ball empty taxiway 865 are arranged in order from left to right in front view. The normal guideway 861, the full tank guideway 862, and the lower ball empty guideway 865 have their rear ends opened upward. Further, the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right, and extend forward to near the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lower. Further, the full tank taxiway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal taxiway 861. The normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball empty guide path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be vertically divided as shown in the figure.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to the front end of the lower case 867 at a position between the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862. Being energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860, a full tank guide path 862 opening to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view is one game with respect to the normal guide path 861. It is arranged at a position lower by the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and on the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 includes a disc-shaped base 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely to the upper left from the base 863a and that can close the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending in a flat plate shape to the right from the base portion 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862, and an extension portion 863d extending in a plate shape diagonally to the lower left from the base portion 863a. , An operating projection 863e projecting forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extension 863d and capable of abutting against the door opening / closing abutting portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 does not require the openings to be closed, but means that the game balls cannot pass through. The operation projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base 863a when viewed from the front, and is inclined so that the front end face projects forward as approaching the end side in the counterclockwise direction. are doing.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 864 so that the second door plate portion 863c is located at the front end of the lower case 867 from below the front end opening of the full guideway 862. By contacting the boss 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment has a front end formed with a through-ball passage 273, a full tank receiving port 274, and a door opening / closing port in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 112). When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guideway opening / closing door 863 does not abut on the operation protrusion 863 e. As a result, it is rotated clockwise in a front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 111). (A)). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal taxiway 861 and the full-filled taxiway The game ball does not spill from the road 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863, and the operation is started. Due to the inclination of the front end face of the projection 863e, a force acts on the guideway opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction in front view against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c, which have closed the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862, rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal taxiway 861 And, the front end opening of the full tank guiding path 862 is opened (see FIG. 111 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 and the second door plate 863c is located above the front end opening of the full guideway 862. .

  In the state where the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4 and the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank are full. In front of the front end opening of the taxiway 862, the penetrating sphere passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full ball receiving port 274 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different from each other in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are rotated by rotating the taxiway opening / closing door 863. Since the doors are opened and closed, the operating range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 can be reduced in size. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be more effectively utilized.

  The payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 321, and more payout devices 830 from the payout device 830. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal taxiway 861 is full of game balls, the game balls are normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When it remains above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it flows to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, Payout of the game ball to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270 is automatically switched. After that, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 in addition to the upper plate 321 becomes full of the game balls and cannot supply the game balls to the lower plate 322, the foul cover unit 270 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 277 of. Then, when the movable piece 278 rotates and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 by storing the game balls in the storage passage 277, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are filled with the game balls. Is notified, and the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is released.

  The stopping of the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is performed by, for example, storing the game balls until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. In this state, the number that can fill the storage path 277 on the upstream side, the full guide path 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, and the upper sphere storage path 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850 can be filled. When the game balls are paid out, the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in the conventional pachinko machine, and in a game state where many game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are dispensed by paying out the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on big hit games and entertain them.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and a speaker for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in a front view. A speaker unit 920 having a power supply board 921, a power supply board box 930 which is mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side when viewed from the front, and in which a power supply board is accommodated; An interface control board box 940 accommodating an interface control board therein, and a payout control board 951 mounted on the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of game balls are accommodated therein. And a dispensing control board box 950. .

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510, and the door main body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is for. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall structure of gaming board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board with the panel plate of the game panel in an opaque state. 115 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 114 as viewed from the front right, FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 114 as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 117 is a view of the game board from behind. It is a perspective view. FIG. 118 is a sectional view taken along line RR in FIG. 114, and FIG. 119 is a sectional view taken along line SS in FIG. Further, FIG. 120 is a front view in which the front unit of the game board is cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area. FIG. 121 is a front view of a game board in which a panel plate of the game panel is in a transparent state. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is provided with a front component 1000 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a and whose outer shape is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 so that the rear end of the game area 5a is formed. A plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to a lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, which is driven by driving game balls into the gaming area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails, which are in contact with the game balls, are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion located in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front surface of the game panel 1100 And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the back surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than an inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 includes a plurality of general prize openings 2001 that are always open to accept game balls hit into the game area 5a, and a plurality of general prize openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first opening 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate 2003 mounted at a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting the passage of a game ball, and a game ball passing through the gate 2003 The second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with the result of the ordinary lottery selected by the lottery, and the first special lottered by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A first large winning opening 2005 and a second large winning opening 2006 are provided, in which a game ball can be received in accordance with either a lottery result or a second special lottery result.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted just above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002, and a left front view of the starting port unit 2100. Side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has a plurality (three in this case) of general winning openings 2001, and a side slope which is attached above the left end of the side unit 2200 in a front view. 2300 and one general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a first big winning opening, which are mounted on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the playing area 5a when viewed from the front. 2005, an attacker unit 2400 having a second winning opening 2006, a starter unit 2100 and a side unit. In above the bets 2200, and a frame-shaped center won game 2500 is attached to the front view substantially central slightly above closer in the game area 5a, a.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600, an effect drive substrate 3031 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a, and an effect drive substrate on the rear surface of the back box 3010. A panel relay board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view of the back panel 3032, a lower left relay board 3033 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3032 in the back view, and a production drive board on the rear side of the back box 3010. And a lower right relay board 3034 attached to the left side of the rear view 3031.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back front decoration unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 on the left side and the bottom side in front view, and a back attached around the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The middle movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300 and the back right movable production unit 3400 attached respectively to the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 It has a rear-side movable effect unit 3500 attached thereto, and a lower-back movable effect unit 3700 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of the front component and the game panel of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 124 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction in front view and extending clockwise in the circumferential direction in front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the area 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  The front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000 and having an upper part curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail And an impact portion 1006 that connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and that a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow preventing member which is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only in the open position where it is turned around and opened between the outer rail 1001 and returned to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 of the door frame 3 is formed in the security recess 1008. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to penetrate into the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 202 and the security recess 1008 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  Although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning projections projecting rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning projections into inner rail fixing holes formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed on the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses protruding rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4, the lower full tank path passes through the notches 1011 and 1127. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as a glass or a metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even when an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has been. In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate back and forth, and to attach the front unit 2000.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of fitting holes formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the panel plate 1110 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower left outer periphery and penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends vertically. An elongated hole that extends. These fitting holes and long holes are arranged outside the game area 5a, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a stepped engagement step with a concave front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engaging steps are cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel board 1110, and are disposed outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes and the long holes. For engagement with the panel holder 1120.

  Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of inner rail fixing holes at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection (not shown) projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in this example) than the panel plate 1110. Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side (not shown). And a through-hole 1122 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  The holding step portion of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface substantially equal to the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion is substantially the same as the front surface of the panel holder 1120. Become the same plane. Further, the holding step portion has a front inner peripheral surface formed to have a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of panel panel 1110. This clearance allows the expansion and contraction of the panel plate 1110 to be absorbed even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to a change in temperature or a change with time.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole and the long hole formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step, and is disposed forward from the front of the holding step. A plurality of protruding pins that extend toward the fitting hole and can be inserted into fitting holes and long holes of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins into the fitting holes and the long holes of panel panel 1110, panel holder 1120 and panel plate 1110 can be positioned with respect to each other.

  Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes an engagement claw and an engagement piece that engage with the engagement step at a position corresponding to the engagement step of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw is arranged above the holding step of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step of the panel plate 1110, and projects forward from the front surface of the holding step. It is adapted to elastically engage with the engaging step. The size of the engaging claw does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engagement piece of the panel holder 1120 is disposed below the holding step of the panel holder 1120, and corresponds to the lower engagement step of the panel plate 1110. This engaging piece is formed along the front surface of the panel holder upward (center side) along a front surface of the panel holder in a state where a gap large enough to allow the engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engaging piece and the front surface of the holding step portion. It extends for a predetermined amount. The panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120 by engaging the engagement step of the panel plate 1110 with these engagement claws and engagement pieces.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 includes an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. The lower side of the rear surface of the out opening 1126 of the panel holder 1120 has the same width as the out opening 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 has a notch 1127 cut out upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1127 coincides with the notch 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1127 penetrates these notches 1011 and 1127 to form the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full tank taxiway 862 face forward.

  Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of front and rear mounting holes at positions corresponding to a plurality of mounting bosses (not shown) of the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss of the front component 1000 into these mounting holes, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 ( The gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 includes a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted into the insertion hole 1129.

  When the game panel 1100 is mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thus, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding section 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper part and the front part opened, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below, when assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged part 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 118) for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And

  The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. Must be performed, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the improper act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, the main control board 1310 is provided with a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a first starting port sensor 3112, a second starting port sensor 4004, a magnetic detection sensor 4024, and a first big winning port sensor via a panel relay board 3032. 4005, second winning port sensor 2402, first receiving port sensor 2434, second receiving port sensor 2435, general winning port sensor 3111, gate sensor 2401, starting port solenoid 2107, first attacker solenoid 2108, second attacker solenoid 2109. , And a distribution solenoid 2110.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 114 and the like. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 181). The function display unit 1400 displays a game state (game state), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator 1401 composed of one LED for displaying a game state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result selected by passing a game ball to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold display 1408 made up of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003, and a first lottery selected by receiving the game ball into the first starting port 2002. A first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying one special lottery result and a first special reserve number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves for accepting game balls to the first starting port 2002. A device 1404 comprising eight LEDs for displaying a result of a second special lottery selected by accepting a game ball into the second starting port 2004. A special symbol display 1405, a second special reserve number display 1406 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of game balls to the second starting port 2004, a first special lottery result or a second special lottery When the result is "big hit" or the like, a round indicator 1407 including three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 is mainly provided. ing.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 118) that controls an effect presented to a player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 400, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the game board effect display device 1600, the effect drive board 3031, and the like.

[5-7. Game board effect display device]
Next, the game board effect display device 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. In the state where the game board 5 is assembled, the game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500. The game board effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The game board side effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side face in front view, and right fixing pieces 1602 protruding outward from the right side face in front view. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves which are opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the back box 3010 into the back box 3010c, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. The front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end passes through the opening 1112. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 according to the present embodiment is configured such that a plurality of general prize holes 2001 which can receive game balls hit into the game area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general prize ports 2001 are in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open so as to receive a game ball at a different position, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing through the section 2003, and a lottery performed by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. A first special winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening 2006 that allow game balls to be accepted in either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  A plurality of (four in this example) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is arranged below the center in the vertical direction near the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate unit 2003. The first special winning opening 2005 is located on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction and at a height between the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002. The second winning opening 2006 is arranged between the second starting opening 2004 and the first winning opening 2005.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a sub-out port 2007 for discharging a game ball from the inside of the game area 5a between the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted just above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a first starting port 2002 and a starting port unit 2100 having a first starting port 2002. Side unit 2200 which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, a side slope 2300 which is mounted above the left end of the side unit 2200 in a front view, and a start-up opening unit An attacker unit 2400 attached to the right side of the front view of the 2100 and having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first winning opening 2005, and a second winning opening 2006. And a frame-shaped center role 2500 attached at a substantially center in the game area 5a.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 (a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit, side unit, side slope, and attacker unit in the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 (b) is a perspective view of (a) as viewed from the back. is there. The starting port unit 2100 is disposed just above the out port 1126 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In the starting port unit 2100, at the top, the first starting port 2002 is always open upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time.

  The starting port unit 2100 is formed with a first starting port 2002 and has a light-transmitting unit main body 2101 attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit main body 2101. And a startup port decoration board 2102 (see FIG. 120) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. The starting port unit 2100 can make the lower side of the first starting port 2002 emit light by lighting the LED of the starting port decoration board 2102.

  The start-up opening unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, so that the first start-up opening 2002 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first start-up opening 2002 will be described later. It is located immediately below the chance exit 2536 on the stage 2530 of the center role 2500. Therefore, when a game ball is released downward from the chance exit 2536 of the stage 2530, it is accepted at the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. The starting port unit 2100 can guide the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the central delivery port 3135 of the back decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 described later. it can.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001 that are always open upward.

  The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 arranged side by side on the left and right, and is provided so that the three general winning openings 2001 become higher toward the left as viewed from the front.

  By attaching the side unit 2200 to the panel plate 1110, the three general winning openings 2001 project forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and are positioned below the first starting opening 2002 and start. It will be in the state arrange | positioned between the mouth unit 2100 and the side slope 2300. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in each general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and delivers it to the delivery port 3151 of the ball guiding unit 3150 in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. be able to.

[5-8c. Side slope]
Next, the side slope 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The side slope 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front in the gaming area 5a from the center in the up-down direction and slightly downward from the front upper left of the side unit 2200 in front view. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf 2301 protruding forward and extending left and right so that the right end side in front view is lower.

  The side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the left end of the shelf 2301 is close to the inner rail 1002, and the right end of the shelf 2301 is from the leftmost general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Is also located to the left. In the state where the side slope 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the shelf 2301 is located above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Thus, the side slope 2300 can guide the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 to the right (the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a) by the shelf 2301. There is a possibility that a game ball will be accepted in any of the three general winning openings 2001 of the starting opening 2002 and the side unit 2200.

[5-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing the attacker unit in the front unit cut from a substantial center in the front-rear direction in the game area and viewed from the front. The attacker unit 2400 is disposed in the game area 5a, at the lower right corner in front view, to the right of the starting port unit 2100 in front view, and attached to the front of the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 includes one general winning opening 2001 out of the four general winning openings 2001, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first winning opening 2005, a second winning opening 2006, and a sub-out opening 2007. It has.

  As shown in FIG. 126 and the like, the attacker unit 2400 has a bottom in which the outer shape in a front view is inclined such that the right end is located slightly above, a right side which rises substantially perpendicularly from the right end of the bottom, and an upper end of the right side. And an oblique side extending obliquely so as to connect the left end of the base. In this attacker unit 2400, a gate portion 2003 through which game balls flow (pass) up and down is arranged at the upper right corner, and a second starting port 2004 that can be opened forward is arranged immediately below the gate portion 2003. . In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a second big winning opening 2006 which can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and is always left open at the lower left of the second big winning opening 2006. A sub-out port 2007 is provided. Further, the attacker unit 2400 has a first winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward slightly to the left of the sub-out opening 2007 and is always opened upward at the lower left of the first winning opening 2005. General winning opening 2001 is arranged.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball received by the second start port 2004, and a first large winning port 2005. The first large winning opening sensor 4005 for detecting the received game ball, and the second large winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball received in the second large winning opening 2006 are provided.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a second starting port door 2411 that opens and closes the second starting port 2004 in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball through the gate unit 2003, and a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port 2004. A first special winning opening door 2412 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result that is drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting lot 2002 or the second starting lot A second special winning opening door 2413 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 2006 in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by accepting a game ball into the starting opening 2004.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a gate passage 2420 extending vertically at the upper right corner in the front view and through which game balls can flow, a left side passage 2421 extending vertically at the left side of the gate passage 2420 and through which game balls can flow, A right side passage 2422 that extends vertically on the right side of the gate passage 2420 and through which a game ball can flow, and a lower left end portion below the right side passage 2422 below the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421, and the right side passage 2422. An attacker passage 2423 that extends to the left from the left side passage 2421 so that game balls can flow therethrough, and extends to the left below the left side of the attacker passage 2423 so that the left end side is lower and guides the game ball. A possible attacker shelf 2424.

  In the gate passage 2420, the gate portion 2003 is arranged near the upper part, and the second starting port 2004 is arranged in the lower part. The left and right walls of the gate passage 2420 penetrate between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 so as to communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422, respectively. The gate passage 2420 extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  In the attacker passage 2423, a second big winning opening 2006 is opened on the bottom wall on the left side of the left side passage 2421. In the attacker passage 2423, a second special winning opening door 2413 for opening and closing the second special winning opening 2006 forms a part of the bottom wall. Further, the attacker passage 2423 has a left end, which is the lowest, opening downward. The second big winning opening 2006 is opened with a width of about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

  The attacker shelf 2424 has a first special winning opening 2005 opened, and a part of a first special winning opening door 2412 which closes the first special winning opening 2005 so that it can be opened and closed. The first big winning opening 2005 is opened with a width about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. At the right end of the attacker shelf 2424, a sub-out port 2007 is open. Further, one general winning opening 2001 is opened at the lower left of the left end of the attacker shelf 2424.

  The second starting port door 2411 can close the second starting port 2004 that is open frontward from the front, and can rotate around an axis whose lower side extends left and right near the lower end of the second starting port 2004. Installed. By rotating (rotating) such that the upper side moves forward, the second starting port door 2411 opens the second starting port 2004, closes the gate passage 2420, and flows down in the gate passage 2420. The game balls that have been guided can be guided to the second starting port 2004 side and accepted by the second starting port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 is formed so as to rotate by driving the starting port solenoid 2107. When the starting port solenoid 2107 is OFF (when not energized), the second starting port 2004 is closed, and the second starting port 2004 is closed. When the solenoid 2107 is ON (when energized), the second start port 2004 is opened.

  The first large winning opening door 2412 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so as to extend forward and backward and lower at the left end, and is opened upward by moving forward and backward. The winning opening 2005 can be closed. The first special winning opening door 2412 closes the first special winning opening 2005 by moving forward, forms a part of the attacker shelf 2424, and plays a game ball flowing down on the attacker shelf 2424 to the left. To be discharged downward from the left end of the attacker shelf 2424. In addition, the first special winning opening door 2412 opens the first special winning opening 2005 by retreating, and the game ball flowing down onto the attacker shelf 2424 via the attacker passage 2423 or the like is moved to the first special winning opening. 2005 can be accepted. The first special winning opening door 2412 is formed so as to advance and retreat by driving the first attacker solenoid 2108, and closes the first special winning opening 2005 when the first attacker solenoid 2108 is OFF (when not energized). When the first attacker solenoid 2108 is ON (when energized), the first big winning opening 2005 is opened.

  The second large winning opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so as to extend forward and rearward and having a lower left end, and is opened upward by moving forward and backward. The winning opening 2006 can be closed. The second winning opening door 2413 moves forward to close the second winning opening 2006 and forms a part of the bottom wall of the attacker passage 2423 to form a gate passage 2420, a left side passage 2421, and a right side passage. The game ball that has passed through any of 2422 is guided to the left and discharged downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2423. In addition, the second special winning opening door 2413 can open the second special winning opening 2006 by retreating, and allow the game balls that have entered the attacker passage 2423 to be accepted by the second special winning opening 2006 with a high probability. it can. The second special winning opening door 2413 is formed so as to advance and retreat by driving the second attacker solenoid 2109, and closes the second special winning opening 2006 when the second attacker solenoid 2109 is OFF (when not energized). When the second attacker solenoid 2109 is ON (when energized), the second winning port 2006 is opened.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes an internal passage 2430 through which the game balls received in the second special winning opening 2006 can flow, a first reception port (first ball passage) 2431 opened at the bottom of the internal passage 2430, and A second receiving port (second ball passage) 2432, a sorting piece 2433 for distributing a game ball to either the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 in the internal passage 2430, and the first receiving port 2431. A first reception port sensor 2434 for detecting a game ball received by the player and a second reception port sensor 2435 for detecting a game ball received by the second reception port 2432.

  The internal passage 2430 is formed on the downstream side of the second special winning opening sensor 2402. The first receiving port 2431 is disposed directly below a portion of the second winning winning port sensor 2402 through which a game ball passes, and the second receiving port 2432 is disposed on the right side of the first receiving port 2431 in a front view. . The distributing piece 2433 is disposed between the first receiving port 2431 and the second receiving port 2432 in the internal passage 2430, and is rotatably mounted around an axis having a lower side extending forward and backward. The sorting piece 2433 rises vertically and connects the second special winning opening 2006 and the first reception port 2431 to each other, and the upper side moves to the left as viewed from the front and the left side wall of the internal passage 2430 is formed. It is attached so as to rotate between a state in which the second large winning opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 are communicated with each other (or approach). The distributing piece 2433 is formed so as to rotate by driving the distributing solenoid 2110. When the distributing solenoid 2110 is OFF (when not energized), the game ball is distributed to the first receiving port 2431, and the distributing piece is distributed. When the solenoid 2110 is ON (when energized), the game balls are distributed to the second receiving port 2432.

  In this attacker unit 2400, with the gate passage 2420 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the gate passage 2420 is located immediately below an opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center role 2500 described later. 2003 is located above the stage 2530 of the center role 2500. The first winning opening 2005 and the general winning opening 2001 are located lower than the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100.

  Next, the flow of a game ball in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. When assembled on the game board 5, the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2530 of the center role 2500, so that the gate portion 2003 is released even if a game ball is released from the stage 2530. It does not pass. Therefore, only the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center role 2500 may pass through the gate portion 2003. The upper end opening of the gate passage 2420 in which the gate portion 2003 is disposed opens right below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2540 in the center role object 2500 and thus is open on the right side of the center role item 2500. The game ball that has flowed down the gate enters the gate passage 2420 with a high probability and passes through the gate portion 2003.

  Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2420 to the attacker passage 2423 through the front of the second starting port door 2411 closing the second starting port 2004 immediately below. At this time, if the second starting port door 2411 is turned forward and is in the open position, the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 abuts on the back surface of the second starting port door 2411 and The user is guided to the starting port 2004 and is received by the second starting port 2004. The second starting port door 2411 responds to a normal lottery result that is determined when a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 (a game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401) (the normal lottery result is “normal hit”). At that time, by appropriately setting the lottery time of the normal lottery result, the opening / closing timing of the second starting port door 2411, and the like, the game ball itself that has drawn the “normal hit” itself is accepted into the second starting port 2004. be able to.

  The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor.

  In the gate passage 2420, since the left and right sides of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 communicate with the left side passage 2421 and the right side passage 2422, the game passing through the gate portion 2003 In rare cases, the ball may enter the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 through a portion that is in communication. That is, the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 does not always pass in front of the second starting door 2411.

  When the game ball flowing down the right side of the center role 2500 does not enter the gate passage 2420, it enters either the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422 arranged on the left and right sides of the gate passage 2420, It is discharged to the attacker passage 2423 through the left side passage 2421 or the right side passage 2422.

  The game ball discharged to the attacker passage 2423 from any of the gate passage 2420, the left side passage 2421, and the right side passage 2422 is guided to the left along the slope of the attacker passage 2423, and is downward from the left end of the attacker passage 2423. Released to At this time, if the second special winning opening door 2413 that closes the second special winning opening 2006 retreats and the second special winning opening 2006 is opened, the game ball released into the attacker passage 2423 is It will be accepted in the second grand prize opening 2006 with a high probability. The game ball received in the second special winning opening 2006 is sent to the internal passage 2430 after being detected by the second special winning opening sensor 2402, and is distributed by the sorting piece 2433 to the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432. It is distributed to either.

  The game ball received in the first reception port 2431 or the second reception port 2432 is detected by the first reception port sensor 2434 or the second reception port sensor 2435, and then is located below (substrate holder) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. 1200).

  Since the width of the left and right of the second special winning opening 2006 is about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball, the second special winning opening door 2413 retreats and the second special winning opening 2006 is formed. Even if it is open, depending on the speed and behavior of the game balls flowing through the attacker passage 2423, the game balls may jump over the second special winning opening 2006 and may not be accepted in the second special winning opening 2006. .

  The game ball released from the attacker passage 2423 flows down onto the attacker shelf 2424, is guided by the attacker shelf 2424, and is discharged downward from the left end of the attacker shelf 2424. At this time, if the first special winning opening door 2412 retreats and the first special winning opening 2005 is opened, the game ball released from the attacker passage 2423 is received in the first special winning opening 2005. . Therefore, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center role 2500 when the first special winning opening 2005 is open, the game ball is highly likely to be inserted into the first special winning opening 2005. Can be accepted.

  The game ball received in the first special winning opening 2005 is detected by the first special winning opening sensor 4005 and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the gaming panel 1100.

  There is a possibility that the game ball discharged downward from the attacker shelf 2424 may be received in one general winning opening 2001 arranged below. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the rear side of the panel board 1110 and then transferred to the right delivery port 3136 of the back decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game balls not received in the general winning opening 2001 pass through the out opening 1126 at the lower end of the game area 5a and are discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the game panel 1100.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 (a) is a perspective view of the center role in the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 127 (b) is a perspective view of the center role as viewed from the back. The center role item 2500 is disposed above the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a, substantially in the center in front view, and slightly upward, and is mounted on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Have been. The center role item 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes, from the front, an effect unit provided in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. be able to.

  In the frame-shaped center role 2500, the entire periphery excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball hit into the game area 5a is placed in the frame. It is inaccessible.

  The center role item 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front so that a game ball in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be discharged into the frame. It is provided with an open warp exit 2522 and a stage 2530 capable of rolling a game ball released from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then releasing the ball into the game area 5a (see FIG. 120 and the like). .

  The stage 2530 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to a position directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110), it is formed in a wavy shape such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. The stage 2530 can discharge a game ball into the game area 5a from the lowest part on both sides of the center formed in a wavy shape.

  The center role 2500 has a chance entrance 2535 in which a game ball can enter, and a game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2535. A chance exit 2536 for discharging the game area 5a below the stage 2530. The chance exit 2536 is located immediately above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 in a state where the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. As a result, when a game ball is released from the chance exit 2536, it is accepted in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  In addition, the center role item 2500 includes a right guide passage 2540 that guides the game ball flowing down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side when viewed from the front slightly to the left and then discharges the ball downward. The right guide passage 2540 is formed such that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540 is located directly above the gate passage 2420 (gate portion 2003) of the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center role item 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. Have been.

  The center role item 2500 is formed such that, when assembled to the game board 5, the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball from the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000. Therefore, when the game ball circulates on the right side of the center role 2500, it flows along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center role 2500, and all the game spheres flowing on the right side of the center role 2500 enter the right guide passage 2540. Enter and be guided. Thereby, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a so as to flow on the right side of the center role item 2500 (so-called right-handed), the game ball can pass through the gate unit 2003 with a very high probability. it can.

[5-9. Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit exploded for each main component and viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit exploded for each main component and viewed from the rear. is there. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100. In addition, a game board effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape whose front is open and has a rectangular opening 3010a in the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600, an effect drive substrate 3031 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a, and an effect drive substrate on the rear surface of the back box 3010. A panel relay board 3032 attached to the right side of the rear view of the back panel 3032, a lower left relay board 3033 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3032 in the back view, and a production drive board on the rear side of the back box 3010. And a lower right relay board 3034 attached to the left side of the rear view 3031.

  The effect drive board 3031 is based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, and is based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, the back front decorative unit 3200, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back upper movable effect unit. 3500 and the lower back movable effect unit 3700. The panel relay board 3032 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a first starting port sensor 3112, a second starting port sensor 4004, a magnetic detection sensor 4024, a first big winning port sensor 4005, and a second Big winning port sensor 2402, first receiving port sensor 2434, second receiving port sensor 2435, general winning port sensor 3111, gate sensor 2401, starting port solenoid 2107, first attacker solenoid 2108, second attacker solenoid 2109, distribution solenoid The connection with 2110 is relayed.

  The lower left relay board 3033 relays the connection between the effect drive board 3031 and the rear left movable effect unit 3300. The lower right relay board 3034 connects the effect drive substrate 3031 to the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable effect unit 3200, the back right movable effect unit 3400, the upper back movable effect unit 3500, and the lower back movable effect unit 3700. Is being relayed.

  The rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear side of each of the effect drive board 3031, the panel relay board 3032, the lower left relay board 3033, and the lower right relay board 3034. A board cover 3035, a panel relay board cover 3036, a lower left relay board cover 3037, and a lower right relay board cover 3038 are provided.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the back box 3010 at the left side and the bottom side in front view, and the back unit is attached to the back box 3010 so as to surround the opening 3010a. The middle movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300 and the back right movable production unit 3400 attached respectively to the left and right sides of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 It has a rear-side movable effect unit 3500 attached thereto, and a lower-back movable effect unit 3700 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is recessed from the inside of the frame to the outside on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b when viewed from the rear, and is inserted. And a notch portion 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view, to which the lock mechanism 3020 is mounted.

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, a lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear surface in a rear view so as to be slidable up and down.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses and mounting holes for mounting each movable effect unit and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9b. Back decoration unit]
Next, the back decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 132 (a) is a front view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit, and FIG. 132 (b) is an enlarged sectional view cut along line TT in FIG. The back front decoration unit 3100 is attached so as to extend from the left side to the lower side of the front end of the back box 3010 in front view.

  The back front decoration unit 3100 is formed in an L-shape (crescent shape) along the left side and the lower side of the front end of the back box 3010, and a transparent unit base 3110 attached to the front end of the back box 3010; A general winning opening sensor 3111 for detecting a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, a first starting opening sensor 3112 for detecting a gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2002 of the front unit 2000, And a magnetism detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting illegal magnetism applied from the outside in the game area 5a.

  The front decoration unit 3100 extends vertically along the left side of the back box 3010 and is attached to the front of the unit base 3110. A lower back decoration unit 3130 extending right and left along the side of the box 3010 and attached to the front of the unit base 3110, and a unit base disposed at the lower left side of the lower back decoration unit 3130 in front view. A ball guiding unit 3150 attached to the front of the 3110.

  As shown in the figure, the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front decorative unit 3100 has a translucent flat back front left decorative ornament 3121 having a decoration of “Do-do-do” and a back front left decorative. A transparent flat front left back light guiding lens 3122 mounted on the rear side of the decorative body 3121 and a plurality of LEDs 3123a capable of irradiating light toward the left side surface of the front left left light guiding lens 3122 are mounted. And a back front left decorative substrate 3123 (see FIG. 132 (b)).

  The back front left light guide lens 3122 has a plurality of conical reflecting portions 3122a on the rear surface of the back front left decorative decorative body 3121 behind the decoration of the letter "C". Light that has entered the inside from the left side of the back front left light guide lens 3122 is reflected forward by the plurality of reflectors 3122a, and the back front left decorative ornament placed in front of the back front left light guide lens 3122. The 3121 can be decorated with light emission in a planar manner.

  The lower back front decoration unit 3130 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is disposed so as to correspond to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, and has a lower back front center lens 3131 having a predetermined three-dimensional decoration formed on the front surface. , A lower front lower left lens 3132 and a lower front lower right lens 3133, which are respectively disposed on the left and right sides of the lower front lower center lens 3131 and have a predetermined three-dimensional decoration on the front surface, and a lower front lower center lens 3131. , A back front lower left lens 3132 and a back front lower right lens 3133, and a back front lower decorative board 3134 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front side. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs on the back front lower decorative board, the lower front lower center lens 3131, the lower front lower left lens 3132, and the lower front right lens 3133 can be illuminated and decorated in an independent state.

  The lower front lower decorative unit 3130 is opened forward at the upper center of the lower front lower central lens 3131, and a game ball received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and guided to the rear is provided. A central delivery port 3135 that can be entered, and a game ball that is opened forward at the right outside of the lower part of the lower front lower central lens 3131 and that is received by the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 and guided backward. And a possible left delivery port 3137. The game ball that has entered the central delivery port 3135 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the first starting port sensor 3112. Further, the game ball that has entered the right delivery port 3136 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3111.

  The ball guiding unit 3150 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is attached to the unit base 3110 so as to be disposed below the back front lower left lens 3132 in the back front lower decoration unit 3130. The ball guiding unit 3150 is formed in a box shape as a whole, and is opened forward at a position corresponding to the three general winning openings 2001 in the side unit 2200, and three delivery ports 3151 through which game balls can enter. And a discharge port (not shown) for discharging the game balls entering the inside from the delivery port 3151 downward (on the substrate holder 1200). The game ball that has entered the inside from the delivery port 3151 is discharged downward from the discharge port after being detected by the general winning port sensor 3111.

[5-9c. Uranaka movable production unit]
Next, the back inside movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The rear middle movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the rear wall inside the back box 3010 so as to surround the opening 3010a. The back middle movable effecting unit 3200 is arranged on the left side in front view, extends vertically higher than the height of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, and has a back middle left decorative body 3210 having a predetermined decoration; , A back middle right decorative body 3220 extending vertically higher than the height of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 and having a predetermined decoration, and an opening 3010a in the rear wall of the back box 3010. A back middle drive unit 3250 attached to the upper and lower outer sides to move the middle back decoration 3210 and the middle right decoration 3220 in the left-right direction.

  The back middle left decorative body 3210 is a flat back middle left decorative lens 3211 having a relief-shaped decoration formed on the front and a translucent flat middle left decorative lens 3211, and is arranged on the rear side of the back middle left decorative lens 3211. A back middle left decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a flat back middle attached to the back of the middle back left decorative lens 3211 so as to cover the rear surface of the middle back left decorative board. And a left decorative body base 3212. Although not shown, the back center left decorative body base 3212 is provided with a rack gear at its lower end that extends left and right and has gear teeth formed upward. The back center left decorative body 3210 can cause the back center left decorative lens 3211 to emit light by making the LED on the back center left decorative substrate emit light.

  The back middle right decorative body 3220 is disposed on the rear side of the back middle right decorative lens 3221 having a translucent plate-shaped back middle right decorative lens 3221 having a relief-shaped decoration formed on the front surface and on the front side. A back middle right decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and a flat back middle attached to the rear side of the back middle right decorative lens 3221 so as to cover the rear surface of the back middle right decorative board. And a right decoration base 3222. Although not shown, the back middle right decorative body base 3222 includes a rack gear at the lower end that extends left and right and has gear teeth formed downward. The back middle right decorative body 3220 can cause the back middle right decorative lens 3221 to emit light by making the LED on the back middle right decorative substrate emit light.

  The back center left decorative lens 3211 and the back center right decorative lens 3221 of the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape, and at the approximate center in the vertical direction, a game board. 5 is formed in a shape like a hollow on the side near the center in the left-right direction.

  The back middle drive unit 3250 is mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and supports the upper ends of the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A flat unit base 3252 that supports the lower ends of the middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 so as to be slidable in the left and right direction, and an opening 3010 a attached to the rear side of the unit base 3252 and inside the back box 3010. , A back-side drive motor 3254 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 3252 such that a rotating shaft projects between the mounting base 3253 and the unit base 3252, The rotation of the drive motor 3254 is transmitted, and it is rotatable on the front surface of the mounting base 3253. Attached to and pinion gear rack and is engaged in the rack gear and the back in the right decorations 3220 of the back in the left ornamental body 3210 so as to be sandwiched from above and below (not shown) in which provided with a.

  In the back middle movable effect unit 3200, in the normal state, the left and right back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are in a retracted position where they are most separated from each other. In this state, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are slightly visible through the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIG. 114 and the like). When the pinion gear is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view by driving the back center drive motor 3254 from the normal state, the rack gear of the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 meshing with the pinion gear are rotated. Due to the rack gear, the back center left decorative body 3210 moves to the right and the back center right decorative body 3220 moves to the left.

  As a result, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 that have been separated from each other move so as to approach each other, and stop moving immediately before they come into contact with each other. In this state, the back center left decorative body 3210 and the back center right decorative body 3220 are located at substantially the center (appearance position) on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the back center left decorative body 3210 The decoration with the back middle right decorative body 3220 is united to form one large decoration (decoration imitating cherry blossom petals) (see FIG. 170).

[5-9d. Back left movable directing unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left outside of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. The back left movable rendering unit 3300 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back right movable rendering unit 3400 with an opening 3010a in the back box 3010 interposed therebetween.

  The back left movable rendering unit 3300 includes a back left decorative body 3310 formed in a triangular prism shape, a back left rotation drive unit 3330 that rotates the back left decorative body 3310 around an axis extending vertically, and a back box 3010. A back left moving drive unit 3350 that is attached and moves the upper end side of the back left rotary drive unit 3330 in the left and right direction, and guides the lower end side of the back left rotary drive unit 3330 that is mounted in the back box 3010 to be movable in the left and right direction. And a back left upper decorative body 3390 attached to the front side of the back left moving drive unit 3350 and having a predetermined decoration.

  The back left decorative body 3310 is formed in a triangular prism shape extending vertically, and extends shorter than the vertical height of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back left decorative body 3310 includes a first decorative surface 3311 on which a relief of a statue of Nio is formed, a second decorative surface 3312 on which a predetermined character decoration is formed, and a character different from the second decorative surface 3312. And a third decorative surface 3313 on which a decoration is formed. The back left decorative body 3310 is formed to have translucency. Although not shown, the back left decorative body 3310 has a cylindrical shaft at the lower end.

  The back left rotation drive unit 3330 is attached to a vertically extending movement base 3331 that is mounted to be movable in the left-right direction by the back left movement drive unit 3350, and is attached to a lower portion of the movement base 3331 so as to protrude forward, and is a back left decoration. A lower rotating base 3332 rotatably supporting a lower end of the body 3310, and an upper rotating base (not shown) attached to an upper portion of the moving base 3331 so as to protrude above the back left decorative body 3310; A rotating shaft that is attached to the upper rotating base so as to protrude downward, and a rotating shaft that penetrates the upper rotating base is attached to the upper end of the back left decorative body 3310 is a back left rotating drive motor (not shown). The motor cover 3333 attached to the moving base 3331 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back left rotary drive motor, and the inside of the back left decorative body 3310 The lower end with being location includes a Urahidari decorative substrate 3334 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the lower rotary base 3332 is mounted (see FIG. 119), the.

  Although not shown, the moving base 3331 has a rack gear extending left and right at the upper end. The lower rotation base 3332 rotatably supports the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back left decorative body 3310. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3332 has a protrusion that protrudes downward from the lower surface and is guided by the lower left lower guide rail 3370.

  The back left decorative substrate 3334 is disposed inside the back left decorative body 3310 through the inside of the cylindrical shaft portion. Although not shown, the back left decorative substrate 3334 has its upper end side rotatably supported below the upper end of the back left decorative body 3310. Thereby, only the back left decorative body 3310 is formed to rotate by the driving of the back left rotation drive motor. In addition, the LED of the back left decorative board 3334 always faces forward, and only the portion of the back left decorative body 3310 located in front of the back left decorative board 3334 (that is, the decorative surface facing forward) emits light. be able to.

  The back left movement drive unit 3350 is provided with a unit base 3351 attached to the upper left corner above the opening 3010 a in the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010, and the rotation shaft projects rearward through the unit base 3351. The rear left movement drive motor 3352 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, the drive gear 3353 attached to the rotation shaft of the back left movement drive motor 3352, and the rear left rotation A pinion gear (not shown) meshed with the rack gear of the drive unit 3330 and rotatably mounted on the unit base 3351; and a moving base of the back left rotation drive unit 3330 mounted on the lower front surface of the unit base 3351 Slide rail for mounting 3331 movably in the left and right direction Shown is provided with abbreviated).

  When the pinion gear is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the back left movement drive motor 3352 via the drive gear 3353 by the back left movement drive unit 3350, the back left rotation drive unit 3350 is driven by the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear. The unit 3330 (the back left decorative body 3310) can be moved rightward.

  The lower back left guide rail 3370 is attached near the left end below the opening 3010 a in the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The lower back left guide rail 3370 extends left and right, and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower back left guide rail 3370 inserts a protrusion projecting from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3332 into the opening on the upper surface to guide the protrusion slidably in the left-right direction. Can be.

  The back upper left decorative body 3390 includes a translucent back left upper decorative lens 3391 on which a predetermined decoration is formed, and a unit base 3351 of the back left moving drive unit 3350 attached to the rear side of the rear upper left decorative lens 3391. A decorative body base 3392 attached to the front surface, and a rear upper left decorative substrate (not shown) mounted between the decorative body base 3392 and the upper left decorative lens 3391 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back upper left decorative body 3390 can make the back upper left decorative lens 3391 emit light by emitting the LED on the back upper left decorative board.

  In a normal state, the back left movable effect unit 3300 is in a state where the back left rotation drive unit 3330 (the back left decorative body 3310) has moved to the leftmost position (evacuated position) by the back left movement drive unit 3350. ing. In this normal state, the back left decorative body 3310 is located behind the back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back front decorative unit 3100, and can be almost visually recognized from the front by being blocked by the back front left decorative unit 3120. No (see FIG. 114 etc.).

  In this normal state, by driving the back left movement drive motor 3352 of the back left movement drive unit 3350, the back left decorative body 3310 can be moved rightward through the back left rotation drive unit 3330. When reaching the right end position (appearance position) of the slide rail of the left movement drive unit 3350, the movement stops. In this appearance position, the back left decorative body 3310 is located on the right side of the back front left decoration unit 3120 in the back front decoration unit 3100 via the back left rotation drive unit 3330, and the game board side effect display. It is located near the left end on the front surface of the device 1600 and is visible through the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIGS. 171 to 173).

  In addition, the back left movable rendering unit 3300 rotates the back left decoration body 3310 with the back left rotation drive motor of the back left rotation drive unit 3330, or the first decoration surface 3311 and the second decoration of the back left decoration body 3310. The rotation can be stopped or any one of the surface 3312 and the third decorative surface 3313 can face forward. The back left decorative body 3310 can be rotated at any of the retracted position and the appearing position.

[5-9e. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the right outside of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010 when viewed from the front. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to the back left movable effect unit 3300 with an opening 3010a in the back box 3010 interposed therebetween.

  The back right movable rendering unit 3400 includes a back right decorative body 3410 formed in a triangular prism shape, a back right rotation drive unit 3430 for rotating the back right decorative body 3410 around an axis extending vertically, and a back box 3010. A back-right moving drive unit 3450 that is attached and moves the upper end of the back-right rotation drive unit 3430 in the left-right direction, and guides the lower end of the back-right rotation drive unit 3430 that is mounted in the back box 3010 to be movable in the left-right direction. A back right lower guide rail 3470 and a back upper right decorative body 3490 attached to the front side of the back right moving drive unit 3450 and having a predetermined decoration.

  The back right decorative body 3410 is formed in a vertically extending triangular prism shape, and extends shorter than the vertical height of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. The back right decorative body 3410 includes a first decorative surface 3411 on which a relief of a statue of Nio is formed, a second decorative surface 3412 on which a predetermined character decoration is formed, and a character different from the second decorative surface 3412. A third decorative surface 3413 on which a decoration is formed. The back right decorative body 3410 is formed to have translucency. Although not shown, the back right decorative body 3410 has a cylindrical shaft at the lower end.

  The back right rotation drive unit 3430 is attached to a vertically extending movement base 3431 that is mounted to be movable in the left-right direction by the back right movement drive unit 3450, and is attached to a lower portion of the movement base 3431 so as to protrude forward, and is a back right decoration. A lower rotating base 3432 rotatably supporting the lower end of the body 3410, and an upper rotating base (not shown) mounted on an upper portion of the moving base 3431 so as to protrude above the back right decorative body 3410; A rotating shaft that is attached to the upper rotating base so as to protrude downward, and a rotating shaft that penetrates the upper rotating base is attached to the upper end of the back right decorative body 3410 is a back right rotating drive motor (not shown). The motor cover 3433 attached to the moving base 3431 so as to cover the outer periphery of the back right rotation drive motor and the inside of the back right decorative body 3410 The lower end with being location includes a back right decorative substrate 3434 in which a plurality of LED on the front is attached to the lower rotary base 3432 is mounted (see FIG. 119), the.

  Although not shown, the moving base 3431 has a rack gear extending left and right at the upper end. The lower rotation base 3432 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical shaft portion of the back right decorative body 3410. Although not shown, the lower rotation base 3432 has a projection that protrudes downward from the lower surface and is guided by the rear lower right guide rail 3470.

  The back right decorative substrate 3434 is disposed inside the back right decorative body 3410 through the inside of the cylindrical shaft portion. Although not shown, the upper right side of the back right decorative board 3434 is relatively rotatably supported below the upper end of the back right decorative body 3410. Thus, only the back right decorative body 3410 is formed to rotate by the driving of the back right rotation drive motor. In addition, the LED of the back right decorative board 3434 always faces forward, and only the part of the back right decorative body 3410 located in front of the back right decorative board 3434 (that is, the decorative surface facing forward) emits light. be able to.

  The back-right movement drive unit 3450 has a unit base 3451 attached to the upper right corner above the opening 3010 a in the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010, and the rotation shaft projects rearward through the unit base 3451. The right-hand drive motor 3452 attached to the front of the unit base 3451, the drive gear 3453 attached to the rotating shaft of the right-hand drive motor 3452, and the right-hand A pinion gear (not shown) meshed with the rack gear of the drive unit 3430 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3451, and a moving base of the back right rotation drive unit 3430 attached to the lower front part of the unit base 3451. Slide rail for mounting 3431 movably in the left and right direction Shown is provided with abbreviated).

  When the pinion gear is rotated clockwise in front view by the back right movement drive motor 3452 via the drive gear 3453 by the back right movement drive unit 3450, the back right rotation drive unit is driven by the rack gear meshing with the pinion gear. 3430 (back right decorative body 3410) can be moved to the left.

  The lower right back guide rail 3470 is attached near the right end below the opening 3010 a in the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The lower right back guide rail 3470 extends left and right, and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. By inserting a projection projecting from the lower surface of the lower rotation base 3432 of the rear right rotation drive unit 3430 into the opening on the upper surface of the lower right back guide rail 3470, the projection is slidably guided in the left and right direction. be able to.

  The back upper right decorative body 3490 is formed of a translucent back upper right decorative lens 3491 on which a predetermined decoration is formed, and a unit base 3451 of the back right moving drive unit 3450 which is attached to the back right side of the back upper right decorative lens 3490. A decorative body base 3492 attached to the front surface, and a rear upper right decorative substrate (not shown) mounted between the decorative body base 3492 and the upper right decorative lens 3490 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. ing. The back upper right decorative body 3490 can make the back upper right decorative lens 3491 emit light by making the LED on the back upper right decorative substrate emit light.

  In a normal state, the back right movable effect unit 3400 is in a position (retracted position) where the back right rotation drive unit 3430 (back right decorative body 3410) is moved to the rightmost position by the back right movement drive unit 3450. ing. In this normal state, the back right decorative body 3410 is located behind the right side of the center role 2500, and a part thereof can be visually recognized through the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIG. 114 and the like). reference).

  In this normal state, by driving the back right movement drive motor 3452 of the back right movement drive unit 3450, the back right decorative body 3410 can be moved rightward through the back right rotation drive unit 3430. When reaching the left end position (appearance position) of the slide rail of the right movement drive unit 3450, the movement stops. In this appearance position, the back right decorative body 3410 is located on the left side of the right side of the center role item 2500 via the back right rotation drive unit 3430, and is located on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is located near the right end, and is in a state where the whole can be visually recognized through the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIGS. 171 to 173).

  In addition, the back right movable rendering unit 3400 rotates the back right decorative body 3410 with the back right rotary drive motor of the back right rotary drive unit 3430, or the first decorative surface 3411 and the second decoration of the back right decorative body 3410. The rotation can be stopped or any one of the surface 3412 and the third decorative surface 3413 faces forward. The back right decorative body 3410 can be rotated at any of the retracted position and the appearing position.

[5-9f. Overall configuration of the back movable unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the rear movable effect unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 133 to 158. FIG. 133 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 133 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper movable effect unit mainly disassembled for each constituent unit and viewed from the front, and FIG. 135 is an exploded view of the back upper movable effect unit for each main constituent unit and viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view. The rear upper movable effect unit 3500 is attached to the front of the rear wall and above the opening 3010a in the rear box 3010.

  The back upper movable rendering unit 3500 includes a back upper first decorative body unit 3510 having a predetermined character decoration, and a back upper second decorative body unit having a different character decoration from the back upper first decorative body unit 3510. 3530, a back upper third decorative body unit 3550 having a different character decoration from the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 and the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and a back upper first decorative body at the center in the longitudinal direction The unit 3510 is attached so as to be rotatable relative to the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 extend in the front-rear direction near both ends in the longitudinal direction, respectively. A back-upside rotation base unit 3570 that is mounted to be rotatable relative to the axis of the back-up. A decoration unit 3510 that is non-rotatably mounted, and a back-up and down unit 3600 that lifts and lowers the back upper first decoration unit 3510 and the back upper rotation base unit 3570 and is mounted in the back box 3010. I have.

[5-9f-1. Back upper first decorative unit]
Next, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 in the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139. FIG. 136 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit viewed from the back. FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit viewed from the front and FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper first decorative body unit viewed from the back. FIG. 139 (a) is an explanatory view showing a drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and FIG. 139 (b) is a drive system when the back upper first decorative body unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing shown from the front. The back upper first decorative body unit 3510 of the back upper movable effecting unit 3500 has a rear end non-rotatably attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 in the rear elevating unit 3600.

  The back upper first decorative body unit 3510 includes a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512, which are formed in such a way as to form predetermined characters in one-to-one pairs and have translucency. A first fixed decorative lens 3513 which is disposed on the rear side of the one left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 and has a predetermined decoration and has a light-transmitting property; A first upper decorative substrate 3514 disposed on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and attached to the rear side of the first fixed decorative lens 3513 so as to cover the rear surface of the first upper decorative substrate 3514. And a first decorative body base 3515 in the shape of a flat plate. Note that the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is provided with a decoration imitating lightning.

  In addition, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 extends in the left-right direction at a lower portion on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and has a left end on the left outer side of the first decorative body base 3515 and a first left movable decorative lens 3511. A first lower arm 3516 having a rack gear 3516a extending left and right on the upper side, a slit 3516b penetrating back and forth below the rack gear 3516a and extending left and right, and a first lower arm 3516 A lower arm presser 3517 which is attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the slit 3516b and cooperates with the first decorative body base 3515 to slidably mount the first lower arm 3516 in the left-right direction; It has.

  In addition, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515, and has a right end on the right outer side of the first decorative body base 3515 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512. A first upper arm 3518 having a rack gear 3518a extending left and right on the lower side, and a slit 3518b extending left and right through the front and rear above the rack gear 3518a; An upper arm retainer 3519 attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 through the slit 3518b and cooperating with the first decorative body base 3515 to attach the first upper arm 3518 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Have.

  Further, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 includes a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3520a that meshes with the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518, respectively, and a rear surface of the transmission gear portion 3520a. A first opening / closing gear member 3520 having a small-diameter drive gear portion 3520b formed integrally and rotatably attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 is provided.

  The upper back first decorative body unit 3510 is a flat plate-like member extending vertically in the front left side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 on the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515, and has a first opening / closing gear member on the right side. It has a vertically extending drive rack gear 3521a that meshes with the 3520 drive gear portion 3520b, a receiving boss 3521b that projects cylindrically rearward from the lower portion of the rear surface, and a slit 3521c that penetrates back and forth and extends vertically near the left side. The first opening / closing arm 3521 and the slit 3521c of the first opening / closing arm 3521 are attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515, and the first opening / closing arm 3521 is vertically moved in cooperation with the first decorative body base 3515. An open / close arm presser 3522 slidably mounted.

  Further, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 has a left end attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 and a right end attached to the first upper arm 3518, so that the first upper arm 3518 can be viewed from the front left. A first opening / closing spring 3523 biased to move toward the first direction, and a first attachment base 3524 attached to the rear side of the first decorative body base 3515 so as to cover the rear side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520. And a horizontal lock hole 3525a which is attached to the rear side of the first mounting base 3524 and is opened at the outer peripheral surface on the right side, and is formed at the same position in the front-rear direction as the horizontal lock hole 3525a. A vertical lock hole 3525b, which is open at the bottom, and a mounting shaft portion 3525c that projects cylindrically rearward behind the vertical lock hole 3525b. End and a, a first mounting shaft member 3525 attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 in the back on the lift unit 3600.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 will be described in detail. The back upper first decorative body unit 3510 is located between a closed position where the left and right first left movable decorative lenses 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in close proximity to each other and in an open position where they are away from each other. It is formed so as to slide in the left-right direction.

  In the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, a first upper arm 3518 to which a first right movable decorative lens 3512 is attached is disposed above a first lower arm 3516 to which a first left movable decorative lens 3511 is attached. And each is mounted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The first lower arm 3516 is provided with a rack gear 3516a extending left and right upward, and the first upper arm 3518 is provided with a rack gear 3518a extending left and right downward. The rack gear 3516a of the arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518 face each other. Then, between the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is connected to the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518. Each is engaged. Thus, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 (the transmission gear portion 3520a) is rotated, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 can be slid in mutually different left and right directions.

  Therefore, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens are moved via the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518. When the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front, the first lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518 can be slid in a direction approaching each other (a direction of the closed position). , The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 can be slid in directions away from each other (in the direction of the open position).

  In the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 has a drive gear portion 3520b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3520a, and extends vertically so as to mesh with the drive gear portion 3520b. A first opening / closing arm 3521 having a drive rack gear 3521a is provided. Since the first opening / closing arm 3521 is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Then, since the first opening / closing arm 3521 is disposed on the left side of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 in front view, when the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in front view, it slides downward, When the first opening / closing gear member 3520 is rotated clockwise in front view, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid downward, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 Can be slid in a direction approaching each other (a direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid upward, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates clockwise in front view, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are mutually moved. It can be slid in the separating direction (the direction of the open position).

  Since the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 has the first opening / closing spring 3523 that urges the first upper arm 3518 to move to the left, a force acts on the first opening / closing arm 3521. When not performed (in a normal state), the first upper arm 3518 is slid to the left by the urging force of the first opening / closing spring 3523, and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative The lens 3512 is in a closed position where the lens 3512 is in contact with each other. In the closed position, the transmission gear portion 3520a of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3516a of the first lower arm 3516 and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3518a of the first upper arm 3518. Are engaged. In this state, the drive gear portion 3520b of the first opening / closing gear member 3520 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the driving rack gear 3521a of the first opening / closing arm 3521 (see FIG. 139 (a)).

  When the first opening / closing arm 3521 is slid upward from the closed position to resist the urging force of the first opening / closing spring 3523, the first opening / closing gear member 3520 rotates clockwise in front view, The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 slide in directions away from each other via the lower arm 3516 and the first upper arm 3518. When the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 reach the open positions, the slide stops (see FIG. 139 (b)). The stop of the slide at this open position is performed at at least one of the slit 3516b of the first lower arm 3516, the slit 3518b of the first upper arm 3518, and the slit 3521c of the first opening / closing arm 3521, at the end of the long hole. The slide is regulated by the lower arm press 3517, the upper arm press 3519, and the opening / closing arm press 3522 abutting on each other.

  Therefore, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the closed position, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 includes the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. Is located in front of the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is almost invisible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512. Decoration is visible. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are separated from each other, and the first movable movable lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are separated from each other. The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3513 can be seen.

  In addition, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 causes the LED of the back upper first decorative substrate 3514 to emit light as appropriate, so that the first left movable decorative lens 3511, the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the first fixed decorative lens are provided. 3513 can be appropriately decorated with light emission. Specifically, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the closed position, the LED on the back upper first decorative substrate 3514 emits light via the first fixed decorative lens 3513. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 can be illuminated. On the other hand, when the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 are in the open position and the LED on the back upper first decorative substrate 3514 emits light, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3511 are turned on. Only the first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from between the decorative lens 3512 can be illuminated.

[5-9f-2. Second decorative body unit on the back]
Next, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 in the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 to 143. FIG. 140 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit viewed from the back. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper second decorative body unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 143 (a) is an explanatory view showing the drive system when the back upper second decorative body unit is in the closed position from the front, and FIG. 143 (b) is a drive system when the back upper second decorative body unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing shown from the front. The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 of the back upper movable effect unit 3500 has a rear end near one end in the longitudinal direction of the back upper rotating base unit 3570 (near the right end when in the horizontal position), and a front-rear direction. Is mounted so as to be rotatable about an axis extending to

  The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 includes a second left movable decorative lens 3531 and a second right movable decorative lens 3532 in which decorations for forming predetermined characters are formed in a one-to-one pair and having translucency. A second fixed decorative lens 3533 which is disposed behind the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 and has a predetermined decoration and has a light-transmitting property, and a second fixed decorative lens 3533 A second upper decorative substrate 3534 disposed on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and attached to the rear side of the second fixed decorative lens 3533 so as to cover the rear surface of the second upper decorative substrate 3534. And a flat second decorative body base 3535. Note that a decoration imitating lightning is formed on the second fixed decorative lens 3533.

  In addition, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 extends in the left-right direction at the lower part on the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535, and has a left end on the left outer side of the second decorative body base 3535 and a second left movable decorative lens 3531. And a second lower arm 3536 having a rack gear 3536a extending left and right on the upper side, and a slit 3536b penetrating back and forth below the rack gear 3536a and extending left and right. A lower arm presser 3537 attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the slit 3536b, and cooperating with the second decorative body base 3535 to attach the second lower arm 3536 slidably in the left-right direction; It has.

  In addition, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part on the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535, and has a right end on the right outside of the second decorative body base 3535 and a second right movable decorative lens 3532. A second upper arm 3538 having a rack gear 3538a extending left and right on the lower side, and a slit 3538b penetrating back and forth above the rack gear 3538a and extending left and right, and a second upper arm 3538. An upper arm presser 3539 attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the slit 3538b and cooperating with the second decorative body base 3535 to attach the second upper arm 3538 slidably in the left-right direction. Have.

  Further, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 includes a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3540a that meshes with the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538, and a rear surface of the transmission gear portion 3540a. A second opening / closing gear member 3540 having a small-diameter drive gear portion 3540b formed integrally and rotatably attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 is provided.

  In addition, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 is a flat plate-shaped left and right extending side of the second open / close gear member 3540 at the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535, and extends on the right side. A vertically extending drive rack gear 3541a that meshes with a drive gear portion 3540b of 3540, a receiving boss 3541b that projects rearward in a cylindrical shape from near the upper end of the rear surface, and a slit 3541c that extends vertically through and near the left side. And a second opening / closing arm 3541 having an opening / closing arm 3541. The second opening / closing arm 3541 is attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 through the slit 3541c of the second opening / closing arm 3541. And an open / close arm presser 3542 mounted to be slidable in the direction.

  Further, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 has a left end attached to the second lower arm 3536 and a right end attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535, so that the second lower arm 3536 can be viewed from the right in front view. A second opening / closing spring 3543 urged to move toward the second direction, and a second attachment base 3544 attached to the rear side of the second decorative body base 3535 so as to cover the rear side of the second opening / closing gear member 3540. And The second attachment base 3544 is attached to a second drive link gear member 3573 of the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 described later.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 will be described in detail. The back upper second decorative body unit 3530 moves between the closed position where the left and right second movable decorative lenses 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 approach each other and the open position where they are separated from each other. It is formed so as to slide in the left-right direction.

  In the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, a second upper arm 3538 to which a second right movable decorative lens 3532 is attached is disposed above a second lower arm 3536 to which a second left movable decorative lens 3531 is attached. And each is mounted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. In the second lower arm 3536, a rack gear 3536a extending left and right is provided upward, and in the second upper arm 3538, a rack gear 3538a extending left and right is provided downward. The rack gear 3536a of the arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538 face each other. Then, between the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is connected to the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538. Each is engaged. Accordingly, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 (the transmission gear portion 3540a) is rotated, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 can be slid in mutually different left and right directions.

  Therefore, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3531 via the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538. When the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated clockwise in front view, the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538 can be slid in a direction approaching each other (a direction of the closed position). , The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can be slid in the direction away from each other (in the direction of the open position).

  Further, in the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 has a drive gear portion 3540b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3540a, and extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3540b. A second opening / closing arm 3541 having a driving rack gear 3541a is provided. Since the second opening / closing arm 3541 is attached so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, when the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. And since the 2nd opening / closing arm 3541 is arrange | positioned at the front view left side of the 2nd opening / closing gear member 3540, when rotating the 2nd opening / closing gear member 3540 in a front view counterclockwise direction, it will slide below, When the second opening / closing gear member 3540 is rotated clockwise in front view, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid downward, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 Can be slid in a direction approaching each other (a direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid upward, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates clockwise in front view, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are mutually moved. It can be slid in the separating direction (the direction of the open position).

  Since the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 has the second opening / closing spring 3543 that urges the second lower arm 3536 to move rightward, a force acts on the second opening / closing arm 3541. When not performed (in a normal state), the second lower arm 3536 is slid rightward by the urging force of the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative The lens 3532 is in a closed position where the lens 3532 is in contact with each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3540a of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3536a of the second lower arm 3536 and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3538a of the second upper arm 3538. Are engaged. In this state, the drive gear portion 3540b of the second opening / closing gear member 3540 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the driving rack gear 3541a of the second opening / closing arm 3541 (see FIG. 143 (a)).

  When the second opening / closing arm 3541 is slid upward from the closed position to oppose the urging force of the second opening / closing spring 3543, the second opening / closing gear member 3540 rotates clockwise in front view, The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 slide in directions away from each other via the second lower arm 3536 and the second upper arm 3538. Then, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 reach the open positions, the slide stops (see FIG. 143 (b)). The stop of the slide at this open position is performed at at least one of the slit 3536b of the second lower arm 3536, the slit 3538b of the second upper arm 3538, and the slit 3541c of the second opening / closing arm 3541, at the end of the long hole. The slide is regulated by the lower arm press 3537, the upper arm press 3539, and the opening / closing arm press 3542 abutting on each other.

  Therefore, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 includes the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 in the closed position. Is located in front of the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the second fixed decorative lens 3533 is almost invisible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532. Decoration is visible. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are separated from each other, and The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3533 becomes visible.

  In addition, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 causes the LED of the back upper second decorative substrate 3534 to emit light appropriately, so that the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the second fixed decorative lens are provided. 3533 can be illuminated as appropriate. Specifically, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the closed position, when the LED of the second upper decorative substrate 3534 emits light, the light passes through the second fixed decorative lens 3533. The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 can be illuminated. On the other hand, when the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 are in the open position and the LED of the second upper decorative substrate 3534 emits light, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable Only the second fixed decorative lens 3533 facing from between the decorative lens 3532 can be illuminated.

[5-9f-3. Back upper third decorative body unit]
Next, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 in the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 144 to 147. FIG. 144 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit in the back upper movable effect unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit viewed from the back. FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit viewed from the front and FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper third decorative body unit viewed from the back. FIG. 147 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the drive system when the back upper third decorative body unit is in the closed position, and FIG. 147 (b) is the drive system when the back upper third decorative body unit is in the open position. It is explanatory drawing shown from the front. The rear upper third decorative body unit 3550 of the rear upper movable effect unit 3500 has a rear end near the end opposite to the rear upper second decorative body unit 3530 in the longitudinal direction of the rear upper rotating base unit 3570 (horizontal position). (In the vicinity of the left end at the time of (1)), it is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The back upper third decorative body unit 3550 includes a third left movable decorative lens 3551 and a third right movable decorative lens 3552 that are formed with decorations such that predetermined characters are formed in one-to-one pairs and have a light-transmitting property. A third fixed decorative lens 3553 which is disposed on the rear side of the three left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 and has a predetermined decoration and has transparency, and a third fixed decorative lens 3553 A third upper decorative board 3554, which is disposed on the side and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and is attached to the rear side of the third fixed decorative lens 3553 so as to cover the rear side of the third upper decorative board 3554. And a third decorative base 3555 in the form of a flat plate. Note that a decoration imitating lightning is formed on the third fixed decorative lens 3553.

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 extends in the left-right direction at a lower portion on the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 and has a left end on the left outer side of the third decorative body base 3555 and a third left movable decorative lens 3551. A third lower arm 3556 having a rack gear 3556a extending left and right on the upper side thereof, a slit 3556b penetrating back and forth below the rack gear 3556a and extending left and right, and a third lower arm 3556 A lower arm presser 3557 attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 through the slit 3556b, and cooperating with the third decorative body base 3555 to slidably mount the third lower arm 3556 in the left-right direction; It has.

  In addition, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 extends in the left-right direction at the upper part on the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555, and the right end is the third right movable decorative lens 3552 on the right outside of the third decorative body base 3555. And a third upper arm 3558 having a rack gear 3558a extending left and right on the lower side, and a slit 3558b extending left and right through the front and rear above the rack gear 3558a. An upper arm presser 3559 attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 through the slit 3558b and cooperating with the third decorative body base 3555 to attach the third upper arm 3558 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Have.

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 includes a large-diameter transmission gear portion 3560a that meshes with the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558, and a rear surface of the transmission gear portion 3560a. A third opening / closing gear member 3560 having a small-diameter drive gear portion 3560b formed integrally and rotatably attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 is provided.

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is a flat plate-like extending vertically on the left side in the front view of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 on the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555, and has a third opening / closing gear member on the right side. A third opening / closing arm 3561 having a vertically extending driving rack gear 3561a meshing with a driving gear portion 3560b of a 3560, a slit 3561c penetrating back and forth near the left side, and a slit 3561c of the third opening / closing arm 3561. An opening / closing arm presser 3562 attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 and cooperating with the third decorative body base 3555 to attach the third opening / closing arm 3561 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. .

  Further, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has a left end attached to the third lower arm 3556 and a right end attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555, so that the third lower arm 3556 can be seen from the right in front view. A third opening / closing spring 3563 urged to move toward the third opening / closing member 3560, and a third attachment base 3564 attached to the rear side of the third decorative body base 3555 so as to cover the rear side of the third opening / closing gear member 3560. And The third attachment base 3564 is attached to a third drive link gear member 3578 of the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 described later.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 will be described in detail. The back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is located between a closed position where the left and right third left movable decorative lenses 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 approach each other and is in an open position where they are separated from each other. It is formed so as to slide in the left-right direction.

  In the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, a third upper arm 3558 to which a third right movable decorative lens 3552 is mounted is disposed above a third lower arm 3556 to which a third left movable decorative lens 3551 is mounted. And each is mounted so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. In the third lower arm 3556, a rack gear 3556a extending left and right is provided upward, and in the third upper arm 3558, a rack gear 3558a extending left and right is provided downward. The rack gear 3556a of the arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558 face each other. Then, between the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is connected to the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558. Each is engaged. Thus, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 (transmission gear portion 3560a) is rotated, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 can be slid in mutually different left and right directions.

  Therefore, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative via the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558. When the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated clockwise in front view, the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558 can be slid in a direction in which the lens 3552 approaches each other (a direction of the closed position). , The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be slid in directions away from each other (in the direction of the open position).

  In the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 has a drive gear portion 3560b that rotates integrally with the transmission gear portion 3560a, and extends vertically to mesh with the drive gear portion 3560b. A third opening / closing arm 3561 having a drive rack gear 3561a is provided. Since the third opening / closing arm 3561 is mounted so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates, it slides in the vertical direction. Then, since the third opening / closing arm 3561 is disposed on the left side in the front view of the third opening / closing gear member 3560, when the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, it slides downward, When the third opening / closing gear member 3560 is rotated clockwise in front view, it slides upward.

  In other words, when the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid downward, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 Can be slid in a direction approaching each other (a direction of the closed position). On the other hand, when the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid upward, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates clockwise in a front view, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 mutually move. It can be slid in the separating direction (the direction of the open position).

  Since the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 has the third opening / closing spring 3563 which urges the third lower arm 3556 to move rightward, a force acts on the third opening / closing arm 3561. When not performed (in a normal state), the third lower arm 3556 is slid rightward by the urging force of the third opening / closing spring 3563, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative The lens 3552 is in a closed position where the lens 3552 is in contact with each other. In this closed position, the transmission gear portion 3560a of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 meshes with the vicinity of the left end of the rack gear 3556a of the third lower arm 3556 and the vicinity of the right end of the rack gear 3558a of the third upper arm 3558. Are engaged. In this state, the drive gear portion 3560b of the third opening / closing gear member 3560 meshes with the vicinity of the upper end of the driving rack gear 3561a of the third opening / closing arm 3561 (see FIG. 147 (a)).

  When the third opening / closing arm 3561 is slid upward from this closed position so as to oppose the urging force of the third opening / closing spring 3563, the third opening / closing gear member 3560 rotates clockwise in front view, and The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 slide in directions away from each other via the third lower arm 3556 and the third upper arm 3558. When the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 reach the open positions, the slide stops (see FIG. 147 (b)). The stop of the slide at the open position is performed at at least one of the slit 3556b of the third lower arm 3556, the slit 3558b of the third upper arm 3558, and the slit 3561c of the third opening / closing arm 3561, at the end of the long hole. The lower arm presser 3557, the upper arm presser 3559, and the opening / closing arm presser 3562 abut on each other to restrict the slide.

  Therefore, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 includes the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. Is located in front of the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 is almost invisible from the front, and a predetermined character is formed by the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552. Decoration is visible. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are separated from each other and the third movable decorative lens 3551 is located between them. The decoration of the fixed decorative lens 3553 becomes visible.

  In addition, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 makes the LED of the back upper third decorative substrate 3554 emit light appropriately, so that the third left movable decorative lens 3551, the third right movable decorative lens 3552, and the third fixed decorative lens are provided. 3553 can be luminously decorated as appropriate. Specifically, when the LED on the back upper third decorative substrate 3554 emits light when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the closed position, the light passes through the third fixed decorative lens 3553. The third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 can be illuminated. On the other hand, when the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are in the open position and the LED on the third upper decorative board 3554 emits light, the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3551 are turned on. Only the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing the decorative lens 3552 can be illuminated.

[5-9f-4. Rotating base unit on the back]
Next, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 of the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 to 152. FIG. 148 (a) is a perspective view of the back upper rotating base unit in the back upper movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 148 (b) is a perspective view of the back upper rotating base unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 149 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper rotating base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the back upper rotating base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 151 is an explanatory diagram showing the gear configuration of the rear upper rotation base unit from the front. FIG. 152 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the state where the operating lever in the upper back rotating base unit is in the operating position, and FIG. 152 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the state where the operating lever is in the non-operating position.

  The back upper rotation base unit 3570 of the back upper movable effecting unit 3500 is attached to the front surface of the movable unit in the back elevating unit so as to be rotatable around an axis that extends in the front-rear direction. The second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are mounted so as to be relatively rotatable around axes extending in the front-rear direction, respectively.

  The back upper rotation base unit 3570 extends in parallel to a plane orthogonal to the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and has a first hole 3571a penetrating front and rear in the center in the longitudinal direction, and front and rear portions near both ends in the longitudinal direction, respectively. The second and third holes 3571b and 3571c penetrating through the first and third holes 3571a, and the cylindrical portion protrudes rearward from the outer periphery of the first hole 3571a and is rotatably mounted on the movable side unit 3610 of the back elevation unit 3600. It has a back-up rotating base with 3571d. The first hole 3571a (the inner diameter of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d) is formed to have a size that allows the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 to pass therethrough. The second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are formed to be slightly smaller than the first hole 3571a and have the same size as each other. Further, the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c are formed near the right end and near the left end, respectively, when viewed from the front when the upper back rotating base 3571 extends horizontally (at the horizontal position). I have. In the following, a description will be given of a state in which the upper back rotating base 3571 extends horizontally.

  The upper back rotation base unit 3570 includes a rotation base driven gear 3572 attached to the rear side of the upper back rotation base 3571 and extending in a semicircular shape concentrically with the center of the first hole 3571a. The rotation-based driven gear 3572 is formed in the form of an upper half with respect to the ring having the central axis extended back and forth, and gear teeth are formed on the outer peripheral surface. The rotation base driven gear 3572 is mounted such that a gap is formed between the rotation base driven gear 3572 and the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d. The rotation base driven gear 3572 meshes with a rotation base drive gear 3614 of the movable unit 3610 of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600 described later.

  In addition, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is formed into an annular shaft portion 3573a rotatably inserted from the front into the second hole 3571b of the back upper rotation base 3571, and a concentric fan shape from the front end of the shaft portion 3573a. A second drive link gear member 3573 having a second link gear portion 3573b formed thereon and having a front surface to which the rear surface of the second mounting base 3544 of the second upper decorative body unit 3530 is mounted; A pressing member 3574 attached to the rear side of the second drive link gear member 3573 from the rear side of the base 3571 and having a diameter larger than that of the second hole 3571b. In the second drive link gear member 3573, the second link gear portion 3573b is formed to have a larger diameter than the second hole 3571b. Further, the second link gear portion 3573b is formed at the same pitch as the center link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600 with the same diameter. The second drive link gear member 3573 has a pressing member 3574 attached to the rear side of the shaft portion 3573a inserted into the second hole 3571b, whereby the movement of the second drive link gear member 3573 in the forward and backward directions with respect to the second hole 3571b is restricted. It is rotatably mounted in the state.

  Further, the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 on the left side in the front view of the second hole 3571b, and the second link gear portion of the second drive link gear member 3573. The second link gear 3575 in the form of a spur gear meshing with 3573b, and the second link gear 3575 for second rotation is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper back base 3571 on the left side in front view of the first link gear 3575 for second use. A second sprocket-shaped second link gear 3576 meshing with the second first link gear 3575, and rotatable rearward on the left side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 on the left side in the front view of the second second link gear 3576. And a spur gear-shaped third link gear for second use 3577 meshed with the second link gear for second use 3576.

  The second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the second first link gear 3575 mesh with each other through an opening formed in the back upper rotation base 3571. The left end side of the second third link gear 3577 is close to the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d in the upper back rotating base 3571. The second third link gear 3577 meshes with a central link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 of the back elevating unit 3600 described later.

  In addition, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is formed into an annular shaft portion 3578a rotatably inserted from the front into the third hole 3571c of the upper back rotation base 3571, and a concentric fan shape from the front end of the shaft portion 3578a. A third drive link gear member 3578 having a third link gear portion 3578b formed thereon and having a front surface to which a rear surface of a third mounting base 3564 of the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 is mounted; A pressing member 3579 attached to the rear side of the third drive link gear member 3578 from the rear side of the base 3571 and having a diameter larger than that of the third hole 3571c. In the third drive link gear member 3578, the third link gear portion 3578b is formed to have a larger diameter than the third hole 3571c. Further, the third link gear portion 3578b is formed with the same diameter and the same pitch as the central link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600. The third drive link gear member 3578 has its pressing member 3579 attached to the rear side of the shaft portion 3578a inserted into the third hole 3571c, whereby the movement of the third drive link gear member 3578 in the forward and backward directions with respect to the third hole 3571c is restricted. It is rotatably mounted in the state.

  Further, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotatably attached to the front side of the back upper rotation base 3571 on the right side of the third hole 3571c in front view, and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578. The third link gear 3580 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first link gear 3580, and the third link gear 3580 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper back base 3571 on the right side in front view of the third link gear 3580. The second link gear 3581 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first link gear 3580 for use, and the rear link base 3571 on the right side of the third link gear 3581 can be rotatable rearward on the right side in front view. And a third gear third link gear 3582 in the form of a spur gear, which is attached and meshes with the second gear link 3581 for the third gear.

  The third first link gear 3580 and the third second link gear 3581 mesh with each other through an opening formed in the upper back rotation base 3571. The third link gear for third use 3582 has a right end approaching the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the mounting cylinder portion 3571d in the upper back rotating base 3571. The third third link gear 3582 meshes with a central link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 of the back elevating unit 3600 described later.

  In addition, the upper back rotating base unit 3570 is attached to the lower rear side of the lower upper rotating base 3571 between the first hole 3571a and the second hole 3571b, and the rotation shaft passes through the upper back rotating base 3571. A working lever drive motor 3584 protruding forward, a spur gear-shaped action lever drive gear 3584 attached to the rotating shaft of the action lever drive motor 3584, and an action lever drive gear 3584 meshed with the back upper rotation base A working lever pinion gear 3585 which is rotatably mounted on the front surface of the working lever pinion 3571, and a working lever rack gear 3586a which meshes with the working lever pinion gear 3585 from above and extends left and right; An action lever 3586 attached to the front surface of the rotation base 3571 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction; The lever 3586 restricts the forward movement of the operating lever 3586 and is attached to the front surface of the rear upper rotating base 3571. The operating lever presser 3587 is attached to the front surface of the upper rear rotating base 3571. And an action lever movement detecting sensor 3588 for detecting the movement of the moving lever.

  The operating lever 3586 is connected to the horizontally long rectangular main body 3586b having an operating lever rack gear 3586a formed on the lower side, and the upper side of the main body 3586b, and extends in a strip shape to the left from the main body 3586b. A slide attachment portion 3586c attached to the upper front surface of the back upper rotating base 3571 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction; A lock piece 3586d that can be inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a and the vertical lock hole 3525b, a first extension 3586e extending downward from the main body 3586b, and a lock piece 3586d from the lower end of the first extension 3586e. The first action portion 3586f that also projects to the left and the upper side of the main body portion 3586b A second right extension 3586g connected to the vicinity of the end and extending rightward, and a second extension extending downward from the right end of the second right extension 3586g to a position slightly higher than the first working portion 3586f. A second lower extending portion 3586h, a second operating portion 3586i extending leftward from near the lower end of the left side of the second lower extending portion 3586h, and a lower end of the first extending portion 3586e from the left end of the slide mounting portion 3586c. A third extending portion 3586j extending downward to substantially the same height as that of the third extending portion 3586j, and a third working portion 3586k extending leftward from near the lower end of the left side of the third extending portion 3586j (FIG. 152).

  Further, the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 includes a front gear cover 3589 attached to the front surface of the rear upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the front surfaces of the operation lever drive gear 3584 and the operation lever pinion gear 3585, and a rear upper rotation base 3571. The upper back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590, which is attached to the lower side of the first hole 3571a on the front surface and detects the rotational position of the back upper rotation base unit 3570, and the front side of the back upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590. A back upper rotating base relay board 3591 attached to the front surface of the back upper rotating base 3571 so as to cover, and a board mounted to the front surface of the back upper rotating base 3571 so as to cover the front surface of the back upper rotating base relay board 3591 And a cover 3592.

  The upper back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation position of the upper back rotation base unit 3570 by detecting the rotation detection piece 3611 d of the movable side base 3611 in the movable side unit 3610 of the back elevation unit 3600. It is. The back upper rotation base relay board 3591 includes a back upper rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable side unit 3610 in the back elevation unit 3600, a back upper second decorative substrate 3534, a back upper third decorative substrate 3554, an action lever drive motor 3584, The connection with the action lever movement detection sensor 3588 and the back upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 is relayed.

  Further, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is provided with the back upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the rear side of the second first link gear 3575, the second second link gear 3576, and the second third link gear 3577. A rear right gear cover 3593 attached to the rear side, a third second link gear 3581, and a third third link gear 3582 are attached to the rear side of the rear upper rotation base 3571 so as to cover the rear side. A rear left gear cover 3594 and a motor cover 3595 attached to the rear side of the upper rear rotation base 3571 so as to cover the lower side of the operating lever drive motor 3581.

  Subsequently, the movement of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 will be described. In the back-upside rotation base unit 3570, the mounting tube portion 3571 d protruding rearward of the back-upside rotation base 3571 is inserted into the shaft tube portion 3611 a of the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610 of the back up / down unit 3600. Accordingly, the movable unit 3610 is attached so as to rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the front surface of the movable-side unit 3610. Note that the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is restricted from moving forward by a first mounting shaft member 3525 of a back upper first decorative body unit 3510 that penetrates the mounting cylinder portion 3571d from the front and is mounted on the front surface of the movable unit. Is done. In addition, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is provided on the front surface of the second drive link gear member 3573 rotatably attached to the second hole 3571b of the upper back rotation base 3571, and the second rotation base unit 3570 in the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 is provided. By attaching the rear surface of the two attachment bases 3544, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 can be attached so as to be rotatable relative to the back upper rotation base 3571. Further, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is provided on the front surface of the third drive link gear member 3578 which is rotatably attached to the third hole 3571c of the upper back rotation base 3571. By attaching the rear surface of the three attachment bases 3564, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 can be attached so as to be rotatable relative to the back upper rotation base 3571.

  When the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the front surface of the movable side unit 3610 in the rear elevation unit 3600, the rotation base driven gear 3572 meshes with the rotation base drive gear 3614 of the movable unit 3610. At the same time, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 mesh with the central link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 (see FIG. 163). Then, when the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated by driving the rotation drive motor 3612 on the back side of the movable unit 3610, the rotation base unit 3570 is rotated through the rotation base driven gear 3572, and the first hole 3571a (attachment). It rotates around an axis extending forward and backward about the axis of the cylindrical portion 3571d). The upper back rotation base unit 3570 has a horizontal position where the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the first hole 3571a, the second hole 3571b, and the third hole 3571c are arranged) extends horizontally, and a vertical position which extends vertically. It can rotate 90 degrees between the positions. In the horizontal position, the second hole 3571b is located to the right of the first hole 3571a, and in the vertical position, the second hole 3571b is located below the first hole 3571a. At this horizontal position, the upper back rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 detects the rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable unit 3610 in the back elevation unit 3600.

  When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates between the horizontal position and the vertical position around the first hole 3571a, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 are moved by the movable unit 3610. Move around the center link gear 3611b. At this time, since the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 are engaged with the central link gear 3611b, when revolving around the central link gear 3611b, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 revolve around the central link gear 3611b. The gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 rotate by themselves, and each of them rotates relatively to the rear upper rotation base 3571.

  Then, when the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 rotate, their rotation is transmitted from the second third link gear 3577 to the second second link gear 3576 and the second The second drive link gear member 3573 is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573b via the second first link gear 3575, and the second drive link gear member 3573 rotates in the opposite direction to the second third link gear 3577. The third link gear 3581 is transmitted to the third link gear portion 3578b through the third second link gear 3581 and the third first link gear 3580, and the third drive link gear member 3578 is moved from the third link gear 3581 to the third drive link gear member 3578. Rotates in a direction opposite to that of the third link gear 3582.

  At this time, since the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b have the same diameter as the center link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610, the rotation of the back upper rotation base 3571 and the center link gear 3611b is performed. The angle is the same as the rotation angle of the upper back rotation base 3571 and the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b. Since the central link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610 is non-rotatably attached, when the rear upper rotation base 3571 rotates, the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b move forward and backward. Instead of rotating about the extended axis, it revolves around the central link gear 3611b. That is, the upper back rotating base unit 3570 holds the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 in the first hole 3571a (movable side It can revolve around the center link gear 3611b) of the unit 3610.

  In addition, when the operating lever drive motor 3583 rotates the operating lever pinion gear 3585 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 moves the operating lever 3586 to the left via the operating lever rack gear 3586a. When the operation lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise in a front view, the operation lever 3586 can be moved rightward via the operation lever rack gear 3586a.

  More specifically, the main body 3586b is located on the right side of the first hole 3571a in the upper back rotation base 3571 in a front view in a state where the operation lever 3586 is assembled to the upper back rotation base unit 3570. The slide mounting portion 3586c of the operation lever 3586 extends leftward to the vicinity of the third hole 3571c so as to straddle the upper and outer sides of the first hole 3571a. The first action portion 3586f is located below the first hole 3571a. The second right extension 3586g extends to the vicinity of the second hole 3571b above the second hole 3571b. The second lower extension 3586h extends so that the lower end is located below the second hole 3571b. The second action portion 3586i is located at a height near the lower part of the second hole 3571b. The lower end of the third extension 3586j extends below the third hole 3571c. Therefore, the third action portion 3586k is located below the third hole 3571c.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (a), when the operation lever 3586 is moved to the leftmost position (state of the operation position), the lock piece 3586d protruding leftward from the left side of the main body 3586b in a front view. Are protruding into the first hole 3571a. In this state, the left end of the first working portion 3586f is located slightly to the left of the center of the first hole 3571a. The left end of the second action portion 3586i is located to the left of the second hole 3571b. Furthermore, the left end of the third action portion 3586k is located near the right end of the third hole 3571c. In this state, the lower end of the third extension 3586j of the operation lever 3586 is detected by the operation lever movement detection sensor 3588.

  On the other hand, in a state where the operation lever 3586 is moved to the rightmost position (a state of the non-operation position), the lock piece 3586d and the first operation portion 3586f are located to the right of the first hole 3571a. The left end of the second action portion 3586i is located slightly to the left with respect to the center of the second hole 3571b. Further, the left end of the third action portion 3586k is located to the right of the third hole 3571c. In this state, the lower end of the third extension 3586j of the operation lever 3586 is separated from the operation lever movement detection sensor 3588, and is in a non-detection state.

  The operation lever 3586 is moved to the operation position, and the lock piece 3586d is inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 by moving the operation lever 3586 to the operation position. By doing so, the rotation of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 with respect to the movable side unit 3610 of the back elevation unit 3600 can be restricted (locked). Therefore, when the operating lever 3586 is moved to the non-operating position, the lock piece 3586d comes out of the horizontal lock hole 3525a or the vertical lock hole 3525b, and rotates upward and downward with respect to the movable side unit 3610 of the rear elevation unit 3600. The base unit 3570 can be rotated.

  In addition, the left end of each of the first operating portion 3586f, the second operating portion 3586i, and the third operating portion 3586k is connected to the first opening / closing arm 3521 of the first decorative body unit 3510 on the back. The second opening / closing arm 3541 of the upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the third opening / closing arm 3561 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 can be brought into contact with each other. Therefore, when the operating lever 3586 is moved to the operating position when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated and positioned in the vertically extended state, the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3541 The arm 3561 can be slid upward.

[5-9f-5. Back elevation unit]
Next, the back elevating / lowering unit 3600 of the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 153 to 158. FIG. 153 (a) is a front perspective view of the back up / down unit in the back top movable effect unit, and FIG. 153 (b) is a perspective view of the back up / down unit from behind. FIG. 154 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear elevating unit disassembled into a movable unit and a fixed unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the device as viewed from behind after being disassembled. FIG. 155 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit of the back elevating unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 155 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the movable side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed side unit of the back up / down unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the fixed side unit of the back up / down unit viewed from the back. FIG. 158 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing from the front the drive system when the movable unit of the back-up / down unit is in the up position, and FIG. 158 (b) is the drive system when the movable unit of the back-up / down unit is in the down position. It is explanatory drawing which shows a system from the front.

  The back elevating / lowering unit 3600 is attached between the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 above the opening 3010a on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The back elevating unit 3600 includes a movable unit 3610 on which a back upper first decorative body unit 3510 and a back upper rotating base unit 3570 are mounted on a front surface, and a fixed unit mounted on a back box 3010a by moving the movable unit 3610 up and down. 3650.

  First, as shown in FIG. 155, the movable side unit 3610 of the back elevating / lowering unit 3600 is attached to a substantially rectangular movable side base 3611 extending left and right in a front view and an upper right corner on the front surface of the movable side base 3611. A back-side rotation drive motor 3612 having a cage rotation shaft protruding rearward through the movable-side base 3611, a rotation drive gear 3613 attached to the rotation shaft of the back-side rotation drive motor 3612, and a rotation drive gear 3613. A rotatable base drive gear 3614 meshed with the rotatable base driven gear 3572 of the upper back rotary base unit 3570 and rotatably attached to the front surface of the movable base 3611.

  The movable unit 3610 includes a motor cover 3615 attached to the front surface of the movable base 3611 so as to cover the rear upper rotation drive motor 3612, and a flat base attached to the rear side of the movable base 3611. A cover 3616 and a movable relay board 3617 attached to the front surface of the base cover 3616 are provided.

  The movable-side base 3611 of the movable-side unit 3610 is formed at the front end of the outer peripheral surface of the shaft cylindrical portion 3611a and the shaft cylindrical portion 3611a that protrudes cylindrically from the lower portion at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. A central link gear 3611b that meshes with the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 of the base unit 3570; And a rotation detecting piece 3611d attached to the lower side of the shaft cylinder portion 3611a on the front surface and detected by the upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the upper rotation base unit 3570. 158).

  The inner diameter of the shaft cylindrical portion 3611a of the movable base 3611 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the mounting cylindrical portion 3571d of the upper back rotating base 3571 in the upper rear rotating base unit 3570, and the mounting cylindrical portion 3571d is rotated. It can be inserted as much as possible. The center link gear 3611b has the same diameter as the second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578 in the upper back rotating base unit 3570. At the same pitch.

  The movable-side relay board 3617 includes a back-side relay board 3659 of the fixed-side unit 3650, a first-side decorative board 3514 of the back-side first decorative body unit 3510, and a back-side rotary base relay board 3591 of the back-side rotary base unit 3570. , And the connection with the rear upper rotation drive motor 3612. The elevating slide rail 3656 of the fixed unit 3650 is attached to the left and right ends on the rear surface of the base cover 3617. The lower end of the elevating spring 3657 of the fixed unit 3650 is attached to the rear side of the base cover 3617.

  As shown in FIG. 156 and FIG. 157, the fixed side unit 3650 of the back elevating / lowering unit 3600 includes a substantially square fixed side base 3651 attached to the inside of the back box 3010 and extending right and left as viewed from the front, and a fixed side base 3651. A spur gear-shaped elevating gear portion 3652a, which is rotatably mounted around an axis extending forward and rearward at the center of the front surface, and projects forward in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the outer periphery on the front surface of the elevating gear portion 3652a. An elevating drive pin 3652b slidably inserted into an elevating slit 3611c of the movable base 3611, and an elevating rotary body 3652 having an elevating detection piece 3652c extending outward from the elevating gear portion 3652a in a fan shape; An elevating drive gear 3653 meshing with an elevating gear portion 3652a of the elevating rotary body 3652; A 3653 is provided with a backing on elevation drive motor 3654 attached to the rear surface of which the fixed-side base 3651 attached to the rotating shaft.

  The fixed unit 3650 is attached to the front surface of the fixed base 3651 and detects an elevating sensor 3655 for detecting the detecting piece 3652c of the elevating rotating body 3652. At the same time, a base cover 3616 of the movable unit 3610 is attached to the front surface, and a pair of vertically movable slide rails 3656 that can expand and contract vertically, and both left and right sides of the lower part of the front surface of the fixed base 3651 outside the pair of vertically movable slide rails 3656. And a pair of elevating springs 3657, the lower end of which is attached to the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610 and biases the movable base 3611 to move upward.

  Further, the fixed unit 3650 has an insertion slit 3658a that penetrates back and forth and extends in a semi-circular shape, and through which an elevating drive pin 3652b of the elevating rotating body 3652 can pass, a pair of elevating slide rails. The fixed-side front cover 3658 attached to the front surface of the fixed-side base 3651 so as to cover the front surface of the elevating rotary body 3652 between 3656 and the fixed-side base 3651 is attached to the rear surface of the movable-side unit 3610. The upper relay board 3659 that connects the movable relay board 3617, the back-up / down drive motor 3654, and the elevation detection sensor 3655 to the lower-right relay board 3034, and the rear side of the back-up relay board 3659. A substrate cover 3660 attached to the rear side of the fixed-side base 3651.

  Subsequently, the operation of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600 will be described. The back ascending / descending unit 3600 is rotatably inserted into the shaft tubular portion 3611a of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610, and the mounting tubular portion 3571d of the back upper rotating base 3571 of the back rotating base unit 3570 is rotatable. The rear end of the first mounting shaft member 3525 of the first upper decorative body unit 3510 is mounted on the front surface of the movable side base 3611 through the mounting cylindrical portion 3571d of the upper rear rotating base 3571. Accordingly, the movable unit 3610 rotatably mounts the upper back rotation base unit 3570 around an axis extending back and forth about the shaft cylinder 3611a (first hole 3571a) in a state in which the base unit cannot be moved forward. be able to.

  In a state where the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is attached to the movable side base 3611 of the movable side unit 3610, the rotation base drive gear 3614 is in mesh with the rotation base driven gear 3572 of the upper back rotation base unit 3570. Therefore, when the rotation base drive gear 3614 is rotated via the rotation drive gear 3613 by the driving of the back rotation drive motor 3612, the back rotation base unit 3570 is rotated about the shaft cylinder portion 3611a (first hole 3571a). Can be done. The movable unit 3610 can rotate the upper back rotation base unit 3570 by 90 degrees between a horizontally extended horizontal position and a vertically extended vertical position. The rotation detection piece 3611d of the movable base 3611 in the movable unit 3610 is detected by the upper rotation base unit rotation detection sensor 3590 of the upper rotation base unit 3570 when the upper rotation base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position. .

  In the assembled state, the movable unit 3610 can be moved only vertically with respect to the fixed unit 3650 by the pair of elevating slide rails 3656 of the fixed unit 3650 in the assembled state. ing. In the movable unit 3610, an elevating drive pin 3652 b of the elevating rotating body 3652 in the fixed unit 3650 is inserted into the elevating slit 3611 c of the movable base 3611 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. Therefore, the position of the movable unit 3610 in the vertical direction is regulated by the height position of the lifting drive pin 3652b in the lifting rotating body 3652. The movable unit 3610 is urged by a pair of elevating springs 3657 to move upward.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 158 (a), the back ascending / descending unit 3600 has an ascending / descending drive pin 3652b revolving by the rotation of the ascending / descending rotator 3652, directly above the rotation center of the ascending / descending rotator 3652. On the other hand, it is located slightly to the right, and the movable unit 3610 is in the state of the ascending position where the movable unit 3610 is located at the uppermost position by the elevating drive pin 3652b. In this state, the detection piece 3652c of the rotating rotator 3652 is detected by the lifting sensor 3655. In this state, the lifting drive pin 3652b is in contact with the right end of the lifting slit 3611c extending to the left and right of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610.

  Therefore, when the weight of the movable unit 3610 acts on the lifting drive pin 3652b, the lifting drive pin 3652b is rotated by the lifting drive pin 3652b in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Since it is in contact with the right end of the elevating slit 3611c, the elevating rotary body 3652 cannot rotate further clockwise in front view, and the movable unit 3610 is prevented from moving downward. ing. That is, the movable unit 3610 is locked at the raised position. Accordingly, the weight (load) from the movable unit 3610 does not act on the back-up / down drive motor 3654 via the up / down gear portion 3652a of the up-and-down rotating body 3652 and the up / down drive gear 3653. A load is not applied to the lifting drive motor 3654.

  When the elevating rotary body 3652 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the back elevating drive motor 3654 from the state of the elevating position, the elevating drive pin 3652b of the elevating rotary body 3652 moves to the left. The orbit moves so as to move downward, and while the elevating drive pin 3652b slides to the left in the elevating slit 3611c, the movable unit 3610 receives the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 3657 through the elevating slit 3611c. It will move downward in opposition. The elevating drive pin 3652b, which revolves when the elevating rotary body 3652 rotates counterclockwise, revolves downward beyond the same height as the rotation center of the elevating rotary body 3652, the horizontal direction of the elevating drive pin 3652b. Is changed, and moves downward while moving rightward, and slides rightward in the elevating slit 3611c.

  When the lifting drive pin 3652b is located immediately below the center of the rotating rotator 3652, the rotation of the rotating rotator 3652 is stopped, and simultaneously, the downward movement of the movable unit 3610 is stopped. Is in the lowered position where it has descended most (see FIG. 158 (b)). When the movable unit 3610 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the back-up / down drive motor 3654 is driven in the opposite direction to rotate the up-and-down rotating body 3652 clockwise in front view. Thus, it is possible to return to the ascending position. At this time, the upward movement of the movable unit 3610 is assisted by the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 3657, and the load on the back elevation drive motor 3654 is reduced.

  In this way, the back elevating / lowering unit 3600, via the movable side unit 3610, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, and the upper back rotation The base unit 3570 can be moved up and down (elevated and lowered) between a raised position and a lowered position.

[5-9f-6. Operation of the movable unit on the back]
Next, the operation of the back upper movable effect unit 3500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 to 168. FIG. 159 is an explanatory view showing a drive system for raising and lowering when the movable unit of the back elevating unit is in the ascending position in the back upper movable effecting unit. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a drive system for elevating when the side unit is at a lowered position. FIG. 161 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the action lever is in the action position when the movable unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotating base unit is in the horizontal position in the back upper movable effect unit. FIG. 9 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operating lever is in a non-operating position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the upper back rotating base unit is in the horizontal position. FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram showing a drive system of the back upper rotary base unit when the movable unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotary base unit is in the horizontal position in the upper back movable effect unit. FIG. 165 is an explanatory view showing a drive system of the back-upper rotating base unit when the movable-side unit is at the lowered position and the back-upper rotating base unit is rotated clockwise by 45 degrees from the horizontal position. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a drive system of the upper back rotation base unit when the movable unit is at the lowered position and the upper back rotation base unit is at the vertical position.

  FIG. 166 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operating lever is in the non-operating position when the movable unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotating base unit is in the vertical position in the back upper movable effecting unit, and FIG. FIG. 168 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation lever restricts rotation in the operation position when the movable side unit is in the lowered position and the back upper rotation base unit is in the vertical position in the effect unit; When the movable unit is in the lowered position and the upper back rotating base unit is in the vertical position, the operating lever acts on the upper back first decorative body unit, the upper back second decorative body unit, and the upper back third decorative body unit in the operating position. FIG.

  In the normal state, as shown in FIG. 159 and the like, the upper back movable rendering unit 3500 is in a state where the movable side unit 3610 of the back lifting / lowering unit 3600 is at the highest raised position, and the upper back rotating base unit. 3570 is in a horizontal position extending horizontally. In this state, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are arranged on the left and right sides with the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 at the center. In addition, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are provided. 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are respectively formed by the first opening / closing spring 3523, the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the third opening / closing spring 3563. Due to the urging force, they are in the closed position where they are in contact with each other.

  In this normal state, as shown in FIG. 159, the lift drive pin 3652b revolving around the fixed side unit 3650 in the back lift unit 3600 is located slightly to the right of the rotation center of the lift rotating body 3652. Thus, the movable base 3611 is in contact with the right end in a vertically extending slit 3611c extending left and right. Accordingly, the first upper decorative unit 3510, the second upper decorative unit 3530, the third upper decorative unit 3550, and the third upper decorative unit 3550 are connected to the vertical drive pins 3652b through the vertical slits 3611c of the movable unit 3610. Even if the weight (load) of the rotation base unit 3570 and the movable unit 3610 acts, the lifting drive pin 3652b cannot revolve further clockwise in front view, and moves downward under the movable unit 3610. Is restricted and locked at the raised position.

  Therefore, in a normal state, the loads of the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, the upper back rotating base unit 3570, and the movable side unit 3610 are reduced. , Does not act on the back-up / down drive motor 3654, so that no load is applied to the back-up / down drive motor 3654. In the normal state, the detection piece 3652c of the elevating rotating body 3652 that revolves the elevating drive pin 3652b is detected by the elevating sensor 3655.

  From this normal state, when the back up / down drive motor 3654 is driven to revolve the up / down drive pin 3652b of the up / down rotating body 3652 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the up / down drive pin 3652b moves in the up / down slit 3611c. When the lifting / lowering drive pin 3652b descends, the movable unit 3610 moves downward. When the vertical drive pin 3652b reaches the lowest position, the revolution of the vertical drive pin 3652b stops. As a result, the movable unit 3610 is located at the lowered position (see FIG. 160).

  By moving the movable unit 3610 of the back elevating unit 3600 to the descending position, the back upper movable effect unit 3500 can move the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decoration. The body unit 3550 and the upper back rotation base unit 3570 can be located at the upper portion on the front side of the gaming board-side effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 174).

  When moving the movable side unit 3610 of the back up / down unit 3600 between the up position and the down position, the back upper movable effect unit 3500 moves the action lever 3586 of the back upper rotary base unit 3570 to the action position. I have. When the operation lever 3586 is moved to the left operation position by the drive of the operation lever drive motor 3583, as shown in FIG. 161, the lock piece 3586d of the operation lever 3586 is moved to the back upper first decorative body unit 3510. Is inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the first mounting shaft member 3525 in the above. As a result, the operation lever 3586 cannot rotate around the first mounting shaft member 3525, and therefore, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 to which the operation lever 3586 is mounted moves to the first mounting shaft member 3525 (movable side). The rotation is locked with respect to the shaft cylinder portion 3611a) of the unit 3610. That is, the rotation of the upper back base unit 3570 is locked at the horizontal position.

  The lock piece 3586d of the action lever 3586 has a tapered tip, so that even if the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 is slightly displaced with respect to the horizontal position, the horizontal lock hole of the first mounting shaft member 3525 is not required. By inserting the back upper rotation base unit 3570 into the horizontal position by inserting it into the 3525a, the rotation can be locked.

  In the action lever 3586, although not shown, the second right extension 3586g of the action lever 3586 abuts on the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 from above. At the same time, the third extension 3586j (the left end of the slide attachment portion 3586c) of the action lever 3586 is in contact with a predetermined position of the third upper arm 3558 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 from the right. Thereby, rotation of the back upper rotation base 3571 around the axis of the second hole 3571b in the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 and rotation of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 by the action lever 3586 are performed. The rotation of the base 3571 around the axis about the third hole 3571c is prevented. Therefore, by moving (moving up and down) the movable unit 3610 of the back elevating / lowering unit 3600 in the vertical direction, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, and the back upper rotating base unit 3570 are moved. Even if the vibration is applied, the action of the action lever 3586 located at the action position prevents the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the back upper rotating base unit 3570 from swinging. ing.

  Via the movable side unit 3610 of the back elevating unit 3600, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the back upper rotating base unit 3570, When the operating lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise in the front view by the operating lever drive motor 3584 through the operating lever drive gear 3584 in the state where the operating lever is driven to the lower position, the operating lever pinion gear 3585 meshes with the operating lever pinion gear 3585. The operation lever 3586a in the horizontal state is moved to the right non-operation position by the operation lever rack gear 3586a, and the lock piece 3586d comes out of the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 162). Thereby, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 rotates around the mounting shaft portion 3525c of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (the first hole 3571a of the upper back rotation base 3571, the shaft cylinder portion 3611a of the movable base 3611). Will be able to

  As shown in FIG. 163, in the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 of the rear upper movable effect unit 3500, the rotation base driven gear 3572 meshes with the rotation base drive gear 3614 of the movable unit 3610, and The third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 mesh with the center link gear 3611b of the movable base 3611 of the movable unit 3610.

  Then, with the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 in the horizontal position and the operation lever 3586 in the non-operation position, the rear upper rotation drive motor 3612 of the movable unit 3610 is driven to view the rotation base drive gear 3614 in front view. When rotated in the counterclockwise direction, the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is connected to the center link gear 3611b (the first hole 3571a, the mounting cylinder) via the rotation base driven gear 3572 meshing with the rotation base drive gear 3614. It rotates in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front about the axis of the portion 3571d) (see FIG. 164). At this time, since the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back upper rotation base unit 3570, the back upper rotation base It does not rotate with the unit 3570.

  When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates around the center link gear 3611b, the second upper third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3577 meshed with the center link gear 3611b. The link gear 3582 rotates while revolving around the central link gear 3611b, and rotates clockwise with respect to the rear upper rotation base 3571. When the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3582 rotate, their rotation is transmitted to the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b, and the second drive The link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 rotate in the counterclockwise direction with respect to the upper back rotating base 3571, respectively. That is, when the upper back rotating base unit 3570 is rotated clockwise in front view, the second upper and lower holes 3571b and 3571c at both longitudinal ends of the upper back rotating base 3571 are rotatably mounted. Drive link gear member 3573 and third drive link gear member 3578 revolve clockwise around first hole 3571a, and second drive link gear member 3573 and third drive link gear member 3578. Rotates (self-rotates) in the second hole 3571b and the third hole 3571c of the back upper rotating base 3571 in the counterclockwise direction, respectively.

  The second link gear portion 3573b of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third link gear portion 3578b of the third drive link gear member 3578 have the same diameter as the central link gear 3611b of the movable unit 3610. The rotation angle between the upper back rotation base 3571 and the center link gear 3611b is the same as the rotation angle between the upper back rotation base 3571 and the second link gear portion 3573b and the third link gear portion 3578b. When the back upper rotation base 3571 is rotated around the center link gear 3611b, the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578 keep the rotation direction constant, and the center link gear Revolve around 3611b (see FIGS. 164 and 165). And, since the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are attached to the front surfaces of the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, respectively. When the back-upper rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back-upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the back-upper third decorative body unit 3550 hold the upper-back first decorative body unit 3510 in a state in which the vertical direction is kept constant. It will revolve around.

  When the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is in the horizontal position, the back upper movable decoration unit 3500 has the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 arranged on the right side of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and Since the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is disposed on the left side of one decorative body unit 3510, when the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is rotated clockwise in front view to the vertical position, The second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are placed on the lower upper side and upper side of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, respectively, with their vertical directions kept as they are (FIG. 165). See). Therefore, when the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged in order from the top. . In this state, the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are each in the closed position, and are centered in the left-right center of the game area 5a. It is positioned so as to cross the substantially entire height within the frame of the accessory 2500 (see FIG. 176).

  In a state where the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 is rotated from the horizontal position to the vertical position, as shown in FIG. 3586d faces upward. In this state, when the operating lever drive motor 3583 is driven to rotate the operating lever pinion gear 3585 in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, the operating lever 3586 is moved upward to move from the non-operating position to the operating position. The lock piece 3586d of the action lever 3586 is inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525 (see FIG. 167). As a result, the rotation of the upper back rotation base unit 3570 is locked at the vertical position.

  When the operating lever 3586 is moved from the non-operating position to the operating position in a state where the upper back rotating base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the rear upper movable effecting unit 3500 moves the operating lever 3586 upward. Each tip (upper end) of the first action portion 3586f, the second action portion 3586i, and the third action portion 3586k of the 3586 is a receiving boss of the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the back upper first decorative body unit 3510. 3521b, the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the lower end of the third opening / closing arm 3561 in the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are respectively brought into contact with the lower side to perform the first opening / closing. The arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 are moved upward.

  Then, when the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 each move upward, the first left movable of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 which has been in the closed position. The decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532 of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the third left of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 The movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 move outward in the left-right direction so as to be away from each other, and are in an open position (see FIG. 168).

  Thus, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 in the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 in the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 The first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from between the one left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative in the back upper second decorative body unit 3530. The second fixed decorative lenses 3533 facing the space between the lens 3532 and the second fixed decorative lens 3533 are arranged in a straight line from top to bottom. In this state, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are each in the open position, and are centered in the left-right center of the game area 5a. The first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 are positioned so as to extend longitudinally over substantially the entire height within the frame of the accessory 2500. They are vertically arranged with substantially the same width so as to be continuous with the lower front lower central lens 3131 (see FIG. 177).

  In addition, in order to return the back upper movable effect unit 3500 to the normal state, it is possible to return to the normal state by performing the reverse operation.

  In addition, the back upper movable rendering unit 3500 includes a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the first upper decorative body unit 3510, and a second left movable decorative lens of the second upper decorative body unit 3530. 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 are in the closed position where they are in contact with each other, respectively. Can show decorations of different characters, and when the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged side by side from left to right, One character is horizontally written with a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and the player is made to recognize the concept of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible. When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged from top to bottom. The logo according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is written vertically, and the player can recognize the logo even in this state.

  As described above, according to the back upper movable effect unit 3500, the relative positions of the back upper rotating base unit 3570 with respect to the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550. The upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back side by the operating lever 3586 that moves between the operating position and the non-operating position according to a specific rotation position (horizontal position or vertical position). The different effects of the rotation lock (first action) and the movement to the open position (second action) can be exerted on the upper third decorative body unit 3550, so that different effects can be shown to the player. Can be made hard to get tired of, and a player can be entertained, and a decrease in interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

[5-9 g. Movable production unit under the back]
Next, the lower back movable effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 169 and the like. FIG. 169 (a) is a front view of the lower back movable effect unit of the back unit, FIG. 169 (b) is a rear view of the lower back movable effect unit, and FIG. FIG. 5 is a rear view showing the unit in a raised state. The lower back movable effect unit 3700 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the rear wall in the back box 3010. The lower back movable rendering unit 3700 includes a lower back movable decorative unit 3710 having a predetermined three-dimensional decoration, and a back mounted in the back box 3010 and moving the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 up and down. And a lower drive unit 3750.

  The lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is formed with a three-dimensional decoration in which a plurality of gates are arranged in a row on the left and right under a roof extending left and right, and a part of each gate penetrates back and forth. A main body 3711, a plurality of lower back door members 3712, which are attached to each gate portion in the lower back decorative body main body 3711 so as to open and close forward in a double-opening manner, and a lower back door member 3712. A lower back decorative body base 3713 which is attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body main body 3711 and extends left and right, and is mounted slidably in the left and right direction at a lower front part of the lower back decorative body base 3713. A lower opening / closing slider 3714 for hinge-rotating the lower back door member 3712 on the left side in a front view of a pair of the plurality of lower back door members 3712, and a left-right direction on an upper front surface of the lower back decoration base 3713. Slidably the back under the door member 3712 viewed from the front right side in mounted and are pairwise multiple subplantar door member 3712 comprises a, opening and closing the slider 3715 on which the hinge rotates.

  In addition, the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body base 3713, and opens and closes to slide the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 in mutually different horizontal directions. One end is attached to the upper end of the body 3716 and the opening / closing rotating body 3716 and the other end is attached to the lower back decoration base 3713, and each of the lower and lower door members via the lower opening and closing slider 3714 and the upper opening and closing slider 3715 And a door closing spring 3717 for urging the opening / closing rotary member 3716 so that the hinge 3712 rotates in the closing direction. The door closing spring 3717 urges the opening / closing rotator 3716 to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in rear view.

  Further, the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is disposed on the rear side of the lower back decorative lens 3718 (see FIG. 179) attached to the rear side of the lower back decorative body main body 3712 and the lower back decorative lens 3718. A lower back decorative board 3719 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a wiring cable 3701 attached to the back side of the lower back decorative body base 3713 and connecting the lower back decorative board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3775. And an upper wiring cover 3720 that can guide the The distribution cable 3701 is a flexible flat cable. The upper wiring cover 3720 is attached to the lower back decoration base 3713 to form a downwardly open space that can accommodate the wiring cable 3701. The upper wiring cover 3720 has a curved upper guiding portion 3720a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side in a rear view.

  The lower back drive unit 3750 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010, penetrates back and forth to the upper left corner in front view, extends right and left, and shortens upward from the right end. A lower back drive base 3751 having a link slit 3751a extending therefrom, and a back surface mounted movably up and down on the front surface of the back lower drive base 3751 and having a lower back decoration unit 3710 mounted on the upper portion. A lower elevating base 3752, a pair of elevating arms 3753 rotatably mounted near the left and right ends on the front surface of the lower back driving base 3751 to move the lower elevating base 3752 up and down, and a lower back driving base 3751 The lower back drive motor 3754 attached to the side and the rotation of the lower back drive motor 3754 are transmitted to form a pair of A plurality of transmission gears 3755 to rotate the over arm 3753 directions different from each other, and a.

  The lower back drive unit 3750 has a lower end slidably mounted in the link slit 3751a of the lower back drive base 3751 and an upper end rotatably mounted on the opening / closing rotator 3716 of the lower back decoration unit 3710. Provided is a bar-shaped link arm 3756. The upper end of the link arm 3756 is rotatably attached to the opening / closing rotator 3716 at a position on the right side in the rear view with respect to the rotation center. Thus, when the link arm 3756 is pulled downward, the opening / closing rotating body 3716 rotates clockwise in rear view against the urging force of the door closing spring 3717.

  Further, the lower back drive unit 3750 is attached to the rear side of the lower back drive base 3751, and relays the connection between the lower back decorative board 3719 and the lower back drive motor 3754 to the lower right relay board 3034. The lower part which is attached above the lower back relay board 3775 on the rear side of the lower back drive base 3751 and the lower back board 3757 and which can guide the wiring cable 3701 connecting the lower back relay board 3775 and the lower back decorative board 3719. A wiring cover 3758. The lower wiring cover 3758 forms an upwardly open space that can accommodate the wiring cable 3701 by being attached to the lower rear drive base 3751. Further, the lower wiring cover 3758 has a curved lower guiding portion 3758a for guiding the wiring cable 3701 on the right end side when viewed from the rear.

  Subsequently, an operation of the lower back movable effect unit 3700 will be described. In the lower back movable effect unit 3700, in a normal state, the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is in the most lowered state (see FIGS. 169 (a) and (b)). In this state, the plurality of lower back door members 3712 are closed by the opening / closing rotary member 3716, the lower opening / closing slider 3714, and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 by the urging force of the door closing spring 3717, and the lower back decoration body The doors of the plurality of gates 3711 (lower back door member 3712) are in a closed state. Further, in this state, it is located below the upper end of a portion forming the lower side of the frame-shaped center role 2500, and is hardly seen from the front (see FIG. 114 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the lower back drive motor 3754 is driven to rotate the pair of elevating arms 3753 so that the sides facing each other move upward, the lower back elevating base 3752 moves upward, and the lower back The lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 attached to the lifting base 3752 rises.

  At this time, since the upper end of the link arm 3756 is attached to the opening / closing rotator 3716 in the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710, the link arm 3756 rises together with the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710, and the lower end is lower back. The inside of the link slit 3751a of the drive base 3751 slides upward (to the left in rear view).

  Then, when the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 rises and the lower end of the link arm 3756 reaches the upper end of the link slit 3751a, the link arm 3756 cannot move upward any more. The lower back movable effect unit 3700 can temporarily stop the vertical movement of the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 at this position (first rising position). In this state, the portions of the plurality of gates of the lower back decoration body 3711 are positioned above the lower side (stage 2530) of the center role 2500, and the door is closed through the frame of the center role 2500. A plurality of gates in the state can be seen (see FIG. 178).

  When the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 further rises in the state of the first raising / lowering position, the link arm 3756 is pulled downward relative to the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 by the link slit 3751a, and the link is extended. The rotating body 3716 for opening and closing, to which the upper end of the arm 3752 is attached, rotates clockwise in rear view against the urging force of the door closing spring 3717 (see FIG. 169 (c)). When the opening / closing rotator 3716 rotates clockwise in rear view, the lower opening / closing slider 3714 and the upper opening / closing slider 3715 slide in a direction to open the plurality of lower back door members 3712, and a plurality of the lower lower decoration body 3711 The door of the gate (lower back door member 3712) is in an open state and the ascent is stopped. In the state where the lower back door member 3712 is in the opened position (second ascent position), the lower lower decorative lens 3718 disposed on the rear side through the plurality of gates of the lower lower decorative body main body 3711 becomes visible (FIG. 179). See). In this state, the LED on the lower back decoration board 3719 emits light, so that the open gate can be made to emit light.

  In the lower back movable rendering unit 3700, the wiring cable 3701 connecting the lower back decorative board 3719 of the lower back movable decorative unit 3710 and the lower back relay board 3775 of the lower back drive unit 3750 is connected to the upper wiring cover 3720. And the lower wiring cover 3758. The upper wiring cover 3720 has an upper guiding portion 3720a in which a portion between the upper side and the right side in rear view is curved and a lower end of the right side extends downward. The lower wiring cover 3758 has a lower guiding portion 3758a in which a portion between the lower side and the right side in rear view is curved and an upper end of the right side extends upward.

  The wiring cable 3701 connecting the lower back decoration board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3775 is configured to extend rightward in rear view at the left end in rear view on the upper side of the upper wiring cover 3720 on the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 side. On the lower back drive unit 3750 side, it is mounted so as to extend rightward in rear view at the left end in rear view on the lower side of the lower wiring cover. Accordingly, in the state where the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is in the normal position where it is most lowered, the wiring cable 3701 is curved and extends along the upper guide portion 3720a and the lower guide portion 3758a, and is not extremely bent. The lower back decoration board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3775 are connected well (see FIG. 169 (b)).

  On the other hand, in a state in which the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is raised, as shown in FIG. 169 (c), the wiring cable 3701 is connected to the upper side of the upper wiring cover 3720, the right side in the rear view (upper guiding section 3720a), and the lower wiring. The lower back decoration board 3719 and the lower back relay board 3775 are connected to each other while being separated from the lower side of the cover 3758 and the right side (lower guide part 3758a) in rear view. Then, when the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 descends from the elevated state, it is guided by the upper guide section 3720a and the lower guide section 3758a, respectively, so that it is smoothly bent without being bent, and the upper wiring cover 3720 and the lower It will be accommodated in the wiring cover 3758. Therefore, even if the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is repeatedly moved up and down, the wiring cable 3701 connecting the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 and the lower back drive unit 3750 is repeatedly moved up and down. Bending can be prevented, and disconnection of the distribution cable 3701 can be prevented.

[5-10. Production on a game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 170 to 179. FIG. 170 is a front view of the game board in a state where the back middle left decorative body and the back middle right decorative body of the back middle movable effect unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position on the center side. FIG. 171 shows that the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the back left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit in the back unit are moved to the appearance position closer to the center, and each first decoration surface is directed forward. 172 is a front view of the game board shown in a folded state, and FIG. 172 rotates the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable rendering unit and the back right movable rendering unit from the state of FIG. FIG. 173 is a front view of the game board showing the front facing state, and FIG. 173 rotates the back left decorative body and the back right decorative body of the left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the 3rd decoration surface turned to the front.

  FIG. 174 shows a first left movable decorative lens and a first right movable decorative lens of the first upper decorative body unit and a second left movable decorative lens and a second movable decorative lens of the second upper decorative body unit in the upper rear movable effect unit in the rear unit. The second right movable decorative lens, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit are each in the closed position, and then the back upper first decorative body unit and the back upper It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the second decorative body unit, and the upper back third decorative body unit is moved to the lower position while keeping the upper back rotating base unit in the horizontal position so that the third decorative body unit is horizontally arranged, FIG. 175 shows the back upper first decorative unit, the back upper second decorative unit, and the back upper third decorative unit by rotating the back upper rotating base unit 45 degrees clockwise in front view from the state of FIG. 174. Are lined up diagonally FIG. 176 is a front view of the game board shown in a folded state, and FIG. 176 shows that the back upper rotating base unit is further rotated clockwise in the front view by 45 degrees from the state of FIG. FIG. 177 is a front view of the game board in which the unit, the back upper second decorative body unit, and the back upper third decorative body unit are vertically arranged, and FIG. 177 shows the back upper first decorative body unit from the state of FIG. 176. The first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens, the second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit, and the third left movable decorative of the back upper third decorative body unit A front view of the game board showing the lens and the third right movable decorative lens in an open position, respectively, with the first fixed decorative lens, the second fixed decorative lens, and the third fixed decorative lens visible. is there.

  FIG. 178 is a front view of the game board in a state where the lower back movable decorative body unit of the lower back movable staging unit in the back unit is moved to the first ascending position, and FIG. 179 is the lower back movable decoration from the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the body unit was further raised and moved to the second raising position.

  In the normal state, the game board 5 is, as shown in FIGS. 114 and 121 and the like, a display screen of a game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 through the frame of the center role 2500. Can be visually recognized from the player side (front). In the back middle movable effecting unit 3200, the left and right back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are located at the evacuation positions which are most separated from each other, which are behind the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 at the evacuation positions. In this state, a part of the back middle left decorative body 3210 and a part of the back middle right decorative body 3220 are slightly visible through the frame of the center role 2500. In the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back left decorative body 3310 is in the retracted position where it has moved to the leftmost position, and is located behind the back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back front decorative unit 3100 and almost from the front. can not see. In the back right movable rendering unit 3400, the back right decorative body 3410 is in a retracted position where it has moved to the rightmost side, and a part of the right side of the center role 2500 is seen through the frame of the center role 2500. I have.

  In the normal state, in the back upper movable effecting unit 3500, the movable side unit 3610 of the back raising / lowering unit 3600 is in the state of the highest raised position, and the back upper rotating base unit 3570 extends horizontally. It is in the horizontal position. Further, with the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 at the center, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 is arranged on the right side, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 is arranged on the left side. Then, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 are provided. 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are respectively formed by the first opening / closing spring 3523, the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the third opening / closing spring 3563. Each of them is in a closed position in which they are in contact with each other by the biasing force, and each forms a decoration of a predetermined character. The back upper movable rendering unit 3500 is configured such that the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged side by side from left to right. A predetermined logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be horizontally displayed by the two characters, and the predetermined logo is displayed above the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600 in the frame of the center role 2500. It is visible from the player side (front).

  The game board 5 is a front decoration unit of the back unit 3000 according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving a game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. 3100, back middle movable production unit 3200, back left movable production unit 3300, back right movable production unit 3400, back upper movable production unit 3500, and lower back movable production unit 3700 perform predetermined production (movable production and light emission production). Do.

  Specifically, for example, as an effect using the back middle movable effecting unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decoration which are separated from each other by driving the back middle drive motor 3254. The body 3220 is moved so as to approach each other, and is moved to a substantially central appearance position (see FIG. 170). As a result, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 are in a state of being located substantially at the center of the front side of the game board effect display device 1600, and the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body The decoration with 3220 is combined. In this appearance position state, the back middle left decorative body 3210 and the back middle right decorative body 3220 obstruct the effect image displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, and strongly attracts the player's interest. In addition to being able to let them together, one large decoration (decoration imitating cherry blossom petals) is formed by combining them, making the player think that there is something good and expecting the game Can be raised.

  As an effect using the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, for example, the back left movement drive motor 3352 and the back right of the back left movement drive unit 3350 and the back right movement drive unit 3450 By driving the movement drive motor 3452, the back left decoration body 3310 and the back right decoration body 3410 are moved to the appearance position on the center side in the left-right direction via the back left rotation drive unit 3330 and the back right rotation drive unit 3430. As a result, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are in a state close to the center close to the left side and the right side in the frame-shaped center role 2500. In other words, it is located near the left and right ends on the front surface of the game board side effect display device 1600 within the frame of the center role 2500 (see FIGS. 171 to 173).

  Thereby, the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 become visible, which can surprise the player, and attracts the player's interest to the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410. Can be done. At this time, the LEDs on the back left decorative board 3334 and the back right decorative board 3434 emit light, so that the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 can be light-emitting decorated, further attracting the player's interest. Can be done. Further, in this state, the display screen of the game board effect display device 1600 can be seen from between the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410, so that the effect in collaboration with the effect image can be enjoyed.

  Then, with the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 moved to the appearance position, the back left rotary drive motor and the back right rotary drive motor (not shown) of the back left rotary drive unit 3330 and the back right rotary drive unit 3430. Thereby, the player can be entertained by rotating the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 around the axis extending vertically. When the rotating back left decorative body 3310 and back right decorative body 3410 are stopped, the first decorative surfaces 3311, 3411 of the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 are stopped so as to face forward ( 171), the second decorative surfaces 3312, 3412 are stopped so as to face forward (see FIG. 172), and the third decorative surfaces 3313, 3413 are stopped so as to face forward (see FIG. 173). )can do. The decoration changes depending on the direction in which the rotation of the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative body 3410 is stopped, so that the player can enjoy the changing decoration, and the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right decorative with the desired decoration. Depending on whether or not the body 3410 stops, the body 3410 can be excitedly excited, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the back left movable rendering unit 3300 and the back right movable rendering unit 3400 can be independently moved, only one of them may be movable, or the back left decorative body 3310 and the back right When the rotation of the decorative body 3410 is stopped, the decorative surface facing forward may be different. As a result, a variety of effects can be presented to the player, and the player can be hardly bored.

  As an effect using the back movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, for example, in the state of the normal position, the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is set to the horizontal position, and the operation lever 3586 is set to the operation position. When the lifting drive pin 3652b revolves in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the lifting drive motor 3654, the movable unit 3610 moves downward with the revolution of the lift drive pin 3652b, and is attached to the movable unit 3610. The upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper upper third decorative body unit 3550 are lowered. When the elevation drive pin 3652b reaches the most lowered position and stops revolving, the upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the lower upper The three decorative body units 3550 are located at the lowered position side by side (horizontally) (see FIG. 174).

  In this state, the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are positioned upward from the center in the vertical direction in the frame of the center role 2500. In this state, the upper half of the front surface of the game board effect display device 1600 is covered. As a result, a predetermined logo formed by three of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is displayed on the gaming board side effect display device 1600. Because it descends to the center side so as to block a part of the displayed effect image, it is possible to make the player think that something is good and raise the player's expectation for the game. Can be done.

  In the state of FIG. 174, when the operating lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated clockwise in front view by the operating lever drive motor 3583 to move the operating lever 3586 from the operating position to the right non-operating position, the first mounting The lock piece 3586d inserted into the horizontal lock hole 3525a of the shaft member 3525 is released from the horizontal lock hole 3525a, and the rotation lock of the upper back base unit 3570 is released.

  When the rotation of the rotation base drive gear 3614 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front is rotated by the rotation motor 3612 on the back of the movable unit 3610 in a state where the rotation lock of the upper rotation base unit 3570 by the action lever 3586 is released. Via the rotating base driven gear 3572 meshing with the base driving gear 3614, the rear upper rotating base unit 3570 rotates clockwise in the front view around the center link gear 3611b. At this time, since the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 is attached to the front surface of the movable unit 3610 through the first hole 3571a which is the rotation center of the back upper rotation base unit 3570, the back upper rotation base It does not rotate with the unit 3570.

  When the rear upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates about the center link gear 3611b, the second third link gear 3577 and the third third link gear 3572 meshing with the center link gear 3611b are moved to the center link gear. 3611b, while revolving around itself, the rotation thereof is transmitted to the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear member 3578, and the second drive link gear member 3573 and the third drive link gear The members 3578 rotate in counterclockwise directions with respect to the upper back rotation base 3571, respectively. Therefore, when the back upper rotation base 3571 is rotated, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 keep the up-down direction constant, and the back upper first decoration Revolve around body unit 3510 (see FIGS. 175 and 176).

  Due to the rotation of the back upper rotation base unit 3570, when the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 revolve around the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 rotates. Since the vertical direction of the decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is maintained, a predetermined logo with three decorative characters can be sufficiently recognized by the player, so that horizontal writing is performed. You can enjoy the movement that the logo changes to a vertical logo.

  When the back upper rotation base unit 3570 rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the horizontal position as viewed from the front, it reaches the vertical position and stops its rotation. In this state, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 are arranged in order from top to bottom (see FIG. 176). Accordingly, the logo formed by the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 is positioned at the center of the center role 2500 within the frame. Since it looks like it runs across almost the entire height of the inside, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and to enhance the interest of the player.

  Then, the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is rotated to the vertical position, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and the upper back second decorative body unit 3530 are vertically arranged. In this state, when the operating lever pinion gear 3585 is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the operating lever drive motor 3583 to move the operating lever 3586 in the non-operating position upward and to the operating position, the operating lever 3586 is actuated. Is inserted into the vertical lock hole 3525b of the first mounting shaft member 3525, and the back upper rotation base unit 3570 is in a state of being rotationally locked at the vertical position.

  When the operating lever 3586 moves (rises) from the non-operating position to the operating position, the respective distal ends of the first operating portion 3586f, the second operating portion 3586i, and the third operating portion 3586k of the operating lever 3586. The upper end is the receiving boss 3521b of the first opening / closing arm 3521 in the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the receiving boss 3541b of the second opening / closing arm 3541 in the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body. The lower end of the third opening / closing arm 3561 of the unit 3550 is abutted from below, and the first opening / closing arm 3521, the second opening / closing arm 3541, and the third opening / closing arm 3561 are respectively moved upward. Therefore, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 and the second left movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 in the closed position are in the closed position. 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 move outward in the left-right direction so as to be separated from each other. To the open position (see FIG. 177).

  Thereby, the third fixed decorative lens 3553 facing from between the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 and the first left movable decorative so as to cross the left and right center in the game area 5a. A first fixed decorative lens 3513 facing from between the lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, and a second fixed decorative lens facing from between the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532. The 3533 and the lower front center lens 3131 of the front decoration unit 3100 are aligned in a straight line from top to bottom, which can give a strong impact to the player and strongly attract the player's interest. Can be attached.

  Then, in this state, the LEDs mounted on the back upper third decorative substrate 3554, the back upper first decorative substrate 3514, the upper back second decorative substrate 3534, and the lower front lower decorative substrate 3134 emit light as appropriate. The third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the lower back front center lens 3131 are sequentially decorated with light emission to guide the player's line of sight upward or downward. Can entertain the player. The third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the lower front lower center lens 3131 are formed to have substantially the same width as the door frame side effect display device 460 in the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, the lower front center lens 3131, and the door frame side effect display device 460, the center of the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction. (See FIG. 181).

  As an effect using the lower back movable effect unit 3700 of the back unit 3000, for example, when the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 is moved to the first elevating position by the lower back drive motor 3754 from a normal state, the lower back decorative body The main body 3711 is positioned above the stage 2530 in the center role 2500, and can be seen through the frame of the center role 2500. This allows the lower back decoration body 3711 to be visible, thereby attracting the player's interest strongly (see FIG. 178). In the first elevating position, the plurality of gates of the back lower decorative body 3711 are closed by the plurality of lower back door members 3712.

  Then, when the lower back movable decorative body unit 3710 slightly rises from the first raising / lowering position to the second raising / lowering position, the plurality of lower back door members 3712 are hinged and the plurality of gates of the lower back decorative body 3711 are opened. (See FIG. 179). By performing the operation of opening the gate (lower back door member 3712), it is possible to make the player think that something is good, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game. In this state, when the LED of the lower back decoration board 3719 emits light to decorate the opened gate with light emission, it is possible to convince the player that a chance has come, and to increase the interest of the player. Can be.

  As described above, in the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment, the back front decoration unit 3100, the back middle movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back right movable production unit 3400, the back upper movable production unit 3500, and the back bottom It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like by appropriately using the movable effect unit 3700, and the like, so that the player can be entertained by various effects, and the interest of the player in the game decreases. Can be suppressed.

[5-11. Different Embodiment in Gaming Board]
Next, an embodiment different from the above in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 180 shows another embodiment of the game board, in which the movable effect unit on the back of the back unit is provided with an LED for emitting and decorating the center lens stage and the lower center lens on the back of the back decoration unit. FIG. In the embodiment of FIG. 180, a plurality of lower LEDs 3534a capable of irradiating light downward are provided on the second upper decorative board 3534 of the second upper decorative body unit 3530 in the second movable effect unit 3500. is there.

  Thus, by rotating the back upper rotation base unit 3570 to the vertical position, the lower end of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 is positioned at the center of the stage 2530 of the center role item 2500 (near the chance entrance 2535) and the back front decoration. The upper end of the lower front center lens 3131 of the unit 3100 comes close to the upper end, and in this state, the lower LED 3534a emits light, so that the center of the stage 2530 and the upper part of the lower front center lens 3131 can be illuminated. . Therefore, even in a region where the decorative board provided with the LED cannot be arranged at the rear, light can be supplied from the outside (here, the upper side) to perform light emitting decoration, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. A luminous effect can be performed.

[5-12. Direction by door frame and game board]
Next, an effect using the door frame 3 and the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 181 shows a back upper movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board, in which the upper back rotating base unit is in a vertical position, and a first left movable decorative lens and a first right movable of the back upper first decorative body unit. A decorative lens, a second left movable decorative lens and a second right movable decorative lens of the second upper decorative body unit, and a third left movable decorative lens and a third right movable decorative lens of the third upper decorative body unit respectively It is a front view of the pachinko machine which shows each 1st fixed decorative lens, 2nd fixed decorative lens, and 3rd fixed decorative lens in the state of an open position so that it could be visually recognized.

  As an effect by the door frame 3 and the game board 5, for example, there is an effect using an effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 and a back-side movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5. Specifically, in the back-side movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, with the movable-side unit 3610 of the back-up / down unit 3600 moved to the lowered position, the back-up rotary base unit 3570 is moved to the vertical position. , And moves the operation lever 3586 from the non-operation position to the operation position, so that the first left movable decorative lens and the first right movable decorative lens of the back upper first decorative body unit, and the upper back second decorative body unit The second left movable decorative lens and the second right movable decorative lens, and the third left movable decorative lens and the third right movable decorative lens of the back upper third decorative body unit are in the open position, respectively.

  In this state, as shown in FIG. 181, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the back surface formed at substantially the same width in the left-right center of the pachinko machine 1. The front lower center lens 3131 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are arranged side by side from top to bottom, which can surprise the player and give a strong impact. Then, in this state, the third fixed decorative lens 3553, the first fixed decoration are formed by the back upper third decorative substrate 3554, the back upper first decorative substrate 3514, the upper back second decorative substrate 3534, and the lower front lower decorative substrate 3134. The lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the lower front lower center lens 3131 are sequentially illuminated from the top to decorate the player's line of sight with the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3. Can be enjoyed, and the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 can be enjoyed, and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 can be operated to surely enjoy the player participation type effect. I can do it.

[6. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the movable unit 3610 (the movable base 3611) of the back up / down unit 3600 of the back movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 is moved to the game area. 5a, the upper-side rotating base unit 3570 rotatably attached to the movable-side base 3611 is positioned at a horizontal position, and the upper-side rotating base unit is positioned at an upper position away from the center in front view. The upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 provided on the front surface of the 3570 become visible in a state where they are arranged in the left-right direction. ing. At this time, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 each have a pair of a first left movable decorative lens 3511 and a second upper decorative body unit 3550. The one right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are respectively a first opening / closing spring 3523 and a third movable movable decorative lens 3552. Since it is located in the closed position by the urging force of the second opening / closing spring 3543 and the third opening / closing spring 3563, the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit The first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 of 3550 are the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the third fixed decorative lens 3553. The first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552, which are hidden invisibly, respectively. It has become. Therefore, in each of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable in the closed position state. Only the decoration of a predetermined logo with characters formed by the decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 is performed. It can entertain players.

  Then, when the movable unit 3610 is moved from the raised position to the lowered position, the back upper rotation base unit 3570 attached to the movable unit 3610, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body Since the unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are in a state of approaching the center of the game area 5a in front view, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back. The third decorative body unit 3550 can be emphasized, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550. be able to.

  When the upper back rotating base unit 3570 is in the raised position or moved from the raised position to the lowered position, the operating lever 3586 is moved from the non-operating position to the upper operating position along the back upper rotating base 3571 in the back upper rotating base unit 3570. When the first action is applied to the action lever 3586 on each of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, The relative rotation of the decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 and the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is regulated (locked), and vibration and inertia force are generated. For example, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 swing. It can be prevented from moving or moving, so that the decorations of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 can be enjoyed with good appearance. it can.

  With the back upper rotating base unit 3570 moved to the lowered position and the operating lever 3586 moved to the non-operating position, the back upper rotating base unit 3570 is rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, so as to move from the horizontal position. When rotated and moved to the vertical position, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the back upper rotating base unit 3570 are kept in the vertical direction. While rotating relative to the back upper rotating base unit 3570, respectively, it revolves around the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, and is arranged in a vertical direction different from the horizontal position. The effect that the direction in which the first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are arranged changes. It is possible to entertain show in person.

  With the back upper rotating base unit 3570 rotated to the vertical position, the operating lever 3586 is moved upward along the back upper rotating base 3571 from the non-operating position to the operating position, and each back upper first decorative body unit 3510 is moved. When a second action is exerted on the back upper second decorative body unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper In the third decorative body unit 3550, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 against the urging force of the first opening / closing spring 3523, the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the third opening / closing spring 3563, The second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are closed. From the position to the open position, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and Since the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 become visible from between the third right movable decorative lens 3552, the first fixed decorative lens 3513 and the second fixed decorative lens 3513. By making the 3533 and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 visible, it is possible to make the player think that something is good, and to give the player a first left movable decorative lens 3511. And the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531, the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3532 The decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are opened to give a premium feeling to the effect that the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 become visible. It is possible to increase the player's expectation of the game.

  Therefore, depending on the relative rotation position (horizontal position or vertical position) of the back upper rotation base unit 3570 with respect to the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550. By the action lever 3586 that moves between the working position and the non-working position, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are rotationally locked (second lock). One action) and the movement to the open position (second action) can give different effects to the player, and the various effects can make the player hard to get tired of. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  As described above, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first movable decorative lens 3511 in the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are changed from the normal state. The right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 move to the open position and are fixed to the first position. Since the decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 become visible in multiple stages (movements), whether or not to proceed to the next stage in each stage , The player can be thrilled and excited, so that the player can be given a back upper first decorative body unit 3510, a back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and a back side. Third decorative body unit 3550 series of moves by (directed) can entertain, a reduction in the interest in the game of the player can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the upper back rotating base unit 3570 is rotated around the axis extending in the front-rear direction to rotate and move between the horizontal position and the vertical position, the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the back upper rotary base unit 3570 with respect to the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are changed in direction. The direction of the operating lever 3586 is also different from the one decorative body unit 3510, the second upper decorative body unit 3530, and the third upper decorative body unit 3550, and the operating lever 3586 is moved from the non-operating position to the operating position. In the horizontal and vertical positions, the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, Direction acting on the back on the third decorative body unit 3550 (direction) becomes different. Therefore, the first action and the second action act in different directions between the horizontal position and the vertical position, so that the first action and the second action cause the back upper first decorative body unit 3510 and the back upper second decorative body. Since the action exerted on the unit 3530 and the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 can be easily changed, as described above, the first action of rotating and locking and the second action of moving to the open position act. The mechanism for making the pachinko machine 1 can have a relatively simple configuration, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be easily realized.

  In addition, since the operating lever 3586 is linearly moved (slid) along the back upper rotation base 3571 of the back upper rotating base unit 3570 between the non-operating position and the operating position, the operating lever 3586 is rotated. Compared with the case of making it work, the distance between the non-working position and the working position can be easily increased, and the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, A sufficient effect can be exerted on the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 to facilitate a desired effect.

  In the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3512 The movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 are connected to the first opening / closing spring 3523, the second opening / closing spring 3543, and the third opening / closing spring 3563. , The back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550 move or vibrate. The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable lens 3511 The decorative lens 3532, the third left movable decorative lens 3551, and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 move to the open position, and the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553. Can be prevented from being visible. Thereby, the first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first left movable decorative lens 3511 only when the second action is exerted on the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, and the upper back third decorative body unit 3550. By moving the right movable decorative lens 3512, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens 3532, and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552, the first fixed decorative lens 3513 is moved. , The second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 can be made visible, and the first fixed decorative lens 3513, the second fixed decorative lens 3533, and the third fixed decorative lens 3553 can be made visible. The effect can be further enhanced.

  Further, the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the back upper rotating base unit 3570 by the movable side unit 3610 can be viewed from the front of the game area 5a. Since it can be moved to the descending position near the center, the upper back first decorative body unit 3510, the upper back second decorative body unit 3530, the upper back third decorative body unit 3550, and the upper back rotating base unit 3570 are lowered. When moved to the position, the space for rotating the back upper second decorative body unit 3530, the back upper third decorative body unit 3550, and the back upper rotating base unit 3570 can be easily secured, and the horizontal position and the vertical position Since the range of movement of the back-side rotating base unit 3570 that rotates and moves between them can be further increased, the back-side second decoration Surprised player by unit 3530 and the back on the third decorative body unit 3550 revolves largely can entertain more, the lowering of interest on the game player's can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the back upper movable rendering unit 3500, when the upper back rotary base unit 3570 is in the vertical position, the operation is performed by the operation lever 3586 by moving from the non-operation position to the operation position (second operation). ), The first left movable decorative lens 3511 and the first right movable decorative lens 3512 of the back upper first decorative body unit 3510, the second left movable decorative lens 3531 and the second right movable decorative lens of the back upper second decorative body unit 3530. The lens 3532 and the third left movable decorative lens 3551 and the third right movable decorative lens 3552 of the back upper third decorative body unit 3550 are moved from the closed position to the open position, but are not limited thereto. Instead, for example, they may be moved from the open position to the closed position, or the first decorative body unit 3510, Two decorative body unit 3530, and the back on the third decorative body unit 3550 may be or so as to rotate around an axis extending in front and rear.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, control boards for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 182 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 183 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 182. FIG. FIG. 185 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to and from a connection terminal board for a game ball or the like that relays an electrical connection with the display board. FIG. 185 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. FIG. 187 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 187 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 mainly includes a main control board 1310, a payout control board 951, and a peripheral control board 1510, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 1310 will be described, and then the payout control board 951, the power supply board 931 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 182, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls a power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on and performs a game operation. A main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches are input. A main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, a power failure or momentary And a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring a sign of a power failure.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing improper operation, and the like are also built in.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. The non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is added. Since the once assigned ID code is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in”) that updates a jackpot determination random number used for determining whether to generate a jackpot game state among various random numbers related to the game. Hard random number circuit 1310an "). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical value range of 0 to 32767 is set as the minimum value in advance in this embodiment), The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a). Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator to be described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted. Then, once again, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is rapidly duplicated based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without overlapping. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, since the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset described later, the various signals based on the information are transmitted to the various input terminals. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. Main control output circuit 1310ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the reset information, and main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function without a reset terminal and having no reset function And, it consists of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a main control system reset described later, and the information is output. , Is configured as a circuit in which no signal is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by a main control system reset described later. A signal based on the output signal is output from the various output terminals.

  114, a first starting port sensor 3112 for detecting a game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004, and general. A detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3111 for detecting a game ball entering the winning opening 2001 or a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered. Also, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a first special winning opening sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball entering the first special winning opening 2005, a second special winning shown in FIG. The detection signals from the second special winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting a game ball entering the mouth 2006 and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. The signal is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 3032 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on a detection signal from each of these switches, thereby outputting a main control output circuit with reset function. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and the starting port solenoid 2107, the first attacker solenoid 2108, the second attacker solenoid 2109, and the distribution solenoid 2110 are output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d via the panel relay board 3032. By outputting a drive signal to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, the panel relay board 3032, The first special symbol display 1403, the second special symbol display 1405, the first special reservation number display 1404, the second special reservation number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the status display via the function display unit 1400. 1401 and a round display device 1407.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. By outputting various information (game information) relating to the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from an output terminal of a predetermined output port, the main circuit with a reset function is output. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3112, the second starting port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 2401, the first winning port sensor 4005, the second winning port sensor 2402, the first receiving port sensor 2434, and the While a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the two receiving port sensor 2435, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3111. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate unit 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 3112, the second starting port sensor 4004, and The detection of a game ball by the gate sensor 2401 frequently occurs. Therefore, a long-life proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 3112, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 2401. In addition, when a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball frequently enters, and enters the second special winning opening 2006. Since the ball played is distributed to either the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432, the first big winning port sensor 4005, the second big winning port sensor 2402, the first receiving port sensor 2434, and the second receiving port. The detection of a game ball by the entrance sensor 2435 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are also used for the first special winning opening sensor 4005, the second special winning opening sensor 2402, the first reception sensor 2434, and the second reception sensor 2435. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3111 does not frequently occur. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3111.

  The main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb. Various commands are transmitted to the board 951 as serial data. When normally receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with reset function. The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function as serial data. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial data will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured with a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, connects to the bus 1310ah. (See FIG. 133). The main serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (FIG. 133). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs the transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec transmits the command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

  The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is provided with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. This is provided with a BC0 (see FIG. 129). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are provided when an operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time of power-on, and an operation signal from the operation switch 954 (RAM clear signal). Is output from the dispensing control board 951, is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. (Cleared).

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 183, a payout control board 951 that controls payout of game balls and the like displays a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout, an operation switch 954 that also serves various functions, and a state of the pachinko machine 1. And an error LED display 860b. An operation switch 954 also having a function as a RAM clear switch is a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310a based on a detection signal output by being operated. .) Is output as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 183, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls a power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and pays out a game medium that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power-on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs and various commands including a payout control program for controlling the operation and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection from various detection switches for payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a drive signal to output to a payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. For exchanging various signals between the payout motor drive circuit 952d and the CR unit 6. It includes a CR unit output circuit 952e of the. The payout control MPU 952a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are built in.

  Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program converts various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 into a main payment serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b as a main payment serial data reception signal. To receive serial data. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to a first error release command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. The signal is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 through the payout control I / O port 952b as serial data of the serial system as a signal (command transmission means). The payout control program is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process was executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process was executed to start the payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated by operating the operation switch 954, and output of warning information according to the error is stopped (error canceling control unit).

  When a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command). When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command). When a detection signal (main frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main frame opening switch 619, a main frame closing command (first main frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal at its various input terminals for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various detection switches, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the dispensing control input circuit 952b outputs various signals based on the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches, which are input to the various input terminals, by the dispensing control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The dispensing control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. Dispensing control output circuit 952ca having a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the reset information, and dispensing control output circuit 952cb having no reset function having no reset terminal and having no reset function. And is composed of The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by a later-described dispensing control system reset. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on the output is output from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the dispensing control output circuit 952cb without reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by a dispensing control system reset described later. The circuit is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on the various output terminals.

  An out-of-ball detection sensor 827 for detecting an out-of-ball of a game ball in the supply path of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a game ball discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 for detecting the rotation of the discharge blade 839 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the discharge control MPU 952a via the discharge control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are supplied to the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the interface.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data system, or receives an operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 954. ) Is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. Upon normal completion of receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output with reset function. By outputting the signal to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, thereby performing the payout control without reset function. Various commands are transmitted from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310 as serial data.
When the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  Also, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, so that the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca. Output a drive signal to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, output a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and output the status of the pachinko machine 1 from an output terminal of a predetermined output port to an error LED display. By outputting a drive signal to be displayed on 860b to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, the drive signal from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca is output to the error LED display 860b.

  The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The following contents are displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951 is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it is notified that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it is "ball watching" (specifically, Is based on a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840. At the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, the payout rotator and the game ball engage with each other near the entrance, so that the payout rotator becomes difficult to rotate. Notification) and the number When "3" is displayed, it is notified that "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). When the number "5" is displayed, it is notified that "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it is "full" (specifically, based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor 279, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls). Is displayed, and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (that the electrical connection is cut off from one of the dispensing control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number "9" is displayed, it is "stocking (prize ball stock (unpaid) is present)" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is predetermined). That the number of balls has been reached).

  Also, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, so that the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Then, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (built-in with built-in infrared LED and photo IC), and through the plurality of photocouplers, a game room (a hall). ), The number of game balls and various information (game information, error contents relating to the payout operation of the game balls, or the fact that there is an error) are respectively transmitted to the hall computer installed in the hall computer.
The external terminal plate 784 and the hole computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hole computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hole computer to operate. The computer does not malfunction or break down. The main computer 1310 which proceeds the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 which controls payout and the like are provided. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 329 are first transmitted to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball renting device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner. The input is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card in accordance with the number of lent game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball rental display unit 330 to the game ball. It is output to the equal lending device connection terminal plate 869, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the ball lending display unit 330. In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending display unit 330 receives the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

  The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 129) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. I have. The payout control MPU 952a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) even when the power is cut off by the capacitor BC1 even in the power-off process. The various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is such that when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal is transmitted to a predetermined value of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. Input to the input terminal of the input port, the payout control MPU 952a determines that the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with connection terminal boards for rental devices such as game balls]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 184, the game device rental terminal connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (Accurately, the game ball rental terminal connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880.) , The CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay is performed. The terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected.) Between the CR unit 6 and the board between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the board between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay. Each wiring (harness) is electrically connected between the board with the terminal board 880 and between the board with the connection terminal board 869 for a game ball or the like and the frequency display board 365. In addition, AC 24 V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game device rental terminal connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) and the ground voltage LG. The game ball and the like are supplied to the payout control board 951 via the connection terminal board 869, and the game ball and the like are supplied to the frequency display board 365 via the connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. .

  On the frequency display plate 365, a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328 on the component surface, and a push button switch is positioned at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. Is mounted, and a ball return display unit 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display unit 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

  The ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game. The input is made to the CR unit 6 via a ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection. The data is input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869.

  The ball lending display unit 330 includes three segment indicators arranged in a line. The three-digit segment indicators are sequentially driven one digit at a time. The lighting of the digit segment indicator is controlled. By such lighting control, the ball rental display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6, or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (total of three signals) for specifying a one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment displays, and the specified one-digit segment display. Are turned on and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (total of seven signals) for designating the content to be displayed are provided from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input via the plate 880, the one-digit segment display is sequentially lit according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment displays are displayed. The content by the light emission of the container can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display section 363.

  Note that a CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental display section 330. The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365d via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL via a CR unit lamp 365d, a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the like. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 by a built-in voltage generation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this emission can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display section 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending display unit 330 through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of balls to be loaned in one payout operation (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen). Is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a), to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has been started or ended, to a game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. And a PRDY signal for notifying that a payout operation for paying out a lending ball is possible or impossible is output to the CR unit 6 via a terminal board for connecting a lending device for a gaming ball or the like. 869, and output to the CR unit 6. For example, when the clerk of the hall or the like has preset the CR unit 6 so that a game ball for 200 yen is paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession. When 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out continuously, and 50 balls for 200 yen in total are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of paid out game balls as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 that can be electrically connected to or cut off from 24 VAC (24 VAC) supplied from a pachinko island facility, and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the hit ball launch device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control section]
The power supply control unit 935 operates the power switch 934 to rectify 24 volts AC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor improving circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 935b, and various DCs for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. And a power supply generation circuit 935d for generating a power supply.

[7-3-2. Launch control section]
The firing control unit 953 that performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a controls the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (firing strength) of launching a game ball toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 302, and the palm of the handle 302. And a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 for detecting whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether or not to forcibly stop launching (firing) a game ball according to the player's will. Is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the firing control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal for notifying the fact via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a controls a drive current for launching (firing) a game ball toward the game area 5a based on an operation signal from the handlebar rotation detection sensor 307, and outputs the current to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one ball of the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, The control of sending the game ball received by the ball sending member to the hitting ball firing device 650 side is performed.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 185, the peripheral control board 1510 performs an effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and performs an effect of drawing a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 illustrated in FIG. A peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data) with the display drive board 4450 and drawing control of the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460, while the speaker 921 and the upper speaker A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls sound such as music and sound effects from the 573, and a real-time clock (hereinafter, “RTC”) that stores calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second. The control unit 4165 and the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are turned by the knob. Operation and a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 185, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls a staging operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP from a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various types of information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board effect display device 1600 and various light emission modes such as LEDs) that are continued across the peripheral control unit regular processing executed each time a blank signal is input Manage schedule data, etc. Control RAM 1511c for storing information for managing the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state, information for managing a special effect flag, and the like. ) And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. Have.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c cannot hold the stored contents only for a time period in which the power is restored immediately after the momentary power failure occurs, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-term power interruption occurs). ) Loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter, referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”). As a result, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. When the gaming board 5 is detached from the pachinko machine 1 by providing the SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, no backup power is supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511 d. You can't keep it and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a runs out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer is up). When outputting the clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on the various commands. A game board-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on a lamp from a serial I / O port for a lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting drive signals to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. A signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, Motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the dynamic drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 And the door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 through the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the. The frame decoration drive amplifier board transmits data from the LED serial I / O port to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressing detection switch for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405 provided in the rendering operation unit 400. Are serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, which are input to the serial I / O port for effect operation unit detection of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are transmitted to a game board (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. The serialized transmission data is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. I have. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”), and the system runs out of control using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e together. Diagnosis of whether or not.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 186, the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I around the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. / Peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data from and to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak are read and written various data via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d; A dedicated controller for independently transferring data between the I / O port 1511ag and an input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ＤＭＡDMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af. In order to perform data transfer independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and an input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab reads from and writes to the storage device via the internal bus 1511ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Without input / output devices such as the O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h are connected to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, while reading and writing, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as an SRAM 1511d and various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae are a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board, a serial I / O port for a motor drive board, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Serial I / O port, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for effect operation unit information acquisition.

  The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a runs out of control. It has become. That is, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets when the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will be taken. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not performed.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal, a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, etc., and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and the movable position of the various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output. This LED is a high-luminance white LED, and is a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by employing a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened. As a result, noise countermeasures can be taken with respect to the lighting control of the LED, which is meaningful in the game. Note that the lighting control of the LED is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like except this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control potentiometer 1510a. When the knob of the volume control potentiometer 1510a is rotated, the resistance value is variable, and the resistance at the rotational position of the knob is controlled. The voltage divided according to the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 levels of values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set so that the volume increases from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to a game effect are notified. (For example, to render the screen displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 as a more powerful one, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player, etc.). Is also transmitted from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without any dependence on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to the maximum volume.
Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing a wrongdoing, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be output. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice a malfunction or a player's misconduct due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while It is possible to increase the volume at which the sound is played and to produce a more powerful screen displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 in addition to the music and sound effects, or to shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player. You can even tell them you are expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like, various data, various control data, and various schedule data in advance. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and music. , Sound generation schedule data for generating sound and sound effects, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines a screen configuration in a time-series manner, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Have been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured such that light emission data defining the light emission mode of various LEDs is arranged in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in chronological order, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. The sound command data includes an output channel number for designating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels of a built-in sound source of a sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and a sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for specifying which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  The various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, or may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or may be used when power is supplied to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copied data is read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b includes, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, for correcting the luminance of the game board effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b in advance. As described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. It includes the set brightness of the LED as the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600. For example, the date and time when the game board effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time are included. Accordingly, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is obtained. When the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the setting information being 75%, the correction information acquired for the 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is further increased by 5%. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the luminance setting information is acquired. When the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is made such that the luminance becomes 85%, which is further added by 10% which is the correction information acquired to the 75%. The backlight of the game board-side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, and the backlight is turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 186, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores, among the various types of information updated by the execution of various control programs, the information to be backed up for exclusive use. A management target work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and a peripheral control ROM 1511b. Control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing a copy of various control programs stored therein, and various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. And a control data copy area 1511ce for exclusively storing copied data, and backup non-management for exclusively storing, among various information updated by execution of various control programs, those not to be backed up. And a target work area 1511cf.

  Note that when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including a power failure due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and is cleared to zero, while the backup is performed. Regarding the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the power-on state command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 143) starts RAM clearing. (For example, for instructing the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 182 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit regular processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described below. ) Is backed up as a backup target, and effect information (1 ms), which is various information updated in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs, is backed up. And Bank0 (1 ms) that is exclusively stored as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is represented by “Bank”. Subsequent “0” means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As described later, “(1fr)” indicates that the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In other words, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, it is appended to “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The same applies to the backup information (1fr).) “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank0”, “Bank1”, where the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. And "Bank 4" (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. The lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is stored in the storage area 1511cab. This is a storage area in which door-side emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In a received command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received, and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad includes an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 4165a described later). This is a storage area in which various information obtained from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set. The schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data is set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set. Other schedule data are read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

  Bank0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, and a rendering operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai. A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is stored. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position, the movable position, and the like of various movable bodies is set. ai includes various kinds of information (for example, the effect of the operation operation) of acquiring the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400 are set. In the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, the effect display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510, and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data. Directed with peripheral control board 1510 based on LOCKN signal to be described later output to convey A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

  When the peripheral control unit regular processing described later is executed, the game board-side emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board-side emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the game board-side light-emitting data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board-side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral area is set. When the control unit regular processing is executed, the processing is performed based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab stores the door side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab when the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. −DAT is set, and when the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. You. When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, When the previous peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing is performed based on the door-side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf stores a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. −DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door-side is set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the present peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed is set. The processing proceeds based on the processing.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set alternately in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the present peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It has become.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of presentation information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the effect information (1 ms), which is the content copied at high speed to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511 ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank 0 (1 ms). When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs as the effect backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 15 is stored in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb is managed as one page, with Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 1511 cc is managed as one page, with one pair of Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms). The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in the bank 0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511 cc is a pair of Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) and a pair of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms), for a total of two pairs. This area is managed as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

  In the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1fr), is used as the effect backup information (1fr) as the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). The effect information (1 ms) is, as effect backup information (1 ms), each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing backup information among various information updated by execution of various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing a copy of various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d include a power-on state command from the main control board 1310 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including a power recovery due to a momentary power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 143). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, an instruction to start the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 182 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). ) Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the above-described point that the backup management work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Also, when the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. Is to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of the big hit game state) Etc.), while the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is used for effect information (SRAM), which is various information continued over the day (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit game state or for managing a special effect flag). Information 0) is stored as a backup target exclusively for Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit that indicates the size of a storage area for storing various information, and “Bank” is Subsequent “0” means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. "Bank1," "Bank2," "Bank3," and "Bank4" provided in an area from a backup first area 1511db to a backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as "Bank0". It means having a size. "(SRAM)" is "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3" because various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is to be backed up. , And “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are used in the same sense).

  Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc that exclusively store a copy of effect information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with one pair of two banks as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined based on whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, one pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at a high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the second backup area 1511dc, one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) every time peripheral control unit regular processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined based on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing one pair of the Bank1 (SRAM) and the Bank2 (SRAM) as one page, and the backup second area. An area 1511dc is an area for managing one pair as one page, with Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. LCD display controller]
As shown in FIG. 185, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 which performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is as shown in FIG. In addition, a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in sound source”), and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. (Video Display Processor) 1512a with a built-in sound source, and various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data on the screens displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, and serialized music and sound effects as audio data. The audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting toward the decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the drawing data serialized to the door frame side effect display device 460, the door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. A door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d that is disposed near the lower part of the device 460 and is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320, and serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511. A signal from the differential circuit 1512e in addition to the differential circuit 1512e for differentiating the LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal, and a signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d. And the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is When the signal is input, the circuit is connected to transmit this signal. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. A forced switching circuit 1512f for circuit connection. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, for example, ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) and sprite data used for displaying a screen and an image described later, and an operation menu background image described later are displayed. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and volume adjustment icon data described later. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, the main body frame rear image data used for displaying the main frame rear image in which the position of each part on the back of the main frame 4 can be visually recognized from the player, and the display of the service mode screen Break used to display the service mode screen image data and the break timer setting screen Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying a suggestion display object for urging the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various types of peripheral control RAM 1511c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data According to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae, the next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound source is incorporated. Output to VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, transmits the screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation schedule data every time a V blank signal is input. Then, one by one from the top screen data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The extracted sound instruction data is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the first sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control ROM 1511b. After being extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. The next sound command data following the first sound command data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511 in accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae. Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in chronological order in the sound generation schedule data and the V blank signal according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. In each case, the data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one from the head sound command data.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data and generate drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. A built-in VRAM (hereinafter, referred to as “built-in VRAM”) is also provided. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The drawing data is sent from the channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay. The effect display arranged near the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 are Although the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short due to being attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is, as described above, the peripheral data. Since the control board 1510 is output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is much longer than that of the channel CH1, it is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. For this reason, with respect to the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is much longer than the channel CH1, the V-by-One ( (Registered trademark) ", the system is less affected by noise.

Channel CH1 is an LVDS (Low Voltage Differential).
Signaling uses a serial-type differential interface, whereas the channel CH2 uses a parallel-type interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d, and is stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to effect display drive board 4450. The serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a becomes: Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, sprite data is created, and one screen (1) is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, image data for the game board effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600, and the door frame side is output. Image data for effect display device 460 is shown from channel CH2. A peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. In other words, “screen data for one screen (one frame)” refers to rendering data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 in the built-in VRAM. The data to be generated above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. A peripheral control output circuit, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460. Further, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may be slightly changed.

  The VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source employs a frame buffer method. The “frame buffer method” means that one screen (one frame) of drawing data to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). In this method, the rendering data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the tracks according to the track numbers specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel numbers. An output channel is set, and music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of a track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume values are included. Specifically, for the production sound, the above-described board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as a sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode described later.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of a channel to be output. A plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the sound is amplified to a master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume is amplified to the master volume value, and the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is increased. Is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among a plurality of tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are The set volume control volume 1510a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually compared with the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. To a master volume value, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the Volume adjustment button set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound built into the track And the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 1510a, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound becomes the volume actually flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It amplifies to the master volume value, serializes the amplified notification sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, in the case where the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of outputting the notification sound in order to notify the clerk of the hall or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1 will be briefly described. To explain, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for the mute, and the notification sound Is synthesized with the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually converted to the speaker 921. And a master volume value, which is a sound volume flowing from the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized to audio data. And it outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as data.

  That is, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows actually from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is proceeding according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the production sound progressing in accordance with the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by adjusting the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial operation of the production operation unit 400). If the setting is shifted to the setting mode by operating the unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

  In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound flows to notify the clerk of the hall or the like of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the misconduct with respect to the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the silenced production sound proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data. When the sound does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start flowing again from where the notification sound started flowing, but proceeds according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed after the notification sound started flowing. It starts to flow again from.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 187, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b is used to draw the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. , And various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When serialized audio data is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data into a plus signal and a minus signal as differential serial data, and outputs a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a frame peripheral relay. A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and as differential serial data in which left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. , Via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Note that the audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential systems between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, so that, for example, a plus signal of left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for directing door frame side]
As shown in FIG. 187, drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. As described above, the interface using the parallel system is used for the channel CH2. The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals of a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , Green video signal, and blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, that is, a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, that is, a total of 18 bits. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower two bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to distinguish, the lower two bits that are output from the built-in sound source VDP 1512a and contain the weak color information are invalidated.

  Three video signals, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal Are input to the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d outputs three image signals of a red image signal, a green image signal, and a blue image signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. A signal and a clock signal are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” by THine Electronics Co., Ltd., and only one differential pair cable is used. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board effect display device 1600, so that the path from the channel CH1 to the game board effect display device 1600 is provided. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door. Since the signal is output (transmitted) to the effect display device 460 on the door frame side via the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the path from the channel CH2 to the effect display device 460 on the door frame side (No. Since the length of the wiring required for the second path) is significantly longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 so as to be openable and closable, the opposite side of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. On the closed side which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3, and the like on the main body frame 4 side It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided to the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 and the upper plate 321 is provided on the closed side of the main body frame 4. A full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching the paid out game balls to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is disposed.
Further, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, there is provided a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5, which unitizes the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn to the vicinity of the dispensing device 830, the full branch unit 770, the power supply substrate 931 and the like. In addition to the noise due to the driving of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the noise due to the electrostatic discharge by the game balls, and the like. In an environment that receives noise and the like that has entered the vehicle.

  For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is much longer than that of the channel CH1, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the product of "Thine Electronics Co., Ltd." By adopting a differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the system is less affected by noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; As described above, the differential one pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the transmitter, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. Is not a parallel line provided simply in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, a brief description will be given of a case where a parallel line is adopted as a differential pair cable for electrically connecting a transmitter and a receiver. For the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the electronics for the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are provided by THine Electronics. Even if a mechanism that is less susceptible to noise by adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Co., Ltd., such a hardware-based configuration alone causes an electrostatic discharge of a game ball. When serial data in the parallel line is affected by noise, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko machine where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. For effect on the door frame side provided on the drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) at the time of reception by the transceiver ICSDIC0, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected, and is output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Frame data is received by the door frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as disturbed data different from the regular data, and in the display area of the door frame-side effect display device 460, an image such as a so-called sandstorm is displayed. There is a problem that it cannot be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The directing transmitter IC 1512d employs a differential-type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise. A twisted pair cable that can cancel (removal) the noise on the receiving side even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. Thus, even if the serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable by the noise due to the electrostatic discharge of the game ball, the noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the door frame is not affected. Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the third dish unit 320, the channel of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, the liquid crystal display control unit 151 is displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image in which it is not possible to recognize what kind of image it is, such as a sandstorm. Therefore, a decrease in the player's willingness to play can be suppressed. Therefore, a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 In the connection between the two, ie, between the transmitter and the receiver, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally formed, but are separately assembled, and the structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the body frame 4 is adopted. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Accordingly, various substrates provided on the body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the door frame 3 is removed from the main frame 4 so that the maintenance of the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed. If it is not possible to solve the problem occurring in the door frame 3, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various substrates provided on the 'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3' side are provided. The substrate can be electrically connected to the substrate.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs the differential communication “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) Was employed as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver. More specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive. The boards and the board 4450 are electrically connected to each other by a twisted pair cable, whereas the power supply wiring and other wires for transmitting various signals are electrically connected to each other by a harness. Thereby, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are provided. A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern is formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 at a predetermined distance from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns. Since the route from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal plates such as a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the video transmission formed on the plurality of relay terminal plates is formed on these relay terminal plates. Between input and output of a wiring pattern, a part of a signal for transmitting serial data by the differential system transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is reduced. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. The terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected to each other by a twisted pair cable, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Of the twisted pair cable, one wire is red, the other wire is gray, the power supply wire of the harness is red, and the other wires are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may not be red, but may be yellow.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be stored. The forced switching circuit 1512f includes a LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. In the differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, and the demonstration by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state. During the operation, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided on the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 Are transmitted as a request to confirm the operation of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, the forcible switching circuit 1512f is circuit-connected to transmit the two signals, while When two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effector transmitter IC 1512d. Have been. Thus, when two signals that have been differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected so that the two signals are transmitted. From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while being transmitted to the differential circuit 1512 e. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input, a circuit connection is performed to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 8 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a period of displaying the startup screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 on the game board effect display device 1600, or performing a demonstration by the game board effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, and converts various serialized signals. And a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V for restoring the signal to a parallel signal and outputting it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Upon receiving the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and determining that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 transmits a LOCKN signal (to be described later) for notifying the drawing data to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , And output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a, when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying that, and outputs the generated image to the game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed in the display area of the game board effect display device 1600 to notify the user.

  Further, when the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 transmits the LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Then, the signal is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the control unit. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that no problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the plate unit of the door frame 3 While it can be determined that a failure has not occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the 320, if no LOCKN signal has been input, it is determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a failure has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, "A failure has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device." Play the game board side by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. In addition to outputting to the display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "there is a problem with the upper-panel-side liquid crystal display device.") To that effect is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. As a result, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided on the door frame 3. Thereby, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 185, the RTC control unit 4165 that stores the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second is configured around an RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa for holding calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is employed in this embodiment) as a drive power supply and a backup power supply for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without supplying any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the calendar information and time information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information in the RTC information. The effect based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be developed. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, a screen of a Christmas tree or a reindeer is unfolded on the game board effect display device 1600 and the door frame effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. The screen to be executed is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the LED luminance setting information when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is of an LED type. I have. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the luminance adjustment of the backlight by the PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted with the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  The RTC built-in RAM 4165aa includes calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, as well as calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date, hour, minute, and second that is first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs ON / OFF control of the backlight or only ON when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is a cold cathode tube type. It is supposed to.

  Various kinds of information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set in the production line of the gaming machine maker. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the hour, minute, and second.

  As described above, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has the brightness setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is mounted with the LED type. The information that needs to be maintained can be stored and held independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of a large hit game state occurring at a low probability or a high probability).

  Also, depending on the environment of the hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the mode shifts to the setting mode, and the luminance of the backlight can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 and operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. In addition, when the user operates the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. The calendar information and the time information are reset by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is desired. Or to adjust the brightness. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is of an LED type, the game board effect is displayed. The luminance decrease due to the aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and sets calendar information and time to specify the date. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information specifying the minute and second, and the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% is adjusted in 5% steps. Brightness setting information including the brightness adjustment information for performing the setting and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 currently set. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

  For example, from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, if June has already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is obtained from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board effect display 1600 is turned on, the 75% The brightness of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% further increased by 5%, which is the correction information obtained for the game. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 15 When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from 1b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on with the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information being 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance becomes 85%, which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information obtained by the correction. Light.

  Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or the peripheral date and time described later. The current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510, and the current date and time may be specified.

[7-4-4. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the volume of the volume control volume 1510a is variable when the knob is rotated, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob of the knob. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into 1024 values from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 levels is divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The volume is set to mute for the board volume 0, the maximum volume is set for the board volume 6, and the volume is set so that the volume increases from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of a hall or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1, (E.g., a screen displayed on the game board effect display device 1600 as a more powerful one, or a notification that there is a high possibility of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player, or the like). Etc.) also flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without any dependence on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, so that the sound from the muffling starts. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (the sound source built-in VDP 1512a) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-described seven-stage board volume, and can smoothly change from mute to the maximum volume. Thereby, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is performing a wrongdoing, the notification sound set to a high volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be output. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk in the hall from becoming difficult to notice a malfunction or a player's misconduct due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while In addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume at which the sound is played, the screen developed by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is directed as a more powerful one, and is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility that the game state will be shifted to the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the mode shifts to the setting mode, and the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted. After turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 and operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 within a predetermined time, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. In addition, when the user operates the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 during the period in which the demonstration is being performed by the game board effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased. I have. The adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. , But is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or the notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the case where the volume of the music and the sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the case where the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 are performed. And the method of adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the above operation to increase or decrease the value of the board volume to adjust the volume of music or sound effects. Since the volume control volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the hall clerk who can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, the sound volume adjusted by the hall clerk may be small for the player and difficult to hear the music and sound effects, or may be large for the player and feel loud with the music and sound effects. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, and the game console effect display device 1600 enters a waiting state for a customer to perform a demonstration. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the operation is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 in accordance with the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thereby, the player can adjust the volume of the music and the effect sound to a desired volume. Therefore, when it is difficult to hear the music and the effect sound because the clerk of the hall feels the volume adjusted to be small, the effect operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume up to a desired volume. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a state in which no game is performed in the pachinko machine 1 is continued for a predetermined period of time, the state becomes a customer waiting state, and the demonstration by the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. Accordingly, when the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time feels that the adjusted volume is low and it is difficult to hear music and sound effects, this time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player playing the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 to increase the volume up to a desired volume. If the player who has been playing feels loudly at the volume adjusted by the player and feels loud at the music and sound effects, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game, By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

[8. Game content]
Next, the contents of a game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is rotated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Then, the ball is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the hitting strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be driven harder as the clockwise rotation is performed, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute continuously, that is, , A game ball can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and the game ball is inserted into the obstacle nail. By the contact, the flowing speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nails, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 in a front view from the highest portion, while contacting a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), It flows down in the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp exit 2522.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward. When the game ball enters the chance entrance 2535 at the center of the stage 2530 and is released from the chance exit 2536 into the game area 5a, the chance exit 2536 is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that the probability is high. The first start port 2002 is accepted. When game balls are received in the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When a game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the area other than the center into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. The game balls released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a are opened in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and the attacker unit 2400, and the opening in the attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the state such as the first grand prize hole 2005.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the side slope 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, , Starting port 2002 of starting port unit 2100, etc. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right-handed), It is discharged to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400 from the right guide passage 2540 of the center role 2500. Immediately below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540, a gate passage 2420 provided with a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400 is arranged, and a game ball enters the gate passage 2420 with a high probability. I do.

  Then, when the right-hitting game ball enters the gate passage 2420 and passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. The second starting port door 2411 that closes the starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), so that game balls can be received in the second starting port 2004. When game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. You.

  In the present embodiment, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result in the normal lottery performed by passing the game ball through the gate unit 2003 (for example, 0. 0). 01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time elapses. The shorter the normal fluctuation time, the more the game balls for which the “normal hit” has been drawn in the gate unit 2003 can be accepted in the second starting port 2004.

  Note that if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of ordinary lottery results to be held is limited to four, and for more than that, even if a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 displays an advantageous game state (for example, “big hit”, “big hit”) that is advantageous to the player. A special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change”, “time reduction”, etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). Note that the special lottery results that are determined by accepting game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include “losing”, “15R big hit A”, “15R big hit B”, and the like.

  When the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. After the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are ready to receive game balls in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the first special winning opening 2005 when the first special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is provided from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. ) Are paid out to the upper plate 321. On the other hand, when a game ball is received in the second special winning opening 2006 while the second special winning opening 2006 is in an open state, a predetermined number (for example, three) of games are provided from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. The ball is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 are capable of accepting game balls, by allowing the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 to receive game balls, a large number of games can be achieved. The ball can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is “big hit”, a big hit game state occurs in which a predetermined round is generated a plurality of times. The jackpot game state of the present embodiment is set in accordance with the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern having one opening / closing or opening / closing pattern having plural times of opening / closing) for accepting and opening game balls during each round. The winning opening 2005 or the second winning opening 2006 operates. As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, for example, in the case of “15R big hit”, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened and closed in the first to third rounds, and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in the fourth to 15th rounds. A “15R big hit game state” is generated.

  In the “big hit”, when the second big winning opening 2006 is in the open state due to the big hit gaming state, the game ball received in the second big winning opening 2006 is distributed to the second receiving opening 2432 by the sorting piece 2433. After the end of the jackpot game state, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" is drawn ("probable change hit") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed (" )).

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the special lottery result by the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. You. The number of reserved special lottery results to be retained is limited to a maximum of four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if a game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is indicated by the function display unit 1400 and the game board effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that the plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the LEDs that are turned on.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, the special lottery result is indicated as an effect image by being indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which three symbol rows composed of a plurality of symbols are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each symbol row is fluctuated and displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective symbol columns are stopped and displayed such that the symbols of the three symbol columns to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a fixed image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the gaming board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game state A, a big hit game state B, etc.) according to the selected special lottery result occurs.

  Note that a time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and a time indicating the special lottery result in the gaming board-side effect display device 1600 (the symbol row is changed). (The time until the final image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting a special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected. Operating button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, back front decoration unit 3100 of back unit 3000, back middle movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back right movable effect unit 3400, back upper movable effect unit 3500 It is possible to perform a luminous effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like by appropriately using the movable effect unit 3700, and the underside movable effect unit 3700, and the like. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[9. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of a control process executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly, the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 188 (a) is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a control process performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment first performs the processing in step S1 on condition that the operation switch 954 having the function as the RAM clear switch is operated. , And initializes data stored in various registers and RAM. The operation switch 954 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. The operation switch 954 outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed since the power was turned on. When the determination is made, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process of saving information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is executed. If the operation switch 954 is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a recovery process for recovering the state according to the information is executed. When the operation switch 954 is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is set to an initial state by executing an initialization process without executing a recovery process.

  Next, as a process of step S2, a random number which is a number updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) provided for the lottery process on the display mode when the special symbol is stopped in the variable display, and the special symbol The variable random number provided for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control of the above, and the reach of the variable design of the decorative symbol executed by the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. (The left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped at the same symbol and the middle decorative symbol has not been stopped yet, or the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are synchronously changed to be the same symbol. A state random number to be used in the lottery process of determining whether or not to make a big hit, and a symbol random number to be used in a lottery process for determining the type of the big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number. A random number counter for holding random numbers such as one symbol random number, second symbol random number), and random number (ordinary random number) provided for a lottery process related to a hit at the time of operation of the second starting door 2411. I have.

  In this example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol use a common reach random number, that is, even if the first start port 2002 is started, the second start port 2004 is started. Even in this case, the reach random number is updated from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the reach random number is updated from a different counter. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second reach symbol corresponding to the reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number may be different from the first reach determination table. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different by providing a second reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) which are not involved in the random numbers are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process of step S2 is basically repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

  FIG. 188 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register saving process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2401, the first starting opening sensor 3112, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the first big winning opening sensor 4005, the second big winning opening sensor 2402, the first Detection signals from various switches, such as the entrance sensor 2434, the second entrance sensor 2435, and the general winning opening sensor 3111, are input. Next, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, the random number (special random number, ordinary random number) related to the display mode of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol when the variable display is stopped out of the above random numbers is updated. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this manner, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol display as the process of step S14. Execute Although the special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flags).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes, as the process of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process related to a hit at the moment of operation of the second starting door 2411. In the normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is configured to execute the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the second starting door 2411 becomes higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game state. (So-called reduced working hours). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is shortened. When the result is a hit, the opening time of the second starting port door 2411 is extended to realize such a time saving state.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next executes the special symbol process as the process of step S16. Then, processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the above-described normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next performs information output processing of outputting data such as hit information (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the processing of step S18. I do.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes the first starting port sensor 3112, the second starting port sensor 4004, the first big winning opening sensor 4005, and the second When the detection signals of the winning opening sensor 2402, the general winning opening sensor 3111, and the like are in the ON state, the payout control command is output to the payout control board 951 so that the prize balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 952a mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and pays out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a storage process for checking an increase or decrease in the number of startup storages as a process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. Then, after that, the drive control of the constantly operating actuator is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is ended when the interrupt is permitted (step S24). Becomes

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process using a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be performed. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for the various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 189, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first uses the first starting port sensor 3112 The first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the above random number counter on condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S31). A first opening opening passage process, such as storing in a special symbol holding storage area, is executed (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is replaced with the random number. A second starting port passage process such as acquiring from the counter and storing this in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S39) is executed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process on the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) becomes a mode suggesting "15R big hit A", The opening and closing of the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 is controlled in accordance with the 15R jackpot gaming state A, and the game ball received by the second special winning opening 2006 is set to the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432. Is activated in the first round in which game balls can be distributed to the second receiving port 2432 among the first to third rounds in which the second large winning opening 2006 is opened by driving and controlling the sorting piece 2433 to be distributed to any one of the above. Execute the process set in. In addition, when a mode suggesting “15R jackpot B” is reached, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are controlled to open and close according to the 15R big hit gaming state B, and the second big winning opening 2006 is set. The driving piece 2433 for distributing the received game ball to either the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 is driven and the second receiving port of the first to third rounds of opening the second winning port 2006 is controlled. A process of setting the valid state in the first round in which game balls can be distributed to the entrance 2432 is executed.

  Here, the “valid state” and the “invalid state” will be described. First, in the present embodiment, the state when the game ball is received in the second reception port 2432 has an “effective state”. Here, the “valid state” is set to the second receiving port 2432 in the first round in which the game balls can be distributed to the second receiving port 2432 among the first to third rounds in which the second special winning opening 2006 is opened. This is a state in which the control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state is permitted (enabled) by accepting the game ball. Therefore, when the game ball is received in the second reception port 2432 in the “valid state”, the state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. In the present embodiment, a “disabled state” different from the “valid state” is provided as a state in which game balls are not received in the second reception port 2432. Here, the “invalid state” means that the second and third rounds of distributing game balls to the first reception port 2431 and the first large winning opening 2005 among the first to third rounds of opening the second large winning opening 2006 are opened. In principle, game balls are not accepted at the second reception port 2432, such as the 4th to 15th rounds. Even if game balls are received at the second reception port 2432, a high probability is obtained after the big hit game state ends. The state is not allowed to be controlled (disabled). Therefore, even if a game ball is received in the second reception port 2432 in the “invalid state”, the state is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, the “invalid state” is used to allow the hall management side to be notified of information regarding the occurrence of such anomaly when a game ball is accepted at the second reception port 2432 due to an anomaly such as cheating. , A period in which it is monitored whether or not a game ball is received in the second reception port 2432. In the present embodiment, the game ball is set to the “valid state” in a predetermined round (first round) that allows the game ball to be distributed to the second reception port 2432, and the game ball is set to the second reception port 2432. Is always controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, in the predetermined round (rounds 2 to 15) in which game balls are not distributed to the second reception port 2432, the state is set to “invalid state”, but may be set to “valid state”. Even if the “valid state” is set in all the rounds in the jackpot game state, the game balls are not accepted in the second reception port 2432 in the second to fifteenth rounds in principle. As in the case where the game ball is set to the “invalid state” in the round, it is important whether or not the game ball is accepted in the second reception port 2432 in the first round in which the “valid state” is set.

  In the big hit control process (step S41), after performing opening control of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006, each set process of the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving number counter is executed. . The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state. During the execution of the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B), it is possible to distribute the game ball to the second receiving port 2432 in the first to third rounds in which the second big winning opening 2006 is opened. When a game ball is received in the second reception port 2432 during the valid state in the first round, the high probability flag (high probability time saving state) is controlled after the big hit game state is completed, so that the high probability flag is set. If the game ball is not received in the second receiving port 2432 during the valid state in the first round, the game is not controlled to the high probability state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, the high probability flag is not set. Then, when the high probability flag is set, when the next big hit or when the counter value of the time saving counter becomes “0”, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. The high probability flag is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the game is in a time saving state, and is a big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) for controlling to a time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit gaming state. It is set when the big hit game state based on the game ends. Then, when the time saving flag becomes the next big hit or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Reset by processing.

  The time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times of the fluctuation display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state. When the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B) controlled to the time saving state and the low probability time saving state is ended, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. The countdown is performed each time the special symbol change display is executed until the counter value becomes “0”, but when the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes “0”, FIG. Are reset (the counter value is returned to "0") in the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG.

  If the jackpot execution flag is not set, the condition is that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is “0”. (Step S36), a first special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S37), and the second special symbol process stored in the second special symbol holding storage area is performed. On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S36), a second special symbol including a lottery process according to a display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process is executed (Step S38). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the first starting port passage processing (step S32).

  Now, in the process of step S31, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 3112 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 190. First, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the first special reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S41. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, if it is determined that the number of reserves of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly set the variable display control of the first special symbol to a suspended state. The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S44, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. To store.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of step S42 to step S44, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly held.

  FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the second starting port passage processing (step S34).

  Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 2593 is in the ON state and that a game ball has entered the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 191. First, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special second symbols is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the reserved number of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly set the variable display control of the second special symbol to the suspended state. The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S54, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special holding number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. To store.

  However, in the process of step S51, when it is determined that the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

  FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S37). The first special symbol process executed in step S37 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, Only the first special symbol process executed in step S37 of the special symbol process will be described. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. A first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which a process of determining a mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on a result of a lottery process on a display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. )
3. Lottery processing on the variation of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the variable random number and the variation of the effect display performed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting processing for performing such operations (step S82)
4. First special symbol change processing that waits until the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol display control 1403 displays the state of the first special symbol when the variation control is stopped based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 188).

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 193, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S101. In the processing of (1), it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value of the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is the variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, the process is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is read out from the RAM. . Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area. The random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the special symbol change display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and a start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first random number is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage areas is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. The various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage areas. As a result, the order in which the variable display control of the first special symbol is suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the variable display control suspension is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

  After that, as a process of step S105, a big hit determination process is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, which is a lottery process for the big hit hit. Thereafter, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated (step S106) so as to proceed to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), this process is ended.

  FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time reduction state, high probability non-time reduction state) (step S111), a high probability state shown in FIG. A big hit determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), a large hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 195 (A) is selected (step S113) and selected. The calculated big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 195 (A) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the gaming state is a low probability state (a normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and a time reduction state (low probability time saving state)). And a large hit determination table used when the game state is a high probability (high probability reduced time state). Then, in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability, the big hit determination value indicating that one kind of first special random number has won the big hit, and the miss judgment indicating that the 299 kinds of first special random numbers are the above-mentioned misses. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the value (big hit probability at low probability: 1/300). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process, in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability referred to be compared with the second special random number, the second special symbol process process is compared with the first special random number. In the same manner as the big hit determination table at the time of low probability, which is referred to, a big hit determination value indicating that one kind of second special random number has won a big hit and 299 kinds of second special random numbers are out of the above. The above-mentioned second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the outlier determination value indicating the fact (big hit probability at low probability: 1/300).

  In the big hit determination table at the time of high probability, ten kinds of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability match the big hit determination value, The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the 290 types of first special random numbers coincide with the outlier determination value (big hit probability at high probability: 1/30). As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state), the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won is determined in the low-probability state (the normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state) and the time-saving state (low-time state). Probability time saving state))). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process, in the high probability big hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first special random number is compared. Similar to the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for the 10 big random numbers, including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the jackpot determination value indicating that the game has been won and to match the loss determination value indicating that the 290 types of second special random numbers are the above-mentioned loss (when the high probability Jackpot probability: 1/30).

  If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, and determines that the big hit is determined (step S115) ), A big hit flag indicating that the change has won the big hit is set, and the process is terminated (step S116), and the selected big hit determination table and the first special read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process are set. As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the data is out of the range, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117). Then, as a result of comparison between the reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102, when it is determined that the reach is out of reach (step S118), a reach flag indicating that the variation becomes reach is set and the process is performed. The process ends (step S119).

  FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 196, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S121).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 195 (B). (Step S122), the type of the big hit is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is determined (step S123). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, the first special symbol is determined to be an out-of-position symbol as a mode at the time of stoppage of fluctuation (step S124).

  As shown in FIG. 195 (B), in the symbol determination table, symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are stored in association with each determination result (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). ing. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained symbol random number. In addition, in the symbol determination table of this example, it is set so that the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are different. ing.

In particular,
1.15R The first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are controlled to open and close according to the gaming state A of the big hit, and the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time in the first round (the game ball is opened). When the ball is difficult to enter, for example, 0.5 seconds, and when it is released for a long time (a game ball can be entered (easy), for example, 20 seconds), it is in an effective state (the game ball is in the second entrance 2432). If the game ball is received by the second receiving port 2432 during the valid state in the first round, the state is set to be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by being accepted. After the big hitting game state, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is controlled to the high-probability time-saving state until the change display is executed 100 times, while the second reception is performed during the valid state in the first round. Game ball at entrance 2432 Only if not put in, 15R jackpot controlled to a low probability time reduction mode until the variation display of the special symbol after the completion of the jackpot gaming state (first special symbol and the second special symbol) is performed 100 times A
2.15R The first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are controlled to open and close according to the gaming state B of the big hit, and the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time in the first round (the game ball is opened). When the ball is difficult to enter, for example, 0.5 seconds, it is in an effective state (a state in which a game ball is received in the second reception port 2432 and the state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state). When a game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the valid state in the first round, the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are fluctuated and displayed after the big hit gaming state is completed. If the game ball is not received in the second entrance 2432 during the valid state in the first round, the special symbol is set after the big hit game state is completed. ( Determining in any of the jackpot from the 15R jackpot B, 2 types of jackpot which variation display one special symbol and the second special symbol) is controlled to a low probability time reduction until it is executed 100 times.

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. In the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination values is set to be different from that in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the determination ratio of each big hit is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 195 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, of the 15R jackpot A and the 15R jackpot B, the 15R jackpot A (one round) which is relatively advantageous to the player The probability that game balls will be accepted in the second reception port 2432 during the effective state of the eyes is high, and the probability of controlling to the high-probability state after the end of the big-hit gaming state is high (a big hit). In contrast to the setting, the 15R jackpot B which is relatively disadvantageous to the player (the probability that the game ball is accepted in the second receiving port 2432 during the valid state in the first round is low, and the probability is high after the jackpot gaming state ends) 50 determination values are set for a large hit with a low probability of being controlled to the probability state. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set only for the 15R jackpot A which is relatively advantageous to the player among the 15R jackpot A and the 15R jackpot B. In this way, at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, since either the 15R big hit A or the 15R big hit B having different degrees of advantage of the player is determined, what kind of big hit is determined at the time of the first big hit is determined. Can be noticed. In the time-saving state controlled after the end of the big hitting game state, a game on the second special symbol side (a game that allows game balls to enter the second starting port 2004) is performed. At the time of the big hit on the side, since the 15R big hit game A is always determined, it is possible to pay attention only to how much prize ball amount can be obtained at the time of extended play. Therefore, since the game property changes between the time of the first big hit and the time of the extended holiday, the game is not monotonous.

  When the type of the big hit is determined, a stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big hit is determined as a mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when the 15R jackpot A is determined, the 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 15R jackpot B is determined, the 15R jackpot B symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R jackpot A is determined as the 15R jackpot symbol, the 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed, as a process of step S125, the lottery result (one of the jackpot type, the reach loss, and the loss is instructed (the state of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is changed). The determination result notification command according to each lottery result is set so that the instruction may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, thereafter, as the process of step S126, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-described first variation pattern setting process (step S82), this process is ended. The peripheral control MPU 1511a starts the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command, and stops and displays in the order of the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol. Display control of the effect display device 1600 as described above.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is in a state of stopping the change (stop symbol), from the received determination result notification command to the 15R of the jackpot related to the first special symbol. If the jackpot A is specified, it is determined to be a 15R jackpot A symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols), and if the jackpot B is specified, it is determined to be a 15R jackpot B symbol (common to the 15R jackpot A symbol). When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the reach effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600. As described above, when the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped at any one of the 15R jackpot A symbol and the 15R jackpot B symbol, it can be determined that the decorative symbol is a big hit from the stop symbol. However, since a common symbol is used as the 15R jackpot A symbol and the 15R jackpot B symbol, either the 15R jackpot A or the 15R jackpot B cannot be determined.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, when the loss of reach is specified from the received determination result notification command, a symbol with a reach. (Combinations of decorative designs that are not the same. However, if the decorative patterns on the left and right are the same), if a loss is specified, a loose design without a reach (a combination of decorative designs that are not the same. However, decorative patterns on the left and right. Are determined to be different), and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 197, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag to If it has been performed (step S141), the type of the jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the change pattern table (not shown) at the time of the jackpot according to the current game state are selected (step S141). If the reach flag has been set (step S143), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the reach according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), and both the big hit flag and the reach flag are set. If it is not set, that is, if it is a normal loss (a loss without performing the reach effect) To selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S145).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S146). The variable pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S147). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set in correspondence with the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S148). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the effect display device 1600 only for the determined fluctuation time.

  Note that a plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is included in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table. The variable random numbers are stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a selects the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process from among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. Is obtained from the table, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the variation pattern table at the time of reach of the present example, it is set so as to determine the type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. . For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the jackpot game state is increased.

  When the first special symbol variation display control is started, the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) as the process of step S149. At the time of updating, this processing ends.

  In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second at the time of working hours is associated with the above-mentioned special symbol random numbers (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). At the time of working hours, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is set in such a manner that the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the above-mentioned special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). In other words, the variation pattern at the time of out-of-office selected during the time reduction is such that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is extremely short as compared to the variation pattern at the time of out-of-time selection during non-time reduction. Symbol fluctuation time information is set.

  FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol change process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol change process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 198, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S171. In the process (1), the variation timer for setting the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is decremented by one. Then, when the variable time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the lottery variable time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is ended.

  FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 199, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S181. In the processing of the above, while performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403, the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation and display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter in which the time reduction flag is set and the number of continuations of the time reduction state is set is “0”. (Step S183). If the counter value is not "0", after counting down the time-saving counter (step S184), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short-time counter is "0" (step S185). . If the counter value is "0", the time saving flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S186). When the counter value of the time-saving counter is determined to be “0” in the processing of step S183, or when the time-saving counter is determined to be not “0” in the processing of step S185, At this point, the process proceeds to the process of step S187.

  When the big hit flag is set (step S187), a big hit start command indicating that a big hit game state is started is set (step S188), and a big hit game state is started (a big hit round start command is set). The waiting time (period for displaying the start of the big hit game state or the like) until the game is performed is set in the interval timer (step S189). Then, if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset. If the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset. If it is not "0", after resetting the counter value (returning to "0"), a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S190), and the first special symbol process is performed. When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process as the initial value (step S191), the process ends.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). In step S188, a big hit start command (15R big hit A start command, 15R big hit B start command) according to the type of big hit is set. As a result, an effect corresponding to the type of the big hit indicated by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the big hit control process (step S39).

  In the above step S189, the standby time until the big hit gaming state is started is set in the interval timer. In the process in step S401, after the standby time set in this interval timer has elapsed, the processing in FIG. As shown in the figure, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls opening and closing of the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006, and the first to third rounds of opening the second special winning opening 2006. Of these, a special winning opening opening / closing process that is set to a valid state in the first round (a state in which the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by receiving a game ball in the second reception port 2432) (step S402). And the second grand prize opening 200 in the first round of the first to third rounds of opening the second grand prize opening 2006 The distributing piece 2433 is drive-controlled so that the game balls received at the second reception port 2432 can be distributed, and the game balls are received at the second reception port 2432 during the valid state in the first round. And a second reception opening / closing process (step S403) for monitoring whether the reception has been performed or not.

  FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening and closing process (step S402).

  Now, if it is determined in the processing of step S411 that the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. 201, the main control board 1310 The main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is open for a predetermined time (for example, according to the operation schedule of the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 described later). When 20 seconds have elapsed for a long time opening and 0.5 seconds for a short time opening (step S412), or when the first or second large winning opening 2005 or 2006 is opened. When the game balls have won the maximum number of wins (for example, 9) (step S413), the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning in the open state is obtained. 2006 is controlled in a closed state (step S414). If it is determined that the current round is to be ended by controlling the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 to a closed state (step S415), it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. As a command, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the type of jackpot and the current number of rounds is set (step S416), and the process proceeds to step S428.

  If it is determined in the process of step S411 that the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 201, the main control board 1310 The main control MPU 1310a opens the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 in accordance with the operation schedule of the first special winning opening 2005 and the second special winning opening 2006 described below. If it is determined (step S417) that a new round is to be started by controlling the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 to an open state (step S418), the peripheral control board A jackpot round start frame according to the type of jackpot and the new number of rounds as a command transmitted to 1510 To set the de (step S419). Then, when it is determined that it is time to set the valid state flag according to the state setting schedule of the second reception port 2432 described later, that is, among the first to third rounds in which the second special winning opening 2006 is opened. If it is the start of the first round (step S420), the valid state flag is set (step S421). If the valid state flag is set and it is determined in step S420 that it is not time to set the valid state flag, that is, if it is the start of the second round, the valid state flag is reset. There is a need to. Then, the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 in the closed state is controlled to be in the open state (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. If it is determined that a new round will not be started by controlling the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 to the open state (for example, the second opening in the same round). (Step S418) Or, when it is determined that it is not time to set the valid state flag (not at the start of the first round) (Step S420), the first big winning opening 2005 or The second special winning opening 2006 is controlled to be open (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. As a result, the effect according to the type of the jackpot designated by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command and the current number of rounds can be executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  Note that the valid state flag indicates that the state is set to a valid state (a state in which the game is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state by receiving the game ball in the second reception port 2432). It is a flag. In the first round of the first to third rounds in which the second special winning opening 2006 is opened, the game balls received in the second special winning opening 2006 in the second receiving opening / closing process (step S403) described later are set in the first round. By controlling the drive of the sorting piece 2433 to be distributed to either the receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432, the game balls can be received in the second receiving port 2432, and the game balls are set to an effective state.

  If it is determined in the processing of step S428 that a game ball has been received in the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006, as shown in FIG. 201, the main control board 1310 The main control MPU 1310a sets a special winning opening ball entry command as a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S429), and ends this processing. Thereby, when the special winning opening ball input command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, an effect corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 is displayed. It can be executed by the device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like.

  If it is determined in the processing of step S417 that it is not the timing to open the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006, the main control is executed as shown in FIG. When the main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310 repeats the open state and the closed state of the first special winning opening 2005 or the second special winning opening 2006 and finishes all rounds (step S423), the big hit is being executed. The flag is reset (step S424). Then, when it is determined that the later-described second entrance passage flag is set (step S425), the high probability flag is set (step S426), the time reduction flag is set, and the counter value of the time reduction counter is set. When an initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of the time saving state (step S427), this processing ends. If it is determined that the second entrance passage flag is not set (step S425), the time saving flag is set without setting the high probability flag, and the time saving state counter is set to the counter value of the time saving number counter. When an initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of (step S427), this processing ends. As described above, when it is determined that the second entrance passage flag is set (the game ball is accepted by the second entrance 2432 during the valid state in the first round), the high probability flag and the high probability flag are set. The time saving flag is set, and the high probability time saving state is controlled, but the second entrance passage flag is not set (the game ball was not accepted in the second entrance 2432 during the valid state in the first round). If it is determined that the time saving flag is set, only the time saving flag is set, and the state is controlled to the low probability time saving state.

  FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing a procedure for the second reception opening / closing process (step S403).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S431 that the second reception port 2432 is in an open state (a state in which game balls are distributed to the second reception port 2432 side by the sorting pieces 2433), FIG. As shown in the figure, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 operates from the open state of the second receiving port 2432 for a predetermined period of time (for example, Seconds, 0.2 seconds during opening for a short time) (step S423), or the current round (first round) is ended by controlling the second special winning opening 2006 to a closed state. Sometimes (step S433), the second receiving port 2432 in the open state is closed (to the first receiving port 2431 side by the sorting piece 2433). Controlling the state) technique sphere is distributed (step S434).

  If it is determined in the process of step S431 that the second reception port 2432 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 202, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits the When it is time to open the second receiving port 2432 according to the operation schedule of the segment 2433 (step S435), the second receiving port 2432 in the closed state is controlled to the open state (step S436).

  Next, when it is determined in the process of step S437 that the game ball has been received in the second receiving port 2432 in the open state, as shown in FIG. 202, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 It is determined whether a game ball has been received in the second reception port 2432 during the valid state of the first round while the valid state flag is set (step S438). Then, when it is determined that the game ball is received in the second reception port 2432 during the valid state in the first round (step S438), the second reception port is determined during the valid state in the first round. If the second reception passage flag indicating that the game ball has been accepted is not set in 2432 (step S439), the second reception passage flag is set (step S440) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the second entrance passage command is set as the command to be executed (step S411), the process is terminated. As described above, as long as the game ball is not accepted in the second entrance 2432 during the valid state in the first round, the second entrance passage flag is not set, and the high probability flag is set in step S426. Since it is not set, there is no control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, when the second reception passage command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, an effect according to the reception of the game ball to the second reception 2432 is provided by the effect display device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, and the like. Can be performed.

  FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary symbol process (step S15).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is in the ON state and that a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, the main signal is output as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate passage process such as acquiring the ordinary random number of the ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the RAM as the process of step S802. I do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Ordinary symbol normal processing in which the ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read ordinary random number, a lottery process or the like for a display mode when the variation control of the ordinary symbol is stopped is performed (step S803).
2. Ordinary symbol variation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation type (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation process that stands by until the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is stopped (step S805).
4. Variation display of the normal symbol so that the normal symbol variation control mode determined based on the result of the lottery process on the display mode when the normal symbol variation control is stopped is displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402. Normal symbol stop processing to stop (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped becomes a mode suggesting “per-universal”, the second starting port door 2411 rotates to play the game to the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory release processing for executing processing for controlling the acceptance of the ball (step S807)

  The ordinary symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the ordinary symbol ordinary process (step S803) should be performed in the above-described process of step S1 (see FIG. 188).

  FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate section passing process (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is in the ON state and that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains, from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, the counter value of the ordinary reservation number counter as the process of step S811. Then, based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the reserved number of the ordinary symbols is the maximum value “4”.

  In the process of step S811, if it is determined that the number of reserved ordinary symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed in order to newly set the variable display control of the ordinary symbols to the suspended state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the ordinary reservation number counter is counted up (added by one). Next, as the process of step S813, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure variable random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, as a process of step S814, each of the random numbers thus obtained is stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the ordinary holding number counter in the RAM area of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of reserved ordinary symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S812 to S814, the above-mentioned variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

  When the ordinary symbol process flag indicates that the ordinary symbol ordinary process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 205, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly performs the process of step S821 as follows. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value of the ordinary suspended number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the ordinary symbol in the suspended state, then, as a process of step S822, the ordinary symbol stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is processed. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary figure variable random numbers) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal count number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. Is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) manner.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball to the gate section 2003 are sequentially arranged from the first (earliest) area. Remember. When the random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out, and the N-th (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols has been suspended is stored so as to be specified, and the suspension of the fluctuation display control is sequentially released from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a time reduction state (low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state) (step S826), a time reduction time general time chart determination table (not shown) ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current game state is the non-time reduction state (low probability non-time reduction state) (step S825), a non-time reduction time-of-day map hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S826). S827), and compares the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol ordinary process (step S828).

  Note that the general chart hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the game state is a time reduction (low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state). And a non-work time reduction ordinary figure hit determination table used when the game state is a non-work time reduction (low probability non-work time reduction state). Then, in the time-saving general-purpose hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, all of the 251 types of normal random numbers match the general-purpose hit determination value indicating that the general-purpose hit has been won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with a deviation determination value in a general figure indicating a deviation. As described above, when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 during the working hours, the game is always won per the ordinary drawing, and the second starting port door 2411 rotates to move to the second starting port 2004. The game balls are controlled to be accepted.

  In addition, in the non-working time general map hit determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is found that all of the 251 types of normal random numbers coincide with the general map hit determination value indicating that the winning has been achieved. However, the above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-universal-drawing determination value indicating that the out-of-usual drawing is out of alignment. In this manner, in non-working hours, even if a game ball passes through the gate section 2003, the ball is not won per ordinary drawing, so that the second starting port door 2411 rotates and the second starting port door 2411 rotates. There is no control to allow game balls to be accepted into the starting opening 2004.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected general symbol hit determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process, and determines that the normal symbol hit is determined (step S829). ), After setting a general symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has been won per general symbol (step S830), the general symbol as a mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the normal symbol fluctuation control is stopped. On the other hand, the symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol is lost as a result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol ordinary process, the variation of the ordinary symbol is determined. An out-of-usual symbol is determined as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) (step S832). After that, when the above-described ordinary symbol process flag is updated (step S833) so as to proceed to the ordinary symbol variation time determination process (step S804), this process is ended.

  In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 251/251, and the lottery result of the ordinary symbol always wins, and the time required for the variation display control of the ordinary symbol is extremely long. To a short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). When the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, the second opening port 2004 is controlled to be in an open state and closed for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). . That is, during the control of the time saving state, the probability that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit is extremely high, the time required for the variable display control of the ordinary symbol is constant and short, and the open state of the second starting port 2004 is opened. It is much easier for the second starting port 2004 to win a game ball due to the long time, etc., and it is more efficient to aim the second starting port 2004 at the second starting port 2004 than to the first starting port 2002. You can win a prize. In the control of the non-time saving state, it is assumed that the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is set to 0/251, and that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol does not always win, and that the aim is the second starting port 2004. Also, it is not possible to make the second starting port 2004 win a game ball.

  As described above, during the control in the non-time saving state, even if the second starting port 2004 is aimed at, it is not possible to cause the second starting port 2004 to win a game ball. In order for the game ball to win, the game ball must be fired (so-called "left-handed") aiming at the left side of the center role 2500. In the gaming area 5a on the left side of the center role item 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a game ball hits the obstacle nail. By contacting, various movements are given to the game ball and flow down. For this reason, even if a player hits a game ball on the left side of the center role item 2500 aiming at the first starting port 2002, it does not always win the first starting port 2002, and wins the first starting port 2002. The missing game ball is discharged to the outside from an out port 1126 provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, a game ball can be more efficiently won by aiming at the second starting port 2004 than at the first starting port 2002. Must be fired (so-called "right-handed") to aim at the right side of the center role 2500 so as to win. Also, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, it passes through the gate portion 2003. The game ball that has entered the second starting port 2004 has a very high probability of winning. For this reason, during the control of the time saving state, the game ball hit into the right side of the center role item 2500 is hardly wasted (is discharged to the outside from the out-port 1126 or the sub-out port 2007), and the non-time-saving is not performed. As compared with the first starting port 2002 during the state control, the game ball comes to the second starting port 2004 extremely efficiently.

  In addition, during the control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, the probability of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol being a hit when passing through the gate portion 2003 is extremely high. Since the time required for the control is constant and short, and the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is long, a game ball can easily enter the second starting port 2004, and further, a game is played to the second starting port 2004. When the ball is won, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is set to about 1 second, which is extremely short as compared with the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control in the non-time saving state. The variable display control of the symbol (the suspension of the special symbol variable display control) can be performed. In other words, when the time saving state is controlled after the end of the big hitting game state, by hitting a game ball on the right side of the center role 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, the big hit is regained in a short time. It can be controlled to the jackpot game state and expect to obtain many game balls. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the number of game balls to be paid out by winning game balls to the second starting port 2004 is one, the number of game balls to the second starting port 2004 is Even if a prize frequently occurs, it is possible to reduce the burden on the gaming hall while increasing the interest of the player.

[10. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 206, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an interrupt every time 2 ms elapses, and executes a 2 ms regular process. In the 2 ms steady-state process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed. The flag T is set, and a process of resetting (clearing) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter to 0 is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the normal 2 ms process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms regular process, a process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 ms regular process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T has not been set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 207 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the 16 ms regular process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms regular processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the processing of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing of step S601, a command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, a process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)) is performed. Based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by being set, the control processing related to the effect display device 1600 is executed.

  In the sound control process of step S603, a control process related to a speaker or the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving board 4017 and the like are executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers (for example, prefetch random numbers) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  Note that the processing in steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms regular processing ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady-state process to the end of the 16 ms steady-state process, the 16 ms steady-state process is started immediately after the start of the 16 ms steady-state process (the command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady processing, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady processing, the 16 ms steady processing is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms regular process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing and the 16 ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

[11. Big hit gaming state of this embodiment]
In the present embodiment, a second special winning opening 2006 having a first receiving opening 2431 and a second receiving opening 2432 therein is provided, and is effective in the first round among the first to third rounds in which the second winning opening 2006 is opened. The state is set to a state (a state in which a high-probability state is controlled after the jackpot game state is completed by receiving a game ball in the second receiving port 2432), and the second receiving port 2432 is opened (a sorting piece 2433). Thus, the game ball is distributed to the second reception port 2432 side), and the game is performed to determine whether the game ball is distributed (accepted) to the second reception port 2432 during the valid state in the first round. However, when opening the second special winning opening 2006, the player is not notified whether or not the second special winning opening 2006 is opened in the first round. Even if the ball is received, it is difficult to determine whether or not it is the first round of opening in which the game ball can be received in the second reception port 2432, and after the big hitting game state ends. It is difficult to determine whether to control to the high probability state or not to control to the high probability state. A game example in which it is difficult to determine whether a game ball is distributed (accepted) to the second reception port 2432 during the valid state in the first round, will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 208 (A) is a view showing a closed state of the second receiving port 2432 (a state in which game balls are distributed to the first receiving port 2431 side by the sorting pieces 2433), and FIG. It is a figure which shows the open state of the 2nd receiving port 2432 (the state where a game ball is distributed to the 2nd receiving port 2432 side by the distribution piece 2433).

  As described above, the attacker unit 2400 detects the second special winning opening 2006, the second special winning opening door 2413 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 2006, and the game ball received in the second special winning opening 2006. A second winning port sensor 2402. The second special winning opening door 2413 is formed so as to move forward and backward by driving the second attacker solenoid 2109, and closes the second special winning opening 2006 when the second attacker solenoid 2109 is OFF (when not energized). Then, when the second attacker solenoid 2109 is ON (when energized), the second special winning opening 2006 is opened.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes an internal passage 2430 through which the game balls received in the second big winning opening 2006 can flow, a first reception port 2431 and a second reception port 2432 that are open at the bottom of the internal passage 2430. A sorting piece 2433 for distributing a game ball to either the first receiving port 2431 or the second receiving port 2432 in the internal passage 2430, and a first receiving sensor 2434 for detecting a gaming ball received in the first receiving port 2431. And a second reception sensor 2435 for detecting a game ball received by the second reception 2432. The distribution piece 2433 is formed so as to be rotated by driving the distribution solenoid 2110. As shown in FIG. 208 (A), when the distribution solenoid 2110 is OFF (when not in operation), the distribution piece 2433 rises vertically to connect the second special winning opening 2006 with the first reception port 2431. In this state, the game balls received by the second special winning opening 2006 are distributed to the first receiving opening 2431 side. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 208 (B), when the distribution solenoid 2110 is ON (during operation), the upper side of the distribution piece 2433 moves to the left in front view and contacts the left side wall of the internal passage 2430. (Or approach), and the second winning port 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 are brought into communication with each other, and the game balls received by the second winning port 2006 are distributed to the second receiving port 2432 side.

  The execution table at the time of the 15R jackpot gaming state A shown in FIG. And the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 and the state setting schedule of the second reception port 2432 are associated with each other. Similarly, the execution table at the time of the 15R big hit game state B shown in FIG. 209 (B) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 1310a, and the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in the 1st to 15th rounds. , The operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433, and the state setting schedule of the second reception port 2432 are associated with each other. FIG. 210 (A) is a timing chart of the first to third rounds executed according to the execution table in the 15R big hit game state A, and FIG. 210 (B) is executed in accordance with the execution table in the 15R big hit game state B. 7 is a timing chart of the first to third rounds.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (A), in the 15R jackpot gaming state A, the second big winning opening 2006 is briefly opened as an operation schedule of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in the first round ( 0.5 seconds), and after a predetermined time (4.5 seconds) has elapsed as an interval time within the round, the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (20 seconds). Also, as an operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 in the first round, when the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (0.5 second), the sorting piece 2433 is operated for a short time (0.2 second), When the second winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (20 seconds), the sorting piece 2433 is set to operate for a long time (10 seconds). The state setting schedule of the second reception port 2432 in the first round is an effective state (a state in which a high-probability state is controlled after the jackpot game state is completed by receiving a game ball in the second reception port 2432). Is set to

  In the 15R jackpot gaming state A, the second big winning opening 2006 is shortly opened (0.5 seconds) as an operation schedule of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in the second round. Is set. The operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 in the second round is set so that the sorting piece 2433 is not operated. In addition, the state setting schedule of the second reception port 2432 in the second round includes an invalid state (in principle, game balls are not accepted in the second reception port 2432, and the state is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state). State).

  In the 15R jackpot gaming state A, the operation schedule of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in the third round is set so that the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (20 seconds). ing. The operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 in the third round is set so that the sorting piece 2433 is not operated. The state setting schedule of the second reception port 2432 in the third round includes an invalid state (in principle, game balls are not accepted in the second reception port 2432, and the state is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state). State).

  As shown in FIG. 209 (B), in the 15R big hit gaming state B, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time as the operation schedule of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in the first round ( 0.5 seconds). The operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 in the first round is such that the sorting piece 2433 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds) when the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds). Is set to The state setting schedule of the second reception port 2432 in the first round is an effective state (a state in which a high-probability state is controlled after the jackpot game state is completed by receiving a game ball in the second reception port 2432). Is set to

  In the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the operation schedule of the first winning port 2005 and the second winning port 2006 in the second round is set so that the second winning port 2006 is opened for a long time (20 seconds). ing. The operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 in the second round is set so that the sorting piece 2433 is not operated. In addition, the state setting schedule of the second reception port 2432 in the second round includes an invalid state (in principle, game balls are not accepted in the second reception port 2432, and the state is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state). State).

  In the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (0.5 second) as the operation schedule of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 in the third round, and the round is started. The second special winning opening 2006 is set to be open for a long time (20 seconds) after a predetermined time (4.5 seconds) has elapsed as the internal interval time. The operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 in the third round is set so that the sorting piece 2433 is not operated. The state setting schedule of the second reception port 2432 in the third round includes an invalid state (in principle, game balls are not accepted in the second reception port 2432, and the state is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state). State).

  As shown in FIG. 210 (A) and FIG. 210 (B), in the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the opening time and the number of times of opening the second special winning opening 2006 as the whole of the first to third rounds , The release timings are all the same. In the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the opening time and the number of times of opening the second special winning opening 2006 in each of the first to third rounds are different. Has not notified the player. As described above, in the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 2006 is the same as the whole of the first to third rounds. From the pattern, the player cannot determine whether it is the 15R big hit gaming state A or the 15R big hit gaming state B.

  In the present embodiment, both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B are enabled in the first round (the gaming state is controlled to the high probability state after the jackpot gaming state is completed by receiving the game ball in the second receiving port 2432). In the 15R jackpot gaming state A, the second big winning opening 2006 in the first round is opened for a long time (20 seconds) at the second opening, so the second big winning is set. It is extremely easy for game balls to be received in the mouth 2006, and the sorting piece 2433 is operated for a long time (10 seconds) while the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (20 seconds). It is extremely easy for the game balls received at the two major winning openings 2006 to be distributed (accepted) to the second reception port 2432. As described above, in the 15R big hit gaming state A, since the probability that the game ball is accepted in the second reception port 2432 in the first round set to the valid state is extremely high, the state is controlled to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. The probability is also very high. On the other hand, in the 15R jackpot gaming state B, since the second big winning opening 2006 is only opened for a short time (0.5 second) in the first round, it is extremely difficult to receive a game ball in the second big winning opening 2006. In addition, during the period in which the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (0.5 second), the sorting piece 2433 is operated only for a short time (0.2 second), so it is accepted by the second big winning opening 2006. It is extremely difficult for the game balls to be distributed (accepted) to the second reception port 2432. As described above, in the 15R big hit gaming state B, since the probability that the game ball is accepted in the second reception port 2432 in the first round set to the valid state is extremely low, the state is controlled to the high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. The probability is extremely low.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, there is only a short opening time (0.5 second) at the first opening of the second big winning opening 2006. At the time of opening the mouth 2006 for the first time, it is extremely difficult to receive the game ball in the second big winning opening 2006, and further, during the period when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (0.5 second). Since the segment 2433 is operated only for a short time (0.2 second), it is extremely difficult for the game ball received in the second special winning opening 2006 to be distributed (accepted) to the second receiving opening 2432. . On the other hand, since both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B are opened for a long time (20 seconds) when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for the second time, the second big winning opening 2006 is the second time. At the time of opening, it is extremely easy for game balls to be received in the second grand prize opening 2006. However, in the 15R jackpot gaming state A, the second opening of the second special winning opening 2006 corresponds to the first round, the distributing piece 2433 is operated while the second special winning opening 2006 is open, and the valid state is set. (A state in which the game state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state by the reception of the game ball in the second receiving port 2432), but in the 15R big hit game state B, the second big winning port is set. When the second opening of 2006 is equivalent to the second round, the sorting piece 2433 is not operated while the second special winning opening 2006 is opened, and the distributing piece 2433 is disabled (in principle, a game ball is placed in the second receiving port 2432). The state is not accepted, and the state is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state). In addition, the number of rounds when the second winning opening 2006 is opened for the second time is determined. In addition, whether or not the sorting piece 2433 is operated during opening of the second winning opening 2006 is determined. The player is not notified as to whether the setting is made or the setting is made invalid. For this reason, even if a game ball is received in the second special winning opening 2006 when the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for the second time, one round in which a game ball can be received in the second receiving opening 2432 is enabled. It is difficult to determine whether the eyes are open or not, and it is difficult to determine whether to control to the high probability state or not to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in the first round, the operation of the sorting piece 2433 is started when the opening of the second special winning opening 2006 is started. Also, the operation of the sorting piece 2433 is ended before. Also, in the first round, when the opening of the second big winning opening 2006 is started, the state is valid (when the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432, the state is controlled to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends). After the second winning opening 2006, which is open as the first round, is closed, the set valid state is continued until the next round, the second round, is started. . For this reason, the game ball distributed (accepted) to the second reception port 2432 by the operation of the sorting piece 2433 in the first round is closed after the second special winning opening 2006 is closed (the sorting piece 2433 is closed). Even if it reaches the second reception sensor 2433 after the operation is completed), it can be determined whether a game ball has been received in the second reception 2432 during the valid state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in each round (1st to 3rd rounds) in the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, even before the opening time of the second big winning opening 2006 elapses. When the maximum number of winning balls (for example, 9) has been won in the open second large winning opening 2006, the open second large winning opening 2006 is controlled to be closed. When closing the second special winning opening 2006 before the opening time of the second special winning opening 2006 in the first round elapses, if the distributing piece 2433 is in operation, the distributing piece 2433 is moved. Inactive.

  In the present embodiment, as an operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433, the sorting piece 2433 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds), and after a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) elapses, the sorting piece 2433 is set to a long time. It has a single operation schedule set to release time (10 seconds), and when starting the first round in the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, such distribution is performed. The operation schedule of the piece 2433 is started. In this way, by setting the operation schedule of the sorting pieces 2433 to a single operation schedule, the data amount related to the operation schedule of the sorting pieces 2433 is prevented from increasing as much as possible.

  In the present embodiment, when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened twice in each round in the 15R big hit gaming state A and the 15R big hit gaming state B, the first opening of the second big winning opening 2006 is performed. Between the hour and the second opening time, 4.5 seconds is set as the interval time in the round. On the other hand, when the opening of the second special winning opening 2006 in the round ends, the round is ended, and after the opening of the second special winning opening 2006 ends and before the next round starts. The interval time between rounds is set to 4.5 seconds. Thus, by setting the intra-round interval time and the inter-round interval time to the same time (4.5 seconds), the occurrence period of the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B is set. It is possible to approximate a series of opening patterns (operation patterns) of the second big winning opening 2006 in the 15R big hitting game state A and the 15R big hitting game state B.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (A) and FIG. 209 (B), in the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning in each of the 4th to 15th rounds. The operation schedule of the mouth 2006 is set so that the first special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (30 seconds). As described above, in both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, in the fourth to fifteenth rounds, the game ball is inserted into the second receiving port 2432 when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened as in the first to third rounds. Is simply played (whether the game ball is accepted) when the first special winning opening 2005 is opened. The opening time of the first special winning opening 2005 in each of the fourth to fifteenth rounds is longer than the opening time of the second special winning opening 2006 in each of the first to third rounds. The prize ball amount that can be obtained by opening the first large winning opening 2005 in the fifteenth round is larger than the prize ball amount that can be obtained by opening the second large winning opening 2006 in the first to third rounds. Due to the large number, unlike the game in the first to third rounds, the player can play the game in the fourth to fifteenth rounds with ease and peace of mind.

  Next, a specific effect example when the 15R big hit game state A and the 15R big hit game state B are executed on the effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, at least the first to third rounds in the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B perform a common effect on the effect display device 1600.

  First, in the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is started based on the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received by the peripheral control board 1510, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → medium. The display is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative symbols, but as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the fluctuation stop of the decorative symbols, a 15R jackpot A among the jackpots related to the first special symbol is received from the received judgment result notification command. Is determined, a 15R jackpot A symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols) is determined. If a 15R jackpot B is identified, a 15R jackpot B symbol (common to the 15R jackpot A symbol) is determined. The determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600 when the fluctuation time specified from the time elapses (at the end of the reach effect). There. In this way, regardless of the determination of the 15R jackpot A or the 15R jackpot B, by displaying and controlling the common stop symbol as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is 15R from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. Either the jackpot A or the 15R jackpot B cannot be determined.

  Next, after the peripheral control board 1510 receives the jackpot start command (15R jackpot A start command, 15R jackpot B start command), the first round jackpot round start command (1 round A start command, 1 round B start command) Is received, that is, until the waiting time until the jackpot game state set in the interval timer is started in the process of step S190 elapses, the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game An explanation effect for explaining a game method in the first to third rounds of the state B is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211 (A), the effect display device 1600 notifies the player of a message that “If you enter the ball while the second big winning opening is open, it may change!”. This allows the player to understand that if a game ball is received while the second special winning opening 2006 is being opened, there is a chance that the state will be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. it can.

  Next, after the peripheral control board 1510 receives the first round big hit start command (1 round A start command, 1 round B start command), the third round big hit end command (3 round A end command, 3 round B start command) Until the end command) is received, that is, during the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the second large winning opening 2006 receives the second ball so that the gaming ball is accepted. A target instruction effect indicating that the player should aim to open the special winning opening 2006 is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211 (B), the effect display device 1600 notifies the player of the message “during the chance mode! Aim for the second big winning opening!” In addition to the image of the game area 5a that includes the game area 5a, an image indicating the location of the second special winning opening 2006 that the player should aim at in the game area 5a is displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly know where in the game area 5a to aim for a game ball to be accepted while the second special winning opening 2006 is open.

  In this embodiment, in the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the effect display device 1600 only displays an image indicating the location of the second big winning opening 2006 that the player should aim for. Instead, the second large winning opening 2006 (the vicinity of the second large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the second large winning opening 2006) is illuminated by the LED from the back side, so that the player can aim at the second large winning opening. The place of the winning opening 2006 is made to stand out. Except for the second special winning opening 2006, by controlling the light emission of an LED or the like so that the entire game area 5a becomes dark, the place of the second special winning opening 2006 that the player should aim at is relatively prominent. I try to make it. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp where in the game area 5a to aim for a game ball to be accepted while the second special winning opening 2006 is open. Similarly, in the description effect performed before the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the place of the second big winning opening 3006 that the player should aim for is similarly distinguished. You may make it do.

  On the other hand, in the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the second big winning opening 2006 (around the second big winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the second big winning opening 2006) and In contrast, the light emission of the LED and the like is controlled so that the area around the second reception port 2432 and the sorting piece 2433 inside becomes dark. In addition, a cover member is provided on the front side of the attacker unit 2400 including the second winning port 2006, the second receiving port 2432, the sorting piece 2433, and the like. On the front side of the mouth 2006, a decorative pattern is not given while being transparent or translucent, whereas on the front side of the second receiving port 2432 or the sorting piece 2433 of the cover member, the second big prize is won. A translucent lower transparency than the front side of the mouth 2006 is used, and a decorative pattern is provided. In this manner, in the attacker unit 2400, the second big winning opening 2006 is easier for the player to visually recognize than the vicinity of the second reception port 2432 and the sorting piece 2433, and the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot In the first to third rounds of the game state B, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been received in the second special winning opening 2006 by determining whether or not the sorting piece 2433 is operating (when the second receiving opening 2432 is in the open state). The player is more conscious than whether the game ball has been received (distributed) in the second reception port 2432 or not.

  In addition, the following may be performed as another example of a method of making the player easily distinguish the second big winning opening 2006 with respect to the second reception port 2433 and the sorting piece 2433. For example, “the opening / closing operation of the second grand prize opening 2006 should be easy to identify (for example, an electric chew type or an opening type in which the opening / closing door is inclined forward)”, “the opening / closing operation of the second reception opening 2433” (The operation of the sorting piece 2433) is difficult to identify (for example, an open type in which the opening / closing door moves in the front-rear direction). Larger than the opening area of the opening ”.

  Next, in the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the big winning opening ball entry command, that is, the gaming ball is in the second big winning opening 2006. Each time the ball is accepted, a ball entry effect indicating that the game ball has been accepted is executed in the second special winning opening 2006. Specifically, when a game ball is received in the second special winning opening 2006 (not only when a game ball is first received in the second special winning opening 2006, but also in the second special winning opening 2006) (Including the case where the game ball is accepted.), And based on the setting of the special winning opening ball input command, the effect display device 1600 displays the “second special winning opening” as shown in FIG. To the player. Thereby, for example, even when the player misses whether or not the game ball is actually received in the second special winning opening 2006, it is clearly indicated that the game ball has been received in the second special winning opening 2006. It can be known, and the expectation that the game is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, in the first round of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the number of times of opening the second big winning opening 2006 is made different, but in the liquid crystal display device 1600, the second big winning opening 2006 The player is not informed of what round the opening time is. In addition, the player is not notified whether the sorting piece 2433 is activated while the second special winning opening 2006 is open, and whether the sorting piece 2433 is set to the valid state or the invalid state. . In the effect display device 1600, the game balls are received at the opening of the first round, and the game balls are received at the opening of the second and third rounds. When the ball is accepted, the same effect as when entering the ball is executed. For this reason, even if the game ball is received while the second special winning opening 2006 is being opened, it is determined whether or not it is the opening time of the first round in which the game ball can be received in the second reception port 2432. It is difficult to determine whether to control to the high probability state or not to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the maximum number of winning balls (for example, nine) is won while the second big winning opening 2006 is open. Until the second big winning opening 2006, as the number of game balls accepted increases, the probability that the game will be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state is shown to be higher. Then, in the effect display device 1600, after performing the on-balloon effect indicating that the game ball has been accepted in the second big winning opening 2006, the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B are performed. As long as the eyes have not ended, the target instruction effect shown in FIG. 211 (B) indicates that the player should aim at the opening of the second special winning opening 2006 so that the game ball can be received in the second special winning opening 2006. Production). Thus, as long as the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B have not been completed, the player should make an effort to accept the game ball in the second big winning opening 2006. Can be recognized. In the effect display device 1600, every time a game ball is received in the second special winning opening 2006, only the effect at the time of entering the ball indicating that the game ball is received in the second special winning opening 2006 is executed. Alternatively, the total number of game balls accepted in the second winning opening 2006 in the first to third rounds may be displayed.

  Next, after the peripheral control board 1510 receives the fourth round big hit round start command (4 round A start command, 4 round B start command), the 15R big hit game state A and the 15R big hit game state B are 4 to 15 rounds. Between the eyes, whether the game ball is accepted when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened as in the first to third rounds, and whether there is a chance to be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Instead of simply playing a game of how many prize balls can be obtained by accepting a game ball when the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, it is intended to entertain the player during the game. The performance during the big hit game is being executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 211 (D), the effect display device 1600 displays the number of rounds executed in each of the fourth to fifteenth rounds. , The number of game balls accepted when the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, and the number of game balls paid out based on the reception of the game ball in the first big winning opening 2005. The number (total prize balls) and the like are displayed.

  In the present embodiment, in the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, even if a game ball is received while the second big winning opening 2006 is open, a game is played in the second reception port 2432. Since it is difficult to determine whether or not it is the time of the opening of the first round in which the ball can be accepted, the state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, or the state is changed to the high probability state. Although it is difficult to determine whether or not to control, in the subsequent game, whether to control to the high probability state (control) or not to control to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state (control is performed) Or not) can be determined. In this manner, during at least the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the gaming balls are distributed to the second receiving port 2432 during the valid state of the first round (acceptance). ), That is, whether to control to the high probability state or not to the high probability state after the end of the big hitting game state, for example, 15R big hitting game state A and 15R big hitting game state B During execution of the fourth to fifteenth rounds, the player is notified whether to control to the high-probability state or not to the high-probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and to notify the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state. At the end of the fifteenth round of B (before and after), whether to control to the high probability state or not to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state After the notification to the player or after the completion of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the number of fluctuations to several tens is performed as a special symbol fluctuation display, the state is controlled to the high probability state or high. What is necessary is just to notify the player whether or not the state is controlled to the probability state. Of these, after the end of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, if it is controlled whether the state is controlled to the high probability state or not controlled to the high probability state, the state is controlled to the high probability state. The game can be continued with the expectation that it may have been played.

  In the present embodiment, in the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the target indication effect (the effect indicating that the second special winning opening 2006 should be opened) on the effect display device 1600. ) And the effect at the time of entering the ball (the effect indicating that the game ball has been accepted into the second big winning opening 2006), as well as the first effect pattern, during the big hit game executed in the 4th to 15th rounds Like the effect, the game has a second effect pattern for displaying a privilege image or the like that is not displayed in a state other than the big hit game state. Specifically, when the second effect pattern is executed, a continuous series of videos as the privilege video is displayed throughout all the rounds in the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B. In order to make it difficult to determine the number of rounds being executed, it is necessary to prevent the video displayed on the effect display device 1600 from being switched at least when shifting to the next round. In addition, at least in the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, it is necessary to prevent the effect display device 1600 from displaying the number of running rounds. According to such a second effect pattern, in the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, it is not necessary to pay attention to whether or not the second big winning opening 2006 is open. Therefore, whether the sorting piece 2433 is operating (whether the second reception port 2432 is in an open state) or whether the game ball is received (distributed) by the second reception port 2432 is determined. Can be made harder for the player to be aware of. In addition, at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, the player's advantage degree is determined to be either 15R big hit A or 15R big hit B, but according to the determined big hit type, The ratio for determining which of the first effect pattern and the second effect pattern is determined is different. Specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 has an effect pattern determination table corresponding to the type of jackpot, and the effect pattern determination table used at the time of the 15R jackpot A has a second effect pattern that is larger than the first effect pattern. (For example, the ratio determined as the second effect pattern is 80%), whereas the effect pattern determination table used at the time of the 15R big hit B is higher than the second effect pattern. The setting is made so that the ratio determined as the first effect pattern becomes higher (for example, the ratio determined as the first effect pattern is 80%). In addition, at the time of the 15R big hit A, while the probability that the game ball is accepted to the second receiving port 2432 during the valid state in the first round is high, and the probability of controlling to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state is high, At the time of the 15R big hit B, the probability that the game ball is accepted to the second receiving port 2432 during the valid state in the first round is low, and the probability of controlling the game state to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends is low. For this reason, when the first effect pattern is executed, the effect indication device 1600 displays a target instruction effect (an effect indicating that the second special winning opening 2006 should be opened) or an effect at the time of entering a ball (second effect). In addition to the execution of the effect indicating that the gaming ball has been accepted in the two major winning openings 2006, the probability that the gaming ball will be accepted in the second reception port 2432 is high (the probability of being changed to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state). The probability that the game will be controlled is high), and the player will work even harder to make the game ball enter the second special winning opening 2006. On the other hand, when the second effect pattern is executed, the probability that the game ball is accepted in the second reception port 2432 is low (the probability of controlling the game state to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state is low), and thus the above is described. Without executing a target instruction effect or the like, the player is not unnecessarily fueled for entering the game ball into the second winning opening 2006.

  In the present embodiment, at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, either the 15R big hit A or 15R big hit B having different degrees of advantage of the player is determined. The 15R big hit game A is determined. That is, at the time of the big hit on the second special symbol side, since the 15R big hit game state A is executed, the probability that the game ball can be received in the second receiving port 2432 during the valid state in the first round is high, and the big hit game state is set. The probability of controlling to the high probability state after the end is high. For this reason, at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, at least in the first to third rounds, it is determined whether or not the game ball has been distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432, and the big hit game state of the big hit game state. Although it is not notified whether or not to control the state to the high probability state after the end, at the time of the big hit on the second special symbol side, when a game ball is distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432, By notifying the player that the game ball has been distributed (accepted) to the second reception port 2432 and that the control to the high probability state has been determined after the end of the jackpot game state of the jackpot game state. I have. Specifically, at the time of the big hit on the second special symbol side, when the game ball is distributed (accepted) to the second reception port 2432, the effect display is performed based on the setting of the second reception port passage command. In the device 1600, a message such as "the second entrance entrance ball!" Or "high probability determined!" Is passed to the player. As described above, at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, the message is displayed on the effect display device 1600 using the big winning prize entrance ball command, whereas at the time of the big hit on the second special symbol side, the second reception entrance passing command is displayed. Is used to display a message on the effect display device 1600, and the command used at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side and the big hit on the second special symbol side is made different. Thereby, when the game ball is distributed (accepted) to the second reception port 2432, the fact that the game ball is distributed (accepted) to the second reception port 2432, and the big hit in the big hit game state It is possible to clearly know that the control to the high-probability state has been determined after the end of the gaming state, and it is possible to obtain a sense of security that the control will be performed to the high-probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment (first embodiment), the occurrence period of the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B (the second big winning opening 2006 having the second receiving port 2432 is plural) By setting the series of opening and closing modes of the second special winning opening 2006 in the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B to the same in the first round, the sorting piece 2433 can be operated in the first round. Regardless, it can be difficult to determine the number of rounds that have been performed since the opening and closing operation of the second big winning opening 2006. Then, even if the game ball is received in the second special winning opening 2006, it is difficult to determine whether or not it is the opening time of the first round in which the game ball can be received in the second reception port 2432. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether to control to the high probability state or not to control to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state. As a result, even if the game ball is received in the second big winning opening 2006, the player is not given a sense of security and is expected to be controlled or controlled to a high probability state or a high probability state. It is possible to continue the big hit game while giving it to the player.

  According to the first embodiment, the first to third rounds of the 15R big hitting game state A and the 15R big hitting game state B occur (a period in which the second big winning opening 2006 having the second receiving port 2432 is opened plural times). Of the "rate at which the sorting piece 2433 is activated (the rate at which the game ball can be accepted at the second receiving port 2432)" is set for each big hit game state (15R big hit game state A, 15R big hit game state). B). In other words, in the 15R big hitting game state A where “the ratio at which the sorting piece 2433 is activated (the ratio at which the game ball can be received in the second receiving port 2432)” is relatively large, The ratio at which the 2433 is activated (the ratio at which game balls can be accepted at the second reception port 2432) is relatively small compared to the 15R jackpot gaming state B, which is relatively small. When the game ball is accepted, the possibility that the game ball is accepted by the second reception port 2432 is increased, and the possibility that the high probability state occurs is increased. Thereby, a jackpot game state (15R jackpot game state A) in which a high probability state is likely to be given when a game ball is received in the second big winning opening 2006, and a game ball in the second big winning opening 2006 The jackpot game state (15R jackpot game state B), which is unlikely to be given the high probability state when the game is accepted, gives the game a sharpness and wins the V at a conventional predetermined time (specific round). The game can be prevented from becoming monotonous as compared to a gaming machine in which the special winning opening is only opened for a long time (equivalent to the reception of the game ball in the second reception port 2432).

  According to the first embodiment, as described above, a jackpot game state (15R jackpot game state A) in which a high probability state is likely to be given when a game ball is accepted in the second big winning opening 2006 ) And a jackpot game state (15R jackpot game state B) in which it is unlikely that a high probability state will be given when a game ball is accepted in the second big winning opening 2006. The player expects and pays attention to that the state is a jackpot game state in which the ratio at which the sorting piece 2433 operates (the ratio at which the game ball can be accepted by the second reception port 2432) is large. " Games can be realized.

  According to the first embodiment, the first to third rounds of the 15R big hitting game state A and the 15R big hitting game state B occur (a period in which the second big winning opening 2006 having the second receiving port 2432 is opened plural times). Of the second round winning opening 2006 in the first round of the 15R jackpot gaming state A (opening time, opening times, opening timing, etc.). ) And the opening / closing mode of the second special winning opening 2006 over the first and second rounds (non-specific rounds) of the 15R jackpot gaming state B are made the same. Thereby, despite the fact that the sorting piece 2433 is operated in the first round of the 1st to 3rd rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the opening and closing mode of the second big winning opening 2006 is changed. It is difficult to determine whether or not it is the first round, and the above-described game characteristics can be more effectively realized. In the first embodiment, the sorting piece 2433 is set to operate in the first round of the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B in the first to third rounds. The distributing piece 2433 may be set to operate each time the second special winning opening 2006 is opened in the third or third round. For example, when the sorting piece 2433 is operated in the second round, the opening / closing mode of the second big winning opening 2006 that covers the first and second rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B The opening / closing mode of the second winning opening 2006 extending over the third and third rounds is the same, and when the sorting piece 2433 operates in the third round, the second and third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A The opening and closing mode of the second big winning opening 2006 over the second big winning opening 2006 is the same as the opening and closing manner of the second big winning opening 2006 in the third round of the 15R big hit gaming state B.

  According to the first embodiment, the first to third rounds of the 15R big hitting game state A and the 15R big hitting game state B occur (a period in which the second big winning opening 2006 having the second receiving port 2432 is opened plural times). Of the second round winning opening 2006 in the first round of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B in the first round (specific round). (2 times in 15R jackpot gaming state A, 1 time in 15R jackpot gaming state B), and the number of times the second big winning opening 2006 is opened in the second and third rounds (non-specific round) is made different (15R jackpot game). (In the state A, two times in total, and in the 15R jackpot game state B, three times in total.) At that time, in the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the number of times of opening the second big winning opening 2006 in the first round is different, but the number of opening of the second big winning opening 2006 in the 1-3 round occurrence period is changed. By setting the number of times the second special winning opening 2006 is opened in the second and third rounds so that the total number of open times is the same, the sorting piece 2433 is operated in the first round of the period of occurrence of the first to third rounds Despite this, it is possible to make it difficult to determine which round is being performed from the opening and closing operation of the second big winning opening 2006, and the above-described game characteristics can be realized more effectively.

  Also, the configuration may be changed so long as it approximates a part of a series of opening and closing modes of the second big winning opening 2006 in the first to third round occurrence periods of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B. Good. For example, the opening time and the opening timing of a part of the opening operation of the second big winning opening 2006 during the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B during the first to third rounds, or For example, it is possible to make the opening times of the two major winning openings 2006 differ so as to approximate them. As a first example of such a mode, a 15R jackpot game of the first embodiment is used as a series of opening and closing modes of the second big winning opening 2006 during the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state B of the first embodiment. Similar to the state A, the opening and closing pattern of “short opening → long opening → short opening → long opening” is common, but the first opening time of the second big winning opening 2006 is not “0.5 seconds”. Those that have been changed to "0.8 seconds" (changed to a slightly longer time) and those in which the second opening time of the second grand prize opening 2006 has been changed to "19 seconds" instead of "20 seconds" (slightly (Changed to a short time). It should be noted that the difference in the opening time different from the 15R big hit gaming state A is not limited to the above described one, as long as it is difficult for the player to determine. As a second example, as a series of opening and closing modes of the second big winning opening 2006 in the first to third round occurrence periods of the 15R big hit gaming state B of the first embodiment, the 15R big hit gaming state A of the first embodiment Similarly, while the general opening / closing pattern of “short opening → long opening → short opening → long opening” is common, the closing time between the first opening and the second opening of the second special winning opening 2006 (between rounds) Interval or interval within a round) was changed to "4.7 seconds" instead of "4.5 seconds" to slightly delay the release timing, or changed to "4.2 seconds" to slightly advance the release timing Can be exemplified. Note that the difference in the closing time different from the 15R big hit gaming state A is not limited to the one described above, as long as it is difficult for the player to determine. As a third example, as a series of opening and closing modes of the second big winning opening 2006 during the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state B of the first embodiment, the 15R jackpot gaming state A of the first embodiment While having a similar opening / closing pattern of “short opening → long opening”, another short opening (for example, opening the second big winning opening 2006 once in 0.5 seconds) before and after the opening / closing pattern. In addition, except for the one with a slightly increased number of times of opening and the second short opening in the rough opening / closing pattern of “short opening → long opening → short opening → long opening” in the 15R jackpot game state A of the first embodiment. The number of times of release can be reduced slightly. It should be noted that the difference in the number of times of opening different from the 15R big hit gaming state A is not limited to the one described above, as long as it is difficult for the player to determine. As described above, a series of opening and closing modes of the second big winning opening 2006 during the first to third rounds of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B are performed in the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B. By changing the degree of approximation, it can be difficult to determine whether the state is set to the special state or the non-special state by looking at the opening operation of the second special winning opening 2006. Equivalent game characteristics can be realized.

  According to the first embodiment, the first to third rounds of the 15R big hitting game state A and the 15R big hitting game state B occur (a period in which the second big winning opening 2006 having the second receiving port 2432 is opened plural times). In the first round, the sorting piece 2433 is set to operate. For this reason, as described above, it is difficult to determine whether or not it is the first round opening even if the opening operation of the second special winning opening 2006 is viewed. It is possible to entertain the game as to whether or not the second large winning opening 2006 can accept the game ball, while predicting which control is to be performed and predicting whether the game is to be opened in the first round.

  In addition, as in the first embodiment, by allowing the game ball to be received in the second receiving port 2432 by the operation of the sorting piece 2433 in each big hitting game state, "the occurrence of a high probability state in each hitting game state" Difficulty "and" acceptable timing of game balls in the second reception port 2432, which is a trigger of a high-probability state in each hitting game state ", can be controlled in a manner that reflects the intention of the game designer. Therefore, occurrence of a high probability state unintended by the game designer can be suppressed, and the above-described game characteristics can be reliably realized.

  Further, according to the first embodiment, the following gaming effects can be achieved as compared with the related art. In other words, in the conventional “gaming machine that controls to a high probability state based on a V winning (corresponding to a game ball being accepted to the second entrance 2432)”, it is easy to enter a ball in the big winning opening (for example, The game is provided with an advantageous jackpot game state in which the special winning opening is opened for a long time (open for a long time) and an unfavorable jackpot gaming state in which the special winning opening is opened in a mode in which it is difficult to enter the ball (for example, short opening) in the special winning opening. The presence / absence of a high probability state (difficulty of occurrence) is substantially controlled based on the occurrence rate of each jackpot game state preset by a designer. However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the presence or absence of a high-probability state (probability of occurrence) at first glance is recognized by a player depending on whether or not the special winning opening is opened in an easy-to-enter mode in a jackpot game state. There was a problem. For example, in the advantageous jackpot game state, it is recognized that the possibility of being controlled to the high probability state by opening the big winning opening in an easy ball entry mode is recognized, and the player feels reassurance at that time. May be given. In this case, the operation of launching the game ball for generating the winning prize opening and the V prize is a mere work, and the original fun of the gaming machine that pays attention to the behavior of the launched game ball is impaired, There was a risk that the interest would be reduced. In addition, in the disadvantageous jackpot game state, it is recognized that the possibility of being controlled to the high probability state is low by opening the big winning opening in a manner that makes it difficult to enter the ball, and at that time, the player is disappointed. It may give a feeling. Also in this case, there is a possibility that the willingness of the game is reduced, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game is reduced. On the other hand, according to the first embodiment, while having the conventional basic configuration in which the state is controlled to the high probability state based on the V winning (corresponding to the reception of the game ball in the second receiving port 2432). In each jackpot gaming state (15R jackpot gaming state A, 15R jackpot gaming state B), the second big winning opening 2006 can be opened in a manner that allows easy entry of a ball, and the second receiving port 2432 is operated by the operation of the sorting piece 2433. It is determined that it is difficult to determine whether or not the second big winning opening 2006 which can accept the game ball is open. Thereby, while it is possible to control whether or not the high-probability state occurs (difficulty of occurrence) based on the occurrence rate of each big-hit game state set in advance by the game designer, the high-probability state is controlled after the big-hit game state ends. Can be indistinguishable from the operation of the second big winning opening 2006, while giving the player a willingness to actively play the game ball in the second big winning opening 2006 during each big hit gaming state, It is possible to provide the original fun of the gaming machine that pays attention to the behavior of the launched gaming ball entering the second winning opening 2006. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest during the big hit gaming state.

  In the first embodiment, two large winning prizes are provided: a first large prize winning opening 2005 and a second large prize winning opening 2006 having a first receiving opening 2431 and a second receiving opening 2432 therein. Alternatively, only the second special winning opening 2006 may be provided without the first special winning opening 2005. In such a case, in both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the second big winning opening 2005 is set to be opened once for a long time (for example, 20 seconds) in the 4th to 15th rounds. do it. During the opening of the second special winning opening 2005, the second reception port 2432 is always closed (a state in which game balls are distributed to the first reception port 2431 side by the sorting piece 2433), thereby making one round. At the time of opening the second big winning opening 2006, without playing the game whether the game ball is distributed (accepted) to the second receiving opening 2432 when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened. What is necessary is just to play a game whether a game ball is accepted. As described above, in the case where only the second big winning opening 2006 is provided, the player in the first to third rounds and the fourth to fifteenth rounds in the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B Since the target big winning opening (the second winning opening 2006) is the same, it is not necessary to change the firing intensity of the game ball, and the game can be performed continuously in the 4th to 15th rounds. .

  Further, in the first embodiment, in both the 15R big hitting game state A and the 15R big hitting game state B, there is only a short time opening (0.5 seconds) at the first opening of the second big winning opening 2006. When the winning opening 2006 is opened for the first time, it is extremely difficult to accept the game ball in the second winning opening 2006, and during the period when the second winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (0.5 second). Since the distributing piece 2433 is operated only for a short time (0.2 seconds), it is extremely difficult to distribute (accept) the game ball received in the second winning port 2006 to the second receiving port 2432. I have. On the other hand, in each of the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, when the second large winning opening 2006 is opened for the first time, the second large winning opening 2006 is opened to the extent that a game ball can be accepted. (For example, 2 seconds), and furthermore, the sorting piece 2433 is operated during the period in which the second special winning opening 2006 is opened to such an extent that the game balls can be distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2432 ( (For example, 1 second). Thereby, in both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the game ball is placed in the second big winning opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432 more than when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for the second time. Although it is difficult to be accepted by the entrance 2432, since it becomes possible to accept the game ball in the second large winning opening 2006 and the second entrance 2432, one of the second large winning opening 2006 is set. Even at the time of the opening of the second time, it is possible to entertain a game as to whether or not a game ball can be received in the second special winning opening 2006 and the second receiving port 2432.

  In addition, the state is set to be in a valid state (a state in which the game is controlled to the high probability state after the big hit game state is completed by the reception of the game ball in the second receiving port 2432) until the third opening of the second big winning opening 2006. At the same time, the 15R big hitting game state C in which a game ball can be received in the second receiving port 2432 by the operation of the sorting piece 2433 even when the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for the third time is separately provided, and the second big winning is achieved. The second opening of the opening 2006 and the second receiving of the second winning opening 2006 are better at the second opening of the opening 2006 than at the opening of the second opening of the opening 2006. In order to increase the probability that a game ball is accepted by the second entrance 2432 at the entrance 2432 (for example, the opening time of the second special winning opening 2006 and the operation time of the sorting piece 2433 are gradually increased. Configuration may be. This makes it difficult for the second special winning opening 2006 to accept a game ball when the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for the first time, but distributes the game in any of the 15R big hit gaming states A to C. The piece 2432 is operating, and the probability of controlling to the high probability state when the game ball is received in the second big winning opening 2006 is high. On the other hand, when the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for the second and third times, it is easy to receive the game ball in the second special winning opening 2006, but when the second special winning opening 2006 is opened for the second time. When the 15R jackpot gaming states A and C are executed, and when the second big winning port 2006 is opened for the third time, the sorting piece 2432 operates only when the 15R jackpot gaming state C is executed. Is higher, the probability of controlling to the high probability state becomes lower as the number of times of opening the second special winning opening 2006 increases. Therefore, during the second and third opening of the second special winning opening 2006, as the number of times the second special winning opening 2006 is opened increases, the probability that a game ball is accepted in the second special winning opening 2006 increases. In contrast, the probability that game balls are distributed (accepted) to the second reception port 2432 is reduced, and a novel game in which the probability of controlling to a high probability state is reduced can be enjoyed.

  As described above, the opening time of the second special winning opening 2006 for the first opening is slightly longer (for example, 2 seconds), and the possibility of entering the game ball at the first opening of the second special winning opening 2006 is increased. May be increased. In the first embodiment, in the 15R big hitting game state A and the 15R big hitting game state B, the opening timing of the second big winning opening 2006 in which the game ball can be received in the second receiving port 2432 is the same. In addition, since the end time of the opening of the second special winning opening 2006 is made different, the use of this configuration makes it possible to obtain “the second special winning opening 2006 as soon as possible after the opening of the second special winning opening 2006 a plurality of times. By accepting the game ball in the winning opening 2006, the possibility that the game ball is accepted in the second reception port 2432 is increased, and the possibility of giving a profit (giving a high probability state) is increased. " It becomes possible. With such a game characteristic, it is possible to add a new interest that draws the player's attention to “the timing when the game ball is accepted in the second big winning opening 2006” as compared with the related art.

[12. About the jackpot game state of the second embodiment]
In the above-described embodiment (first embodiment), two large winning a prize openings 2005 and a second large winning prize opening 2006 having a first receiving port 2431 and a second receiving port 2432 therein are used. Although it is provided, it is good also as a specification provided only with the 2nd big winning opening 2006, without having the 1st big winning opening 2005. Then, the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C using the second big winning port 2006 are executed. In each of the 1 to 15 rounds in the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C, the second big winning port 2006 is set. The opening time, the number of times of opening, and the opening timing may be the same, and the specification may be such that it is difficult for the player to determine which of the 15R big hit game states A to C is in. A case of such specifications will be described as a second embodiment with reference to FIGS. 212 to 217. In the following description of the second embodiment, the second special winning opening 2006 is not simply provided with the first special winning opening 2005, but is simply referred to as the special winning opening 2006. The functions such as having the two receiving entrances 2432 are the same as those of the second big winning opening 2006.

  As shown in FIG. 212, the gaming board 5 of the second embodiment includes an attacker unit 2400 including a large winning opening 2006 having a first receiving port 2431 and a second receiving port 2432, a sorting piece 2433, and the like. ing. The attacker unit 2400 according to the second embodiment includes members related to the first winning opening 2005 (first winning opening 2005, first winning opening sensor 4005, first winning opening door 2412, first attacker solenoid 2108, and the like). ), Except that the game board 5 of the first embodiment is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 213, in the symbol determination table of the second embodiment, symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are associated with each determination result (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B, 15R jackpot C). It is remembered in the form of being done. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of the second embodiment, the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the first symbol random number is different from the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the second symbol random number. You have set.

In particular,
1.15R The large winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened and closed 30 times in accordance with the gaming state A of the big hit jackpot A. When the large winning opening 2006 is opened for the first to fifth times, it is opened for a short time (opening where the game ball is difficult to enter. For example, 0.5 seconds), and when the large winning opening 2006 is opened for the 6th to 30th times, it is opened for a long time (opening in which game balls can be entered (easy), for example, 2 seconds), and rounds 6 and 15 are performed. A state in which the large winning opening 2006 corresponding to the eyes is opened 15 times in total for a long period of time (a state in which the gaming ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 and the state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state). If the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the valid state in the sixth and fifteenth rounds, the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) Pattern) While the high probability time saving state is controlled until the variable display is executed 100 times, if the game ball is not accepted in the second reception port 2432 during the valid state in the sixth and fifteenth rounds, the big hit game After the end of the state, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is changed to the low probability time saving state until the variable display is executed 100 times.
The opening and closing of the special winning opening 2006 is performed 30 times in accordance with the 2.15R big hitting game state B, and the special winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time when the first winning opening 2006 is opened for the first to fifth times. For example, 0.5 seconds), and when the large winning opening 2006 is opened for the 6th to 30th times, it is opened for a long time (opening in which game balls can be entered (easy), for example, 2 seconds), and rounds 6 and 15 are performed. A state in which the large winning opening 2006 corresponding to the eyes is opened for a long time and the state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state by receiving the game ball in the second receiving port 2432. If the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the valid state in the sixth and fifteenth rounds, the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) Pattern) While the high probability time saving state is controlled until the dynamic display is executed 100 times, if the game ball is not accepted in the second reception port 2432 during the valid state in the sixth and fifteenth rounds, the big hit game After the end of the state, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is changed to the low probability time saving state until the variable display is executed 100 times.
3.15R The large winning opening 2006 is controlled to be opened and closed 30 times in accordance with the gaming state C of the big hit jackpot C. When the large winning opening 2006 is opened for the first to fifth times, it is opened for a short time (opening in which the game ball is difficult to enter. For example, 0.5 seconds), and when the large winning opening 2006 is opened for the 6th to 30th times, it is opened for a long time (opening in which game balls can be entered (easy), for example, 2 seconds), and rounds 6 and 15 are performed. Effective state with a total of nine special winning openings 2006 corresponding to the eyes open for a long time (a state in which the game is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state by the reception of the game ball in the second reception port 2432). If the game ball is received in the second receiving port 2432 during the valid state in the sixth and fifteenth rounds, the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) Pattern) While the high probability time saving state is controlled until the dynamic display is executed 100 times, if the game ball is not accepted in the second reception port 2432 during the valid state in the sixth and fifteenth rounds, the big hit game After the end of the state, the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is changed to the low probability time-saving state until the change display is executed 100 times. To decide.

  In the second embodiment, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. In the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination values is set to be different from that in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the determination ratio of each big hit is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 213, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, among the 15R jackpots A to C, the 15R jackpots A and 15R jackpots C that are relatively advantageous to the player (the sixth round) In addition, during the valid state in the fifteenth round, there is a high probability that a game ball will be accepted in the second reception port 2432, and there is a high probability of controlling the game state to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. While the value distribution is set, the probability that a game ball is accepted by the second reception port 2432 during the valid state in the sixth and fifteenth rounds is low, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. , A determination of 50 determination values is set for a large hit which has a low probability of being controlled to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the determination value distribution is set only for the 15R big hit A which is relatively advantageous to the player among the 15R big hits A to C.

  When the type of the big hit is determined, a stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big hit is determined as a mode at the time of stopping the first special symbol. Specifically, when the 15R jackpot A is determined, the 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 15R jackpot B is determined, the 15R jackpot B symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and the 15R jackpot C is determined. In this case, the big hit symbol is determined to be the 15R big hit C symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R jackpot A is determined as the 15R jackpot symbol, the 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, the 15R jackpot A among the jackpots related to the first special symbol from the received judgment result notification command. If specified, the 15R jackpot A symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols) is determined. If 15R jackpot B is specified, the 15R jackpot B symbol (common to the 15R jackpot A symbol) is determined, and the 15R jackpot C is determined. If specified, it is determined to be a 15R jackpot C symbol (common to the 15R jackpot C symbol), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the reach effect), the determined stop symbol is rendered and displayed. Display control is performed on the device 1600. As described above, when the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped at any one of the 15R jackpot A symbol, the 15R jackpot B symbol, or the 15R jackpot C symbol, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is a big hit. However, since a common symbol is used as the 15R jackpot A symbol, the 15R jackpot B symbol, and the 15R jackpot C symbol, any one of the 15R jackpot A, the 15R jackpot B, or the 15R jackpot C is determined. Can not.

  The execution table for the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C shown in FIG. 214 is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 1310a, and the operation schedule of the special winning opening 2006 and the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433 in the first to fifteenth rounds are stored. , And the status setting schedule of the second reception port 2432 are associated with each other. FIG. 215 (A) is a timing chart of the first to fifteenth release performed according to the execution table in the 15R big hit game state A, and FIG. 215 (B) is executed in accordance with the execution table in the 15R big hit game state B. FIG. 216 (C) is a timing chart of the first to fifteenth releases performed according to the execution table in the 15R big hitting game state C.

  As shown in FIG. 214, in the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C, when the large winning opening 2006 is opened for the first to fifth times, the large winning opening 2006 is shortly opened (0.5 Second winning opening 2006 is set to be opened for a long time (2 seconds) at the time of opening the big winning opening 2006 for the 6th to 30th times. Also, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2433, in the sixth round and the fifteenth round to be described later, the sorting piece 2433 is operated for a long time (1 second) when the special winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (2 seconds). However, with the number of rounds excluding the sixth and fifteenth rounds, when the special winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds) or for a long time (2 seconds), it is shaken. The segment 2433 is set not to operate.

  In the 15R jackpot gaming state A, the first to fifth opening of the special winning opening 2006 is defined as the first to fifth rounds, and the sixth to 13th opening of the special winning opening 2006 is defined as the sixth round. The 14th to 21st opening of the mouth 2006 is set to 7-14 rounds, and the 22nd to 30th opening of the special winning opening 2006 is set to 15 rounds. In the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the first to fourth opening of the special winning opening 2006 is the first to fourth rounds, and the fifth to tenth opening of the special winning opening 2006 is the fifth round. The 6th round is when the mouth 2006 is opened for the 11th time, the 7th round is when the 12th to 22nd opening of the special winning opening 2006 is opened, and the 8th to 15th round is when the 23rd to 30th opening of the special winning opening 2006 is opened. It is set to look at you. In the 15R jackpot gaming state C, the first to fourth opening of the special winning opening 2006 is defined as the first to fourth rounds, and the fifth to 13th opening of the special winning opening 2006 is defined as the fifth round. The opening of the mouth 2006 from the 14th to 21st opening is set to the sixth round, and the opening of the special winning opening 2006 from the 22nd to 30th is set to the 7th to 15th rounds.

  In the second embodiment, as the state setting schedule of the second reception port 2432, in the sixth and fifteenth rounds in the 15R jackpot game states A to C, the valid state (by the game ball being received in the second reception port 2432) Although the state is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state), the number of rounds excluding the sixth round and the fifteenth round is invalid (in principle, the game is transferred to the second reception port 2432). The ball is not accepted, and the state is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state). That is, in the 15R jackpot gaming state A, the setting is made such that the sorting piece 2433 is activated while the special winning opening 2006 is opened for the sixth to thirteenth opening and the twenty-second to thirty opening for the 22th to 30th. Further, in the 15R big hitting game state B, the sorting piece 2433 is set to be activated while the eleventh opening and the thirtieth opening of the special winning opening 2006 are activated while being in the effective state. In the 15R jackpot gaming state C, the sorting piece 2433 is set to be activated while the winning opening 2006 is being opened for the 14th to 21st times and the 30th opening.

  In the 15R jackpot gaming state A, when the special winning opening 2006 is opened 30 times out of the 30 times, a valid state (after the gaming ball is received by the second receiving port 2432, the jackpot gaming state ends). The state in which the state is controlled to the high probability state) is set so that the sorting piece 2433 operates. In addition, in the 15R big hitting game state B, the sorting piece 2433 is set to operate while being in the effective state when the special winning opening 2006 is opened two times out of 30 times. In addition, in the 15R big hit gaming state C, the distributing piece 2433 is set to be activated while the effective winning state is activated when the special winning opening 2006 is opened nine times out of thirty times. For this reason, in the 15R jackpot gaming state A among the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C, the number of times the large winning opening 2006 that allows the game ball to be received in the second reception port 2432 (the number of times the sorting piece 2433 is operated) ), The probability that the game ball will be accepted in the second receiving port 2432 during the big hit game state is the highest, and the probability of controlling to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends is the highest. On the other hand, in the 15R jackpot gaming state B among the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C, the number of times of opening the special winning opening 2006 that enables the second receiving port 2432 to receive a game ball (the number of actuations of the sorting piece 2433). Is the smallest, the probability that a game ball is accepted in the second receiving port 2432 during the big hit gaming state is the lowest, and the probability of controlling to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the lowest.

  As shown in FIGS. 215 (A), (B) and FIG. 128 (C), in the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C, the special winning opening 2006 is opened 30 times as the first to fifteenth rounds. The opening time, the number of times of opening, and the opening timing in 2006 are all the same. In the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C, the number of times of opening the special winning opening 2006 in each of the first to fifteenth rounds is different, but the player is not notified of the number of running rounds. As described above, in the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C, the opening pattern of the special winning opening 2006 is the same for the first to fifteenth rounds as a whole. It is configured such that the player cannot determine which of A to C it is.

  In the second embodiment, since the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C are only opened for a short time (0.5 seconds) at the time of opening the first to fifth large winning opening 2006 for the first to fifth times, a game ball is placed in the large winning opening 2006. It has become extremely difficult to be accepted.

  Also, in the second embodiment, the game balls are received in the special winning opening 2006 because the large winning opening 2006 is opened for a long time (2 seconds) when the large winning opening 2006 is opened for the 6th to 30th times in any of the 15R big hit gaming states A to C. When the sorting piece 2433 is operated during a period in which the special winning opening 2006 is opened (2 seconds) for a long time, the large winning opening 2006 is accepted for the long time operation (1 second). It is easy for the game balls to be distributed (accepted) to the second reception port 2432. However, in the 15R jackpot gaming state A, when the big winning opening 2006 is opened for the 6th to 13th times (6th round) and when the 22nd to 30th opening (15th round) is opened, in the 15R jackpot gaming state B, the big winning prize is given. At the time of opening the mouth 2006 for the 11th time (6th round) and at the time of opening the 30th time (15th round), in the 15R jackpot gaming state C, at the time of opening the 14 to 21st time of the special winning opening 2006 (6th round) Also, the distributing piece 2433 is set to operate at the time of the 30th opening (15th round). In this way, in the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C, the special winning opening 2006 is opened 30 times as the 1st to 15th rounds, and the game balls are received in the second reception port 2432 in the 6th and 15th rounds. The opening of the special winning opening 2006 that allows the game ball to be received in the second receiving port 2432 during the first to the 30th opening of the special winning opening 2006 is set. The timing (the time of the opening) is different. More specifically, during the first to thirtieth opening of the special winning opening 2006, the start time of the opening period of the special winning opening 2006 that enables the second receiving port 2432 to receive a game ball (the number of times Starting from the time of opening), the end time of the opening period of the special winning opening 2006 (at what number of opening times), the number of times of opening of the special winning opening 2006 (what is the time of opening 1 to 30 times) Or the number of times of release). In addition, the number of the round when the special winning opening 2006 is opened, and whether or not the sorting piece 2433 is operated while the special winning opening 2006 is open, whether the distributing piece 2433 is set to the valid state or the invalid state is set. Is not notified to the player. For this reason, even if the game ball is received at the time of opening the special winning opening 2006, it is determined whether or not the sixth and fifteenth rounds at which the game ball can be received at the second reception port 2432 are opened. It is difficult to determine whether to control to the high-probability state or not to the high-probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the second embodiment, the distributing piece 2433 is operated based on any of the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C at any of the 6 to 30 times opening of the special winning opening 2006. Is set to In addition, the number of the round when the special winning opening 2006 is opened, and whether or not the sorting piece 2433 is operated while the special winning opening 2006 is open, whether the distributing piece 2433 is set to the valid state or the invalid state is set. Is not notified to the player. For this reason, even when the game ball is received in the special winning opening 2006 during any of the 6th to 30th opening times of the special winning opening 2006, the game ball is stored in the second receiving port 2432 regardless of the opening time. Since there is a possibility that the game has been sorted (accepted), the state is in the high probability state until the player is notified after the termination of the big hit game state of controlling to the high probability state or not controlling to the high probability state. The game can be continued with expectation. In addition, of the 6 to 30 times of opening of the special winning opening 2006, any opening (excluding the 30th opening) when the gaming ball is received in the special winning opening 2006 is performed. Also, since there is a possibility that the game ball is not distributed (not accepted) to the second reception port 2432, the opening of the special winning opening 2006 until the opening of the sixth to thirty times of the special winning opening 2006 ends. During the opening, it is possible to continue the game as to whether the game ball is accepted.

  Next, a specific effect example in the effect display device 1600 of the second embodiment when executing the 15R big hit game states A to C will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment, at least when the first winning opening 2006 is opened for the first to fifth times and at the time when the sixth winning opening is opened for the 6th to 30th times in the gaming state A to C of the 15R jackpot, the effect is shared by the effect display device 1600. Is to run.

  First, in the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is started based on the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received by the peripheral control board 1510, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → medium. The display is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in the order of the decorative symbols, but as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the fluctuation stop of the decorative symbols, a 15R jackpot A among the jackpots related to the first special symbol is received from the received judgment result notification command. Is determined, the 15R jackpot A symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols) is determined. If the 15R jackpot B is identified, the 15R jackpot B symbol (common to the 15R jackpot A symbol) is determined, and the 15R jackpot C is determined. Is determined, the pattern is determined to be the 15R jackpot C symbol (common to the 15R jackpot A symbol), and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (reach The determined stop symbols at the output at the end) to the effect display device 1600 is configured to display control. In this way, regardless of the determination of any of the 15R jackpots A to C, by displaying and controlling the common stop symbol as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is changed to the 15R jackpot A. To C cannot be determined.

  Next, until the waiting time until the big hit gaming state set in the interval timer set in the interval timer in the processing of the above-described step S190 elapses, the 15R big hit gaming states A to C are released at the time of the 6th to 30th opening. Of the game method is explained. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217 (A), the effect display device 1600 notifies the player of a message that "If you enter the ball while the special winning opening is open, it may change!" This allows the player to understand that if a game ball is received while the special winning opening 2006 is open, there is a chance that the game will be controlled to the high probability state after the big hit game state ends.

  Next, at the time of the first to fifth opening of the special winning opening 2006 in the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C, a countdown effect of counting down the waiting time until the opening of the sixth to thirty times is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217 (B), on the effect display device 1600, a message “Countdown!” Is sent to the player, and “5” is displayed as time elapses in the center of the screen. , "4", "3", "2", "1", and the like, so as to notify the player of the waiting time until the 6th to 30th opening is started. In addition, as described above, at the time of opening the first winning opening 2006 for the first to fifth times, there is only a short opening time (0.5 second), so that it is extremely difficult to receive a game ball in the winning opening 2006, Furthermore, since the sorting piece 2433 is not operated during a period in which the special winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time (0.5 second), the game ball received in the special winning opening 2006 is distributed to the second receiving opening 2432 (accepted). ) Never. For this reason, when opening the special winning opening 2006 for the first to fifth times, expectations for entering the special winning opening 2006 and the second entrance 2432 tend to decrease, but by executing the countdown effect, Expectations for the opening of the grand prize opening 2006 to be started for the 6th to 30th times are being fueled, so that the expectations for entering the grand prize opening 2006 and the second entrance 2432 are not reduced.

  Next, at the time of the sixth to thirty opening of the special winning opening 2006 in the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C, the target indicating that the opening of the special winning opening 2006 should be aimed at so that the game ball can be received in the special winning opening 2006. The instruction production is being performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 217 (D), the effect display device 1600 notifies the player of the message “during the chance mode! Aim for the big winning opening!” And includes the big winning opening 2006 and the like. An image showing the location of the special winning opening 2006 that the player should aim for in the game area 5a is displayed together with the image of the game area 5a. As a result, it is possible to clearly know where in the game area 5a to aim for a game ball to be accepted while the special winning opening 2006 is open. In addition, at the time of opening the special winning opening 2006 in the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C for the 6th to 30th times, every time a gaming ball is received in the special winning opening 2006, the fact that the gaming ball is received in the special winning opening 2006 is described. The performance at the time of the ball shown is being executed. In the effect at the time of entering the ball, a message of "entering the special winning opening!" Is notified to the player on the effect display device 1600, similarly to the image shown in FIG. Thereby, for example, even when the player has overlooked whether or not the game ball was received in the special winning opening 2006, it is possible to clearly know that the game ball was received in the special winning opening 2006, The expectation that the game will be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the gaming state can be increased.

  In the second embodiment, at the time of opening the 1st to 30th of the special winning opening 2006 in the 15R big hit gaming states A to C, that is, until the game finishes all rounds, the game ball is opened during the opening of the special winning opening 2006. Even if it is accepted, it is difficult to determine whether or not the sixth and fifteenth rounds when the game ball can be accepted in the second reception port 2432 are open. It is difficult to determine whether to control to the high probability state or not to the high probability state after the end of the gaming state. Then, in the subsequent games as well, after the big hit game state ends, it is not notified whether to control to the high probability state (control) or not to control to the high probability state (not to control). Thus, even after the end of the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C, it may be controlled to the high probability state by hiding whether the state is controlled to the high probability state or not controlled to the high probability state. The game can be continued with the expectation that there is no game. In addition, at least during the execution of the 15R jackpot gaming states A to C, it is determined whether or not a gaming ball has been distributed (accepted) to the second reception port 2432 during the valid state in the sixth and fifteenth rounds, It is not necessary to notify whether to control to the high-probability state or not to the high-probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state. After the end of the big hitting game state, the player is notified whether to control the state to the high probability state or not to the high probability state, or to change the number of the special symbol from the end of the 15R big hitting game state A to C as a special symbol change display. After several tens of fluctuations have been made, the player may be notified whether the state is controlled to the high probability state or not controlled to the high probability state.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, during the first to thirty times opening of the special winning opening 2006 having the second receiving opening 2432, the large winning prize that allows the game ball to be received in the second receiving opening 2432. By setting the opening time of the mouth 2006 (the number of times of opening) to be different, even if the game ball is received while the special winning opening 2006 is open, the game ball is received in the second reception port 2432. It is difficult to determine whether or not it is the opening of the special winning opening 2006 that can be made, and it is determined whether to control the state to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state or not to the high probability state. It is difficult to do. As a result, similarly to the first embodiment, even if a game ball is received in the special winning opening 2006, the player is not given a sense of security, and is expected to be controlled to the high probability state or not to the high probability state. It is possible to continue the big hit game while giving the player a feeling and tension.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, the following effects can be obtained in addition to the various effects obtained by the first embodiment. That is, while the large winning opening 2006 in which the game ball can be received in the second receiving port 2432 is opened a plurality of times, the game ball is thrown in as many large winning openings 2006 as possible. Therefore, the possibility of giving a profit (giving a high probability state) by accepting a game ball in the second reception port 2432 is increased, "can be realized. More specifically, “If a game ball is accepted in the special winning opening 2006 in all of the multiple opening of the special winning opening 2006, a profit is given with a high probability (giving a sense of security), while Among the multiple opening of 2006, as the number of times the game ball is accepted in the special winning opening 2006 decreases, the possibility of profit provision decreases (the more the number of times the game ball is accepted in the special winning opening 2006 increases the sense of expectation). Is given)). With such a game characteristic, it is possible to add a new interest that draws the player's attention to “the number of times a game ball is accepted in the special winning opening 2006” as compared with the related art.

  As described above, the present invention has been described with reference to the preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and in this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main frame 5 Gaming board 5a Gaming area 1000 Front component 1100 Gaming panel 2000 Table unit 2005 First big winning opening 2006 Second big winning opening 2400 Attacker unit (variable ball entry device)
2431 1st entrance 2432 2nd entrance (specific area)
2433 Distributing piece 2434 First receiving sensor 2435 Second receiving sensor (specific area)
3000 Back unit 3500 Back movable unit 3510 Back upper first decorative unit (decorative body)
3511 First left movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3512 First right movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3513 First fixed decorative lens (fixed decorative part)
3516 First lower arm 3518 First upper arm 3520 First opening / closing gear member 3521 First opening / closing arm 3523 First opening / closing spring (biasing member)
3524 First mounting base 3525 First mounting shaft member 3530 Upper back second decorative body unit (decorative body)
3531 Second left movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3532 Second right movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3533 Second fixed decorative lens (fixed decorative part)
3536 Second lower arm 3538 Second upper arm 3540 Second open / close gear member 3541 Second open / close arm 3543 Second open / close spring (biasing member)
3544 second mounting base 3550 back upper third decorative body unit (decorative body)
3551 Third left movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3552 Third right movable decorative lens (movable decorative part)
3553 Third fixed decorative lens (fixed decorative part)
3556 Third lower arm 3558 Third upper arm 3560 Third opening / closing gear member 3561 Third opening / closing arm 3563 Third opening / closing spring (biasing member)
3564 Third mounting base 3570 Upper back rotating base unit (base body)
3571 Back upper rotating base 3573 Second drive link gear member 3578 Third drive link gear member 3585 Actuating lever drive motor 3585 Acting lever pinion gear 3586 Acting lever (acting body)
3586a Working lever rack gear 3586f First working portion 3586i Second working portion 3586k Third working portion 3600 Back raising / lowering unit 3610 Movable unit 3611 Movable base (appearance base)
3612 Upper back rotation drive motor 3614 Rotation base drive gear 3650 Fixed side unit 3652 Elevator rotating body 3654 Back up / down drive motor

Claims (2)

A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed,
A body frame on which the game board is mounted,
A door frame provided to be openable and closable on the main body frame,
A bulging portion provided on the door frame, bulging forward below the game area in a front view, and forming a predetermined internal space;
An upper plate provided on the upper surface side of the bulging portion and storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area,
An operation device housed in the internal space and operable by a player;
A bottom plate having a bottom wall portion having a predetermined shape and a standing wall portion having a predetermined height, provided on the door frame, and a lower plate through which game media can flow in from a predetermined supply port;
The lower plate is provided in a space provided in the bulging portion and arranged in a horizontal direction with the internal space,
The lower plate main body has a first lower plate portion formed with an area facing the front of the gaming machine, and a second lower plate portion provided integrally with the first lower plate portion and formed with a region not facing the front of the gaming machine. And 2 lower plates,
Cover means for covering the upper side of the second lower dish upon which is constituted by a separate member separable and the lower dish body, the lower as integrated with said lower pan body regardless closing state of the door frame Assemble to the dish body ,
The cover means includes a boundary wall serving as a boundary between the space above the bottom wall portion and the internal space in the second lower plate portion,
The boundary wall prevents the game medium from flowing out of the second lower plate portion to the outside of the lower plate other than the first lower plate portion, and the game medium flows from the second lower plate portion to the internal space. To prevent intrusion,
A closing portion for closing the rear of the internal space is provided on the door frame,
Furthermore, on the opposite side of the side where the lower plate is provided with the internal space as a boundary, a handle portion for emitting game media is provided,
The gaming machine, wherein the bulging portion is provided so as to protrude forward of the gaming machine from a frontmost portion of the handle portion. A game board in which a game area in which a predetermined game is performed is formed,
A body frame on which the game board is mounted,
A door frame provided to be openable and closable on the main body frame,
A bulging portion provided on the door frame, bulging forward below the game area in a front view, and forming a predetermined internal space;
An upper plate provided on the upper surface side of the bulging portion and storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area,
An effect device that is housed in the internal space and has a predetermined effect,
A bottom plate having a bottom wall portion having a predetermined shape and a standing wall portion having a predetermined height, provided on the door frame, and a lower plate through which game media can flow in from a predetermined supply port;
The lower plate is provided in a space provided in the bulging portion and arranged in a horizontal direction with the internal space,
The lower plate main body has a first lower plate portion formed with an area facing the front of the gaming machine, and a second lower plate portion provided integrally with the first lower plate portion and formed with a region not facing the front of the gaming machine. And 2 lower plates,
Cover means for covering the upper side of the second lower dish upon which is constituted by a separate member separable and the lower dish body, the lower as integrated with said lower pan body regardless closing state of the door frame Assemble to the dish body ,
The cover means includes a boundary wall serving as a boundary between the space above the bottom wall portion and the internal space in the second lower plate portion,
The boundary wall prevents the game medium from flowing out of the second lower plate portion to the outside of the lower plate other than the first lower plate portion, and the game medium flows from the second lower plate portion to the internal space. To prevent intrusion,
A closing portion for closing the rear of the internal space is provided on the door frame,
Furthermore, on the opposite side of the side where the lower plate is provided with the internal space as a boundary, a handle portion for emitting game media is provided,
The gaming machine, wherein the bulging portion is provided so as to protrude forward of the gaming machine from a frontmost portion of the handle portion.

Images